NonStop NET/MASTER D30. MS Operator's Guide. System Software Library

Transcription

1 System Software Library NonStop NET/MASTER MS Operator's Guide Abstract Part Number Edition This manual describes the user interface to NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS). It provides the information users need to get started with NonStop NET/MASTER MS and to use basic NonStop NET/MASTER MS facilities. First Published December 1994 Product Version Release ID D30.00 Supported Releases NonStop NET/MASTER D30 This manual supports D30.00 and all subsequent releases until otherwise indicated in a new edition. Tandem Computers Incorporated

2 Document History Edition Part Number Product Version Earliest Supported Release Published First D30 D30.00 December 1994 New editions incorporate any updates issued since the previous edition. A plus sign (+) after a release ID indicates that this manual describes function added to the base release, either by an interim product modification (IPM) or by a new product version on a.99 site update tape (SUT). Note This manual replaces the manual NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) Operator's Guide, part number , which was published in January Copyright Document Disclaimer Export Statement Examples Copyright 1994 by Tandem Computers Incorporated. Printed in the U.S.A. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, including photocopying or translation to another language, without the prior written consent of Tandem Computers Incorporated. Information contained in a manual is subject to change without notice. Please check with your authorized Tandem representative to make sure you have the most recent information. Export of the information contained in this manual may require authorization from the U. S. Department of Commerce. Examples and sample programs are for illustration only and may not be suited for your particular purpose. Tandem does not warrant, guarantee, or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of any examples or sample programs in any documentation. You should verify the applicability of any example or sample program before placing the software into productive use. Ordering Information For manual ordering information: Domestic U.S. customers, call ; international customers, contact your local sales representative.

3 New and Changed Information The operating system for Tandem NonStop systems, formerly called the Guardian operating system, is now called the Tandem NonStop Kernel. This change reflects Tandem s current and future operating system enhancements that further enable open systems and application portability. The Sterling Software services to which NonStop NET/MASTER MS connects, formerly the product called NET/MASTER, is now referred to as the SOLVE management services. References to the NCL Automation Rule Set (NARS) have been removed from the manual. The titles of all NonStop NET/MASTER MS manuals and reference summaries, except the NonStop NET/MASTER Messages Manual, have changed. (The title of this manual was formerly the NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) Operator s Guide.) Cross-references reflect the changed titles. All sections have minor changes, which include updated screen displays, examples, and figures. The following sections have major changes: Notation Conventions The notation conventions information has been expanded. Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS The subsection Using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Help Facility consolidates and expands information from Sections 3 through 6 about how to get help for facilities, services, panels, commands, and messages. User ID Management Services (UMS) The subsection Browsing Your User ID Definition Record has new information about the NCL procedure library and NCL object file search paths, and about the panel library and panel object file search paths. The subsection Valid Passwords has new criteria for valid passwords. Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands The subsection Command Authority Levels has new information on the SHOW COMMANDS command, which is used to display command and operand authority levels. Information in the subsection Getting Help for Commands has been moved to Section 1. Operator Control Services (OCS) Information in the subsection Getting Help for Commands has been moved to Section 1. Information related to message help in the subsection The Event Message Flow has been moved to Section Tandem Computers Incorporated iii

4 New and Changed Information Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 Section 10 Glossary Index System Support Services Information related to command help and message help in the subsection The Command Entry Facility has been moved to Section 1. Examining the Activity Log Information in the subsection Finding Out More About a Message has been moved to Section 1. Accessing External Utilities and Applications The subsection Running Block-Mode Applications mentions that you can use the PROGRUN command to run an application from a remote system. Communicating With Remote Systems The section has new information about using background color to display and identify messages from remote systems. Using Edit Services The subsection Your Default Library discusses the distributed NCL object file. The subsection Testing a Panel discusses the distributed panel object file. Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures The subsection Performing a Test Compilation on an NCL Procedure distinguishes between three types of mistakes that are detected during compilation: warnings, errors, and fatal errors. The subsection Executing Persistent NCL Processes is new. The subsection The Default NCL Procedure Search Path has new information about the default NCL procedure search path. The glossary has been expanded. The index has been expanded. iv Tandem Computers Incorporated

5 Contents About This Manual xvii Notation Conventions xxiii Section 1 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS What Is in This Section 1-1 What Is NonStop NET/MASTER MS? 1-1 Terminals Supported 1-2 Function Key Conventions 1-2 Managing Networks With NonStop NET/MASTER MS 1-3 Windows, Panels, and Menus 1-5 Before You Can Log On to NonStop NET/MASTER MS 1-5 Logging On to NonStop NET/MASTER MS 1-6 The Logon Screen 1-6 If the Logon Screen Is Not Displayed Starting a Session 1-6 Steps for Logging On 1-7 Logging Off From NonStop NET/MASTER MS 1-8 The NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu 1-8 The Primary Menu Options 1-9 The Menu Hierarchy 1-10 Navigating Through the Menu Hierarchy 1-12 Selecting an Option From a Menu 1-12 Directly Accessing Menu Options Panel Skipping 1-12 Returning to the Previous Panel EXIT Key 1-12 Returning to the Previous Menu RETURN Key 1-12 Using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Help Facility 1-13 Help for a Service, Facility, or Panel 1-13 Help for a Message 1-13 Help for a Command 1-15 The Function Keys 1-17 Working With Two Windows 1-18 Splitting Windows 1-18 Swapping Windows Tandem Computers Incorporated v

6 Contents Section 2 User ID Management Services (UMS) What Is in This Section 2-1 Accessing UMS 2-1 Browsing Your User ID Definition Record 2-3 The User Details Screen 2-3 The User Attributes Screen 2-5 The Access Authorities Screen 2-7 The User Installation Attributes Screen 2-9 The OCS Details Screen 2-10 Listing User ID Definition Records of Other Users 2-12 Scrolling Through the User Definition List 2-15 Locating a Record in the User Definition List 2-16 Viewing the User ID Definition Record of Another User 2-18 Exiting From the User Definition List 2-18 Changing Your Password 2-18 Valid Passwords 2-21 Changing Your User Name, Location, or Telephone Number 2-23 Refreshing Your User ID Definition Record 2-24 If You Forget Your Password 2-24 Console Extras Configurations 2-24 Browsing Console Extras Configurations 2-25 The Console Extras Utility Details Screen 2-28 Terminal Timeouts 2-29 How Global Configuration Values Affect Your Operations Environment 2-29 Section 3 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands What Is in This Section 3-1 Command Authority Levels 3-1 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands 3-3 Manually Entering NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands 3-3 Abbreviating Commands 3-3 Concatenating Commands 3-3 Using Function Keys to Issue NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands 3-4 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From NCL Procedures 3-4 vi Tandem Computers Incorporated

7 Contents Issuing Timer Commands 3-5 Attributes of Timer Commands 3-5 The Timer Queue 3-6 Executing Timer Commands When You Are Not Logged On 3-6 Using the KEEP Operand 3-6 Using the ROUTE Operand 3-6 Sending a Timer Command to Another User 3-6 Limiting the Number of Times a Command Is Executed 3-7 Purging a Timer Command 3-7 System-Wide Customized Commands 3-8 Global Equates 3-8 Command Replacements 3-9 Executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands in the Background 3-10 Virtual Users 3-10 Submitting Commands to Virtual Users 3-11 Section 4 Operator Control Services (OCS) What Is in This Section 4-1 What Is OCS? 4-1 Entering and Exiting OCS 4-1 The Standard OCS Window 4-2 The OCS Message Display Area 4-2 Roll-Delete Messages 4-3 Temporarily Suspending Roll-Delete Message Delivery 4-4 Controlling the Roll-Delete Message Display Flow 4-4 The Message Hold Queue 4-6 Reorganizing the Message Display Area 4-6 Clearing the Roll-Delete Message Area 4-6 Non-Roll-Delete (NRD) Messages 4-7 Full NRD Messages 4-7 NRD Messages With the OPER Attribute 4-8 When a NRD Message Is Displayed on an OCS Window 4-8 Pending NRD Messages 4-9 Removing NRD Messages From Your OCS Window 4-9 Restoring Full NRD Messages to Your OCS Window 4-9 Deleting NRD Messages From Your OCS Window and the Central Queue 4-9 NRD Messages From Remote Locations Tandem Computers Incorporated vii

8 Contents The Information Line 4-11 The Command Input Line 4-11 The Mode Indicator 4-12 The OCS Recall Buffer 4-13 Entering and Exiting the Recall Buffer 4-13 The Recall Buffer Screen 4-14 The Recall Buffer Function Keys 4-15 Using the OCS Function Keys 4-17 Displaying the Current Function Key Definitions 4-17 Customizing Function Keys 4-18 Your OCS Operator Profile 4-21 Displaying Your Operator Profile 4-21 Modifying Your Operator Profile for the Current Session 4-21 Customizing Your Initial Operator Profile 4-22 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From OCS 4-22 Entering Commands on the Command Input Line 4-22 Suppressing the Command Echo 4-22 Retaining Commands on the Command Input Line 4-23 Defining Function Keys to Issue Commands 4-23 Reexecuting Previously Entered Commands 4-23 Executing Commands From an NCL Procedure 4-24 Creating Customized Commands in OCS 4-24 Local Equates 4-24 Deleting a Local Equate 4-24 Monitoring Events 4-25 The Event Message Flow 4-26 Message Color and Highlighting 4-28 Event Message Codes 4-29 Viewing Messages in the Activity Log 4-29 Working With Two OCS Windows 4-30 Opening a Second OCS Window 4-30 Moving Between Two OCS Windows 4-30 Naming Windows 4-31 viii Tandem Computers Incorporated

9 Contents Section 5 System Support Services What Is in This Section 5-1 Entering System Support Services 5-1 The Command Entry Facility 5-2 Entering the Command Entry Facility 5-3 The Command Entry Function Keys 5-4 The Command Entry Screen 5-5 Receiving Unsolicited Messages 5-7 Entering Commands 5-7 The Command Stack 5-8 The Capture Buffer 5-9 Examining the Capture Buffer 5-11 Printing the Capture Buffer 5-14 Emptying the Capture Buffer 5-15 The Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings Facility 5-16 Entering the Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings Facility 5-16 The Display/Update SYSPARMS Function Keys 5-17 The Display/Update SYSPARMS Operands Screen 5-18 Examining the SYSPARMS Values 5-18 Updating a SYSPARMS Operand Value 5-19 Resetting a SYSPARMS Operand Value 5-20 Section 6 Examining the Activity Log What Is in This Section 6-1 What Is the Activity Log? 6-1 Entering and Exiting the Activity Log Browse Facility 6-2 How Activity Log Records Are Displayed 6-2 Short Record Format 6-3 Normal Record Format 6-4 Full Record Format 6-4 Refreshing the Record Display 6-5 The Activity Log Browse Facility Function Keys Tandem Computers Incorporated ix

10 Contents Examining the Activity Log 6-5 Searching Activity Log Records by Date 6-9 Searching Activity Log Records by Time 6-10 Searching the Activity Log by String or Field Value 6-11 Marking and Locating a Position in the Activity Log 6-14 Marking a Position 6-14 Locating a Position 6-15 Changing the Search Scope 6-16 Modifying the Number of Records to Be Searched 6-16 Defining the Region to Be Searched 6-17 Browsing Through Another Activity Log File 6-17 Browsing Through an Earlier Activity Log File in the Current Log Set 6-18 Browsing Through an Archived Activity Log File 6-18 Browsing Through a Remote Activity Log File 6-18 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From the Activity Log Browse Facility 6-19 Sending Messages to the Activity Log 6-19 Opening a New Activity Log File 6-19 Displaying Information About Activity Log Files 6-20 Section 7 Accessing External Utilities and Applications What Is in This Section 7-1 Overview of DSNM 7-3 Issuing DSNM Commands With OPSYS 7-4 DSNM Command Format 7-4 Getting Help for DSNM Subsystem Commands 7-5 Running Conversational Guardian Utilities 7-6 The DSNM Utility Access Command Set 7-6 Getting Help for DSNM Utility Access Commands 7-7 Utility Access Security 7-7 Starting a Session With a Utility 7-8 Sending Commands to a Utility 7-10 Responding to Prompts Generated by Utilities 7-13 Sending a BREAK Message to a Utility 7-16 Ending a Session With a Utility 7-17 How the Guardian User ID of External Processes Is Determined 7-18 Running Guardian Utilities From Within NonStop NET/MASTER MS 7-19 x Tandem Computers Incorporated

11 Contents Running Block-Mode Applications 7-20 The Two Forms of the PROGRUN Command 7-21 Running NetStatus 7-23 Entering Commands From Within NetStatus 7-26 Viewing Command Responses in NetStatus 7-27 Sending a Problem to DSM/PM 7-28 The Console Extras Facility 7-29 Entering the Console Extras Facility 7-29 The Console Extras Function Keys 7-30 The Console Extras Utility List Screen 7-30 Running a Utility 7-31 Browsing the Details of a Utility 7-31 The Console Extras Utility Details Screen 7-32 Section 8 Communicating With Remote Systems What Is in This Section 8-1 Establishing a Session With a Remote System 8-1 Receiving Solicited and Unsolicited Messages 8-2 Local User ID Requirements 8-2 Remote User ID Requirements 8-2 Displaying Information About Links 8-3 Starting a Link With a Remote System 8-3 Logging On to a Remote System 8-3 Explicitly Logging On to a Remote System 8-3 Password Considerations 8-4 If the Remote System Is Inactive 8-4 Specifying a Message Prefix 8-5 Overriding the Configured Background Color, Text Color, and Highlighting of Messages 8-5 If the Link Fails 8-5 Automatically Logging On to a Remote System 8-6 Logging On to Multiple Remote Systems 8-6 Sending Commands Directly to a Remote System 8-6 Sending Commands Through Intermediate Systems 8-7 Monitoring Events From Remote Systems 8-8 Remote Message Display 8-8 Non-Roll-Delete Messages From Remote Locations Tandem Computers Incorporated xi

12 Contents Logging Off From a Remote System 8-9 Stopping a Link 8-9 Resetting a Link 8-9 INMC Link Failures 8-10 Section 9 Using Edit Services What Is in This Section 9-1 Entering Edit Services 9-1 The Edit Services Selection List 9-2 Your Default Library 9-2 Switching to a Different Procedure Library 9-3 The Edit Services Function Keys 9-4 Creating a New File 9-5 Ownership and Security Attributes of New Files 9-5 Changing the Security on a File 9-6 Locating a File or Group of Files 9-7 Editing a File 9-8 Browsing a File 9-8 Deleting a File 9-9 Restrictions on Using TEDIT 9-9 Performing a Trial Compilation of an NCL Procedure 9-10 Checking the Results if There Are Errors or Warnings 9-10 Testing a Panel 9-11 Section 10 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures What Is in This Section 10-1 Creating NCL Procedures 10-1 Executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From an NCL Procedure 10-1 Executing a NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command With an NCL CMD Statement 10-1 Executing a NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command With an NCL INTCMD Verb 10-2 Restrictions 10-3 Using System Variables 10-3 xii Tandem Computers Incorporated

13 Contents Sample NCL Procedure 10-4 Performing a Test Compilation on an NCL Procedure 10-6 Compiling an NCL Procedure 10-7 Executing NCL Procedures 10-7 Executing Persistent NCL Processes 10-8 NCL Procedure Libraries 10-8 The Default NCL Procedure Search Path 10-9 The NCL Process Identifier Terminating Execution of an NCL Process Viewing the Contents of NCL Libraries and Files Using Timer Commands to Execute NCL Procedures Executing NCL Procedures in the Background The Concept of Processing Environments The Primary Processing Environment The Background Processing Environment The Dependent Processing Environment The Current Processing Environment Section 11 User Services What Is in This Section 11-1 Glossary Glossary 1 Index Index Tandem Computers Incorporated xiii

14 Contents Figures Figure 1. Documentation Road Map xxi Figure 1-1. Example of Using NonStop NET/MASTER MS to Manage a Homogeneous Network 1-3 Figure 1-2. Example of Using NonStop NET/MASTER MS to Manage a Heterogeneous Network 1-4 Figure 1-3. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS Menu Hierarchy 1-11 Figure 4-1. The Standard OCS Window 4-2 Figure 4-2. The Event Message Flow 4-28 Figure 5-1. The Command Entry Capture Buffer 5-10 Figure 5-2. The Command Entry Print Details Screen 5-14 Figure 6-1. Switching Between Activity Log Record Formats 6-3 Figure 7-1. The Interface Between NonStop NET/MASTER MS and Other Tandem Network Management Facilities 7-2 Figure 7-2. How the Guardian User ID of External Processes is Determined 7-18 Figure 9-1. Edit Services Selection List Screen 9-2 Figure 9-2. How File Ownership Is Determined 9-6 Figure Default NCL Procedure Search Path 10-9 xiv Tandem Computers Incorporated

15 Contents Tables Table 1-1. Moving Through Message Help Databases 1-14 Table 1-2. Scrolling Through the Command Tutorial Selection List 1-16 Table 1-3. Default Function Key Definitions 1-17 Table 2-1. UMS User Details Fields 2-4 Table 2-2. UMS User Attributes Fields 2-5 Table 2-3. UMS Access Authorities Fields 2-8 Table 2-4. UMS OCS Details Fields 2-10 Table 2-5. Scrolling Through the User Definition List 2-15 Table 2-6. Locating a Record in the User Definition List 2-16 Table 4-1. AUTOHOLD Settings 4-5 Table 4-2. Holding-Mode Messages 4-11 Table 4-3. The Mode Indicator 4-12 Table 4-4. Recall Buffer Function Key Definitions 4-15 Table 4-5. Types of Function Key Assignments 4-19 Table 4-6. Event Message Codes 4-29 Table 5-1. Command Entry Function Key Definitions 5-4 Table 5-2. Command Entry Screen Fields 5-5 Table 5-3. Examining the Command Entry Capture Buffer 5-11 Table 5-4. Display/Update SYSPARMS Function Key Definitions 5-17 Table 5-5. Examining the SYSPARMS Operands 5-18 Table 6-1. Activity Log Browse Function Key Definitions 6-5 Table 6-2. Examining the Activity Log 6-6 Table 7-1. The DSNM Subsystem Commands Available With OPSYS 7-4 Table 7-2. The DSNM Utility Access Commands Available With OPSYS 7-6 Table 7-3. Viewing Command Responses in NetStatus 7-27 Table 7-4. Console Extras Function Key Definitions 7-30 Table 7-5. Console Extras Utility Details Screen Fields 7-32 Table 9-1. Edit Services Function Key Definitions Tandem Computers Incorporated xv

16 Contents (This page left intentionally blank) xvi Tandem Computers Incorporated

17 About This Manual This manual describes the user interface to the NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) product. NonStop NET/MASTER MS belongs to the set of Tandem management products known collectively as Distributed Systems Management (DSM). It is a menu-driven, customizable application that allows you to monitor and manage a single Tandem system or a heterogeneous network from a single terminal. Who Should Read This Manual How This Manual Is Organized This manual is written for those who use NonStop NET/MASTER MS to monitor and manage the day-to-day operation of a system or network. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS Operator s Guide is a task-oriented manual that provides the information you need to get started with NonStop NET/MASTER MS. It describes the NonStop NET/MASTER MS facilities you can use every day to perform system and network management tasks. Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, introduces NonStop NET/MASTER MS and familiarizes you with the NonStop NET/MASTER MS operations environment. It describes the options you can choose from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu, with a map of how the rest of the manual is organized in relation to the Primary Menu options. It presents a hierarchy of all the subordinate menus, shows you how to navigate through the menu hierarchy, and describes the NonStop NET/MASTER MS help facility. Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS), describes how to perform basic tasks using UMS, such as changing your password and updating your name, location, and telephone number. Section 3, Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands, introduces the NonStop NET/MASTER MS command set. It discusses command authority levels, command syntax rules, timer commands, customized commands, and submitting commands to be executed in the background. Additionally, it gives an overview of some of the commonly used NonStop NET/MASTER MS system management commands. Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS), discusses the OCS event monitoring and command entry facilities. Section 5, System Support Services, describes the Command Entry and Display/Update SYSPARMS facilities available from System Support Services. Section 6, Examining the Activity Log, describes the NonStop NET/MASTER MS activity log, where events about network activity are recorded, and shows how to examine this log by using the Activity Log Browse facility Tandem Computers Incorporated xvii

18 About This Manual How This Manual Is Organized Section 7, Accessing External Utilities and Applications, describes the NonStop NET/MASTER MS interfaces to: The Distributed Systems Network Management (DSNM) product, which processes commands for monitoring and controlling network subsystems and objects Guardian utilities, TACL routines, and other external conversational-mode and block-mode applications The NetStatus network monitoring application The DSM/Problem Manager (DSM/PM) product Section 8, Communicating With Remote Systems, tells you how to start and stop links, establish sessions, and communicate with remote systems. Section 9, Using Edit Services, describes the Edit Services facility, from which you can create, modify, view, and delete edit files and perform trial compilations of Network Control Language (NCL) procedure source files. You can also use the facility to test NCL panels. Section 10, Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures, introduces the NonStop NET/MASTER Network Control Language (NCL) and provides basic instruction on creating and executing NCL procedures to automate operations tasks. Section 11, User Services, describes the User Services facility, which allows you to access custom applications written specifically for your installation. The glossary defines NonStop NET/MASTER MS and Tandem system terms and abbreviations used in this manual. The index provides an alphabetic access point to significant terms and topics discussed in this manual. xviii Tandem Computers Incorporated

19 About This Manual Where to Go for More Information Where to Go for More Information Because it is not possible to know exactly which tasks may be required of operators at a particular installation, the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Operator s Guide might not provide all the information you need to get your job done. For example, at some sites, tasks described in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide may be tasks that are routinely performed by those we have identified as system or network operators. For more information on NonStop NET/MASTER MS, you should consult the: NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual, for the complete syntax, default authority level, usage considerations, and examples of all NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide, for all the information required to plan for, install, customize, and support NonStop NET/MASTER MS on a Tandem system. NonStop NET/MASTER Messages Manual, for an explanation of all messages, event-message tokens, and NCL error codes issued by NonStop NET/MASTER MS. For messages, the manual includes probable causes, effects, and recovery actions. NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide, for an overview of NCL concepts and terms, and how to use NCL. NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Reference Manual, for a complete description of NCL constructs. NonStop NET/MASTER RMS Management and Operations Guide, for information on using RMS. You may also find the following reference summaries helpful as you are using NonStop NET/MASTER MS and NCL: NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Summary, for a summary of all NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Reference Summary, for a summary of NCL constructs. You might need more information about the Tandem products that can be accessed from NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Distributed Systems Network Management (DSNM) is a prerequisite product for NonStop NET/MASTER MS, and NetStatus is an optional network monitoring application that can be used directly from NonStop NET/MASTER MS. For information about these products, refer to the: User s Guide to DSNM Commands, which describes the DSNM command set. NetStatus User s Guide, which provides instructions for using NetStatus to perform network management tasks. In addition, if you are involved with configuring DSNM, you will require the Distributed Systems Management Solutions (DSMS) System Management Guide, which contains step-by-step instructions for installing, configuring, and managing DSNM. (This manual lists other manuals that are helpful when you are installing DSNM.) Tandem Computers Incorporated xix

20 About This Manual Your Comments Invited You should also have access to subsystem-specific manuals for any of the subsystems being managed either through DSNM or through other subsystem management utility programs. The following manuals describe how to use DSM/Problem Manager, the Event Management Service analyzer, the Object Monitoring Facility, and the ViewSys system resource monitor that you can access from NonStop NET/MASTER MS: DSM/Problem Manager User s Guide DSM/Problem Manager Installation and Customization Guide Event Management Service (EMS) Analyzer User s Guide and Reference Manual Object Monitoring Facility (OMF) User s Guide and Reference Manual ViewSys User s Guide Finally, if the network being managed with NonStop NET/MASTER MS contains systems running on an IBM platform, appropriate SOLVE management services and IBM manuals are also required. Figure 1 illustrates the functional breakdown of the NonStop NET/MASTER product manual set as well as its relationship to other Tandem manuals. Your Comments Invited After you have had a chance to use this manual, please take a moment to fill out the Reader Comment Card and send it to us. The Reader Comment Card is located at the back of the printed manual and as a separate file in the CD Read Document List. You can fax the card to us at (408) or mail the card by using the business reply address on the back of the card in the printed manual. Many of the improvements you see in Tandem manuals are a result of suggestions from our customers. Please take this opportunity to help us improve future manuals. xx Tandem Computers Incorporated

21 About This Manual Documentation Road Map Figure 1. Documentation Road Map Introduction to Distributed Systems Management (DSM) EMS Manual DSMS System Management Guide Distributed Name Service (DNS) Management Operations Manual NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide NonStop NET/MASTER RMS Mgmt and Operations Guide Configuring and Managing NonStop NET/MASTER Subsystem- Specific Management Guides NetStatus User's Guide User's Guide to DSNM Commands NonStop NET/MASTER MS Operator's Guide NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual NonStop NET/MASTER Messages Manual Using NonStop NET/MASTER Legend NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Reference Manual NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide Manuals specific to NonStop NET/MASTER Other related manuals NCL Programming Tandem Computers Incorporated xxi

22 About This Manual Documentation Road Map (This page left intentionally blank) xxii Tandem Computers Incorporated

23 General Syntax Notation UPPERCASE LETTERS lowercase italic letters Brackets [ ] Notation Conventions The following list summarizes the notation conventions for syntax presentation in this manual. Uppercase letters indicate keywords and reserved words; enter these items exactly as shown. Items not enclosed in brackets are required. For example: MAXATTACH Lowercase italic letters indicate variable items that you supply. Items not enclosed in brackets are required. For example: file-name Brackets enclose optional syntax items. For example: TERM [\system-name.]$terminal-name INT[ERRUPTS] A group of items enclosed in brackets is a list from which you can choose one item or none. The items in the list may be arranged either vertically, with aligned brackets on each side of the list, or horizontally, enclosed in a pair of brackets and separated by vertical lines. For example: LIGHTS [ ON ] [ OFF ] [ SMOOTH [ num ] ] K [ X D ] address-1 Braces { } Vertical Line Underline _ A group of items enclosed in braces is a list from which you are required to choose one item. The items in the list may be arranged either vertically, with aligned braces on each side of the list, or horizontally, enclosed in a pair of braces and separated by vertical lines. For example: LISTOPENS PROCESS { $appl-mgr-name } { $process-name } ALLOWSU { ON OFF } A vertical line separates alternatives in a horizontal list that is enclosed in brackets or braces. For example: INSPECT { OFF ON SAVEABEND } An underlined syntax item in a horizontal or vertical list is the default value. If you do not choose any item in a list, the default value is used. For example: NONE BLUE GREEN PINK RED TURQUOISE WHITE YELLOW Tandem Computers Incorporated xxiii

24 Notation Conventions General Syntax Notation Ellipsis... Punctuation Item Spacing An ellipsis immediately following a pair of brackets or braces indicates that you can repeat the enclosed sequence of syntax items any number of times. For example: M address-1 [, new-value ]... [ - ] { }... An ellipsis immediately following a single syntax item indicates that you can repeat that syntax item any number of times. For example: "s-char..." Parentheses, commas, semicolons, and other symbols not previously described must be entered as shown. For example: error := NEXTFILENAME ( file-name ) ; LISTOPENS SU $process-name.#su-name Spaces shown between items are required unless one of the items is a punctuation symbol such as a parenthesis or a comma. For example: CALL STEPMOM ( process-id ) ; If there is no space between two items, spaces are not permitted. In the following example, there are no spaces permitted between the period and any other items: $process-name.#su-name Boldface Boldface characters indicate the minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command or operand. For example: PROFILE Boldface used in narrative text introduces new terms and terms specific to the Tandem operating environment. These terms are defined in the glossary at the end of this manual. xxiv Tandem Computers Incorporated

25 What Is in This Section 1 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS This section introduces the NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) product and explains the concepts and terminology used to discuss it. The intent of this section is to get you started with NonStop NET/MASTER MS and to introduce you to the services available through NonStop NET/MASTER MS. It describes the features, such as online help and multiple windows, that will facilitate your actual use of the product. It also illustrates how the rest of the manual is organized in terms of the options available from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu. The menu is displayed when you initially log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. After reading this section, you should understand: How to log on to and off from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS product What options are available through the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu How to navigate through the NonStop NET/MASTER MS menu hierarchy How to use the function keys How to use the NonStop NET/MASTER MS help facility How to split your screen and swap windows What to do if you are suddenly logged off or locked out What Is NonStop NET/MASTER MS? NonStop NET/MASTER MS belongs to the set of Tandem management products known collectively as Distributed Systems Management (DSM). It is a network management environment that allows you to monitor and manage a single Tandem system or an entire network from a single terminal. Having NonStop NET/MASTER MS installed on your system also allows your local system to be monitored and/or managed remotely as part of a network of systems managed by NonStop NET/MASTER MS, the SOLVE management services, and NetView products Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 1

26 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Terminals Supported With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, you can: View event messages generated by both local and remote systems throughout a network. Issue commands to remotely control and gather information about any peer system in the network, and have the responses displayed on your local terminal. Run Guardian utilities, TACL routines, and other external conversational-mode utilities, and control the running of Tandem block-mode applications. Write and execute custom applications and operations management automation procedures by using the NonStop NET/MASTER Network Control Language (NCL), a high-level language created specifically for automating system and network management tasks. Browse log files, where messages arriving at your local NonStop NET/MASTER MS system are logged. These messages report activity occurring throughout the network. Tailor your individual operations environment. NonStop NET/MASTER MS provides a hierarchical menu structure and a set of commands with which you accomplish these network management tasks. Terminals Supported Function Key Conventions You can run NonStop NET/MASTER MS from the following terminals: A Tandem 6530 or compatible terminal An IBM 3270 or compatible terminal NonStop NET/MASTER MS supports color and highlighting if such features are available on your terminal. In this manual, function keys are referred to by their Tandem 6530 keyboard names, followed by their IBM 3270 keyboard equivalents in parentheses: for example, F1 (PF01) function key. In addition, the key you press to execute a command is always referred to as the ENTER key. (This is to distinguish it from the RETURN function, which returns you to the menu from which your current operations facility was invoked and which, in NonStop NET/MASTER MS, is executed by pressing the F4 (PF04) function key.) Caution Other keyboards may have different but equivalent function keys; refer to the manual appropriate to the keyboard you are using. For example, if you are using the PC6530 software to emulate a 6530 terminal on an IBM PC with a 12-function key keyboard, the equivalent for function key for F13 is Alt and F Tandem Computers Incorporated

27 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Managing Networks With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Managing Networks With NonStop NET/MASTER MS With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, you can manage a single Tandem system, a network of Tandem systems, or a heterogeneous network comprising both Tandem and IBM-supported systems from a local terminal. Figure 1-1 illustrates a network consisting of Tandem systems. This configuration requires that NonStop NET/MASTER MS be installed on each node in the network. Figure 1-1. Example of Using NonStop NET/MASTER MS to Manage a Homogeneous Network NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services 1 Paris London 1 Tokyo New York 1 Sydney Los Angeles Legend 1 Indicates a node with human operators. In the other nodes, routine operations tasks have been automated with NCL procedures that analyze events as they are reported and issue commands to correct them Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 3

28 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Managing Networks With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Figure 1-2 illustrates a network consisting of several Tandem systems connected to another network managed by an IBM system. This arrangement requires that NonStop NET/MASTER MS be installed on the Tandem systems and that the SOLVE management services product be installed on systems running on an IBM platform. Figure 1-2. Example of Using NonStop NET/MASTER MS to Manage a Heterogeneous Network NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services CLX Expand Expand Expand CLX Expand Cyclone Expand CLX SNAX/XF or SNAX/CDF link SOLVE Management Services DEC POLYCENTER SNA Manager IBM 370 IBM Fujitsu Tandem Computers Incorporated

29 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Before You Can Log On to NonStop NET/MASTER MS Windows, Panels, and Menus Before You Can Log On to NonStop NET/MASTER MS In NonStop NET/MASTER MS, you can divide your physical screen into two logical screens called windows. Each window operates independently of the other, enabling you to perform multiple functions concurrently. A panel is a formatted display that partially or completely overlays a window. A panel can be used to: Retrieve and present information, such as panels displaying online help and user ID information. Receive information, such as panels used for defining user ID information to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. A menu is a panel that displays a list of options. The options allow you to choose what you want to do next. Each option can initiate another menu or function. Before you can log on to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS product, your system manager must add information about you to the database of NonStop NET/MASTER MS users. This information is referred to collectively as your user ID definition record, and includes the following: Personal information, such as your name, location, telephone number, user ID, and password. Security information, which determines the NonStop NET/MASTER MS facilities and commands you are allowed to use. Two important aspects of your user ID definition record are: Authorized functions that define which options you are allowed to select from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu and which functions you are allowed to perform within the various NonStop NET/MASTER MS options. An authority level that determines which NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands you are allowed to issue, which Guardian utilities and other external applications you are able to access from within NonStop NET/MASTER MS, and which commands within external applications you are allowed to use. Your user ID definition record also determines attributes such as whether: You can log on to remote systems in addition to your local system Your access to NonStop NET/MASTER MS is restricted to specific terminals You are allowed to log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS dynamically from any terminal You must change your password periodically All the fields in your user ID definition record are discussed in detail in Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS) Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 5

30 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Logging On to NonStop NET/MASTER MS Logging On to NonStop NET/MASTER MS The Logon Screen You log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS logon screen. If your terminal is a dedicated NonStop NET/MASTER MS terminal, the logon screen is displayed whenever you are not actually working in NonStop NET/MASTER MS. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS logon screen is as follows: / // // NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services / // // T6581D30-31OCT94 / // / / // // # # #### / / ## # # # / # # # #### #### ## ##### #### #### # ## # # # # # # # # # # / # # #### # # #### # #### #### / # # # #### ##### # # # ## #### ##### #### #### ## # # # # ## ## # # # # # # # # # # ### # # # ## # #### ## # ### ### # ## # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #### # # # # # # #### # #### # # Enter User ID ===> Password ===> NonStop is a trademark of Tandem Computers Incorporated NET/MASTER is a registered trademark of Software Developments Pty Ltd If the Logon Screen Is Not Displayed Starting a Session If the logon screen is not displayed on your terminal, and if you are authorized to dynamically access NonStop NET/MASTER MS, you can display the logon screen on your terminal by using the NNM utility program from your TACL prompt. You must specify the process name of the NonStop NET/MASTER MS control process (NCP) when you use the NNM program, unless it is $ZNNM (the default), in which case you can omit the process name. For example, to display the logon screen for $ZNNM, type either of the following commands from your TACL prompt: TACL> NNM TACL> NNM $ZNNM To display the logon screen for $ANNM, type the following command from your TACL prompt: TACL> NNM $ANNM (You can also display the logon screen for a NonStop NET/MASTER MS system on another Tandem node. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide for more information.) Tandem Computers Incorporated

31 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Logging On to NonStop NET/MASTER MS The NNM utility is loaded into $SYSTEM.SYSTEM as part of the NonStop NET/MASTER MS installation process. If you have any problems, contact your system manager or refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide. It may be that the NNM utility program has been moved from $SYSTEM.SYSTEM to another location, or that you are using the wrong process name for the NCP. Steps for Logging On Follow these steps to log on to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS application: 1. Type your user ID in the Enter User ID field. A valid user ID is from one through eight alphanumeric or national characters in length (in English, national characters are: # You can enter your user ID by using any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters (user IDs are not casesensitive, and letters are converted to uppercase). 2. Move your cursor to the Password field and type your password. You must enter your password with the proper uppercase and lowercase letters (passwords are case-sensitive). Your password is not displayed as you type. Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS), discusses the criteria for valid passwords. 3. Press the ENTER key. If you enter either your user ID or your password incorrectly, the following message appears in the top left corner of the logon screen. NNM1234 SECURITY CHECK FAILED Reenter the correct user ID and password and press the ENTER key. If you enter both your user ID and your password correctly, one of the following occurs: The NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu appears. You automatically enter into one of the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu options. The UMS Details (Function=EXPIRED) panel appears. If you are logging on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS for the first time, or if your password has expired (this occurs at regular intervals), you must change your password before you can proceed. See Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS), for further information Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 7

32 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Logging Off From NonStop NET/MASTER MS Logging Off From NonStop NET/MASTER MS You can log off from NonStop NET/MASTER MS from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu by performing one of the following: Press the F3 (PF03), F4 (PF04), F16 (Alt PF06), or SF16 (Alt Shift PF06) function key. Type "X" in the Select Option field and press the ENTER key. If you are in any panel other than the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu, you can log off using the panel skipping feature by entering =X in the command field of the panel. (The panel skipping feature is discussed later in this section under Navigating Through the Menu Hierarchy. ) If you originally logged on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS from a dedicated NonStop NET/MASTER MS terminal (one that displays the NonStop NET/MASTER MS logon screen when you log off), the logon screen is redisplayed when you log off; otherwise, the TACL prompt is redisplayed. Note The NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu If you are using two windows, the logoff operation will not log you off from NonStop NET/MASTER MS; the operation will only close the window that you log off from. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu appears after you successfully log on (unless your user ID definition record has been configured so that you automatically enter a particular NonStop NET/MASTER MS facility). The following sample shows the Primary Menu for a user who performs functions generally regarded as the responsibility of an operator, and whose site has a User Services option configured (see Section 11, User Services ). Options that you are not authorized to select do not appear on your Primary Menu. SYS NonStop NET/MASTER MS T6581D30-31OCT94 : Primary Menu SYS1 Select Option ===> 2 - Operator Control Services Userid OPER1 8 - Edit Services Term # E - Console Extras Time 10:23:43 M - User ID Management Services THU 10-NOV-1994 S - System Support Services OPSYS GUARDIAN U - User Services Window 1 X - Terminate Window.Exit Last logged on THU 10-NOV :22 at terminal $ATP2.#TERM Tandem Computers Incorporated

33 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS The Primary Menu Options The Primary Menu Options The options displayed in the preceding NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu let you perform the following functions: Operator Control Services (OCS) is the central NonStop NET/MASTER MS management service. It provides a network operations control environment to perform the following: Enter NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands to control and retrieve information about the subsystems and objects on your network, and to customize your NonStop NET/MASTER MS operations environment Monitor event messages in the network OCS is described in detail in Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS). The Edit Services facility allows you to create, modify, browse, and delete Network Control Language (NCL) procedures, panel description files, and other edit files with the Tandem full-screen editor, TEDIT. It also provides facilities for checking NCL source files, for listing NCL syntax errors, and for testing panels. Edit Services is described in detail in Section 9, Using Edit Services. The Console Extras facility provides you with a panel that displays a utility list. You can access up to 16 external utilities from the panel: that is, Guardian blockmode utilities and application programs that exist independently of NonStop NET/MASTER MS. NonStop NET/MASTER MS can be configured with a customized set of Console Extra programs, or the individual user can have a personal Console Extras utility list. Console Extras is described in detail in Section 7, Accessing External Utilities and Applications. A User ID Management Services option to browse Console Extras utility lists is described in Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS). User ID Management Services (UMS) provides the security facility for NonStop NET/MASTER MS. UMS is where: User ID definition records are added to, modified, and deleted from the database of NonStop NET/MASTER MS users Console Extras utility lists are configured Programs, such as Guardian utilities, that are external to but accessible from within the NonStop NET/MASTER MS environment are defined Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS), describes UMS. System Support Services provides several options that support network problem determination (the Activity Log Browse facility), command entry (the Command Entry facility), and system configuration tasks (the Display/Update SYSPARMS facility). System Support Services is described in detail in Section 5, System Support Services Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 9

34 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS The Menu Hierarchy User Services provides you with an entry point into site-specific services. Different operators may have access to different User Services options. User Services is described in Section 11, User Services. The Menu Hierarchy The services that NonStop NET/MASTER MS provides are ordered in a hierarchy, as illustrated in Figure 1-3. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu is at the top; options you can select from the Primary Menu are at the second level; options you can select from the second level are at the third level; and so on. Figure 1-3 shows the menu hierarchy for a user who performs functions generally regarded as the responsibility of an operator, and whose site has a User Services option configured. Additionally, it is assumed that access to the User ID Management Services (UMS) is limited to a subset of the entire set of available UMS options. Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS), describes UMS Tandem Computers Incorporated

35 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS The Menu Hierarchy Figure 1-3. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS Menu Hierarchy NonStop NET/MASTER MS : Primary Menu NonStop NET/MASTER MS Logon Screen 2 - Operator Control Services 8 - Edit Services E - Console Extras M - User ID Management Services S - System Support Services X - Terminate Window.Exit 2 E S U Operator Control Services Console Extras : Utility List System Support Services : Primary Menu 3 - Activity Log Browse Facuility 6 - Command Entry Facility S - Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings X - Exit User Services 8 Edit Service : Selection List M User ID Management Services : Primary Menu B - Browse User Definition L - List User Definitions P - Password Change for your User V - Maintain Console Extras Utilities X - Exit B L P V Browse User Definition List User Definitions Password Change for your User Maintain Console Extras Utilities Site Specific UMS : User Details UMS : User Attributes UMS : Access Authorities UMS : User Installation Attributes UMS : OCS Details 3 6 S Activity Log Browse Facility Command Entry Facility Display/ Update SYSPARMS Settings Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 11

36 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Navigating Through the Menu Hierarchy Navigating Through the Menu Hierarchy Selecting an Option From a Menu Directly Accessing Menu Options Panel Skipping Returning to the Previous Panel EXIT Key Returning to the Previous Menu RETURN Key There are two ways of moving through the menu hierarchy: Move down the hierarchy by selecting intermediate menu options, and move back up the hierarchy by pressing the RETURN (F4/PF04) or EXIT (F3/PF03) key. Directly access any menu option by explicitly entering its location within the menu hierarchy. This method is called panel skipping. To select an option from a menu, enter the option number or letter in the Select Option field and press the ENTER key. For example, selecting option M from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu takes you to User ID Management Services. Continue selecting options from the submenus until you reach your desired panel. Panel skipping provides a fast path through the menu hierarchy. If you know the hierarchical position of the desired function in relation to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu (see Figure 1-3), you can bypass the intermediate menus and go directly to the desired function by explicitly entering its path. For example, to select User ID Management Services option L (List User Definitions) from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu, enter the following in the Select Option field and press the ENTER key: M.L To select an option from any panel other than the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu, precede the entry with an equal sign (=). This action brings you back to the Primary Menu (not displayed) and then proceeds to the indicated option. For example, to select the System Support Services Display/Update SYSPARMS option from the OCS screen, enter the following on the OCS command line and press the ENTER key: =S.S From most panels, pressing the EXIT (F3/PF03) key returns you to the panel from which the current panel was invoked. From most panels, pressing the RETURN (F4/PF04) key returns you to the menu from which the current option was invoked (exceptions are noted in discussions about particular NonStop NET/MASTER MS options) Tandem Computers Incorporated

37 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Help Facility Using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Help Facility NonStop NET/MASTER MS provides an extensive help facility. By default, the F1 (PF01) function key is the HELP function key, which is used to access online help. Three types of help are available: Help for a service, facility, or panel Help for a message Help for a command Help for a Service, Facility, or Panel To display help text describing the function of a particular service, facility, or panel, press the HELP function key from a panel that indicates help information is available. For example, if you press the HELP function key from the Edit Services Selection List panel, several pages of information describing the Edit Services facility are displayed. You can scroll forward and backward through the help panels by pressing the F8 (PF08) and F7 (PF07) function keys, respectively. To exit from the help facility, press the F3 (PF03) function key. See later sections in this manual, and refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide, for more information about services, facilities, and panels. Help for a Message NonStop NET/MASTER MS displays many messages, which report events, indicate the results of a command, and so on. There are two methods you can use to obtain online help about a message displayed on the screen. The following table displays the locations from which you can use each method: Method OCS Command Entry Activity Log 1 Yes Yes Yes 2 Yes Yes No Method 1 is to position the cursor on a line on which the message is displayed (next to the message number) and press the HELP function key. Method 2 is to type the message number in the OCS command input line or the Command Entry facility COMMAND field, and to press the HELP function key. The panel that appears depends on the message about which you are obtaining help. If the message begins with NNM, it is a NonStop NET/MASTER MS message. Help information about the message is in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS message help database (and also in the NonStop NET/MASTER Messages Manual). If NonStop NET/MASTER MS recognizes a message beginning with NNM, the Browse NonStop NET/MASTER Messages panel appears with detailed help information for the message: otherwise, NonStop NET/MASTER MS displays help for the next sequential message Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 13

38 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Help Facility If the message begins with characters other than NNM, the message is not a NonStop NET/MASTER MS message. Rather, the message is from a Tandem or user-written subsystem, sent to NonStop NET/MASTER MS from an EMS distributor. Help information about the message is in the event detail database, in either the EVENTTD or EVENTCX file (see the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide for more information about these files). Note If the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Event Detail Help panel displays F10=PrevMsg and F11=NextMsg on the bottom line, the information is from the EVENTCX file: otherwise, the information is from the EVENTTD file. If NonStop NET/MASTER MS recognizes a message beginning with other than NNM, the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Event Detail Help panel appears with detailed help information for the message: otherwise, NonStop NET/MASTER MS displays message NNM0976 to indicate that no help is available. Table 1-1 shows the function keys used to scroll through messages in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS message help database, the EVENTTD file, and the EVENTCX file. Press the F3 (PF03) or F4 (PF04) function key to return to the location from which you requested help. Table 1-1. Moving Through Message Help Databases 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key NNMxxxx Messages EVENTTD Messages EVENTCX Messages F7 PF07 Moves backward one message, or moves backward one page (if on other than the first page of message help) F8 PF08 Moves forward one message, or moves forward one page (if the message help spans more than one page) Moves backward one page (if on other than the first page of message help) Moves forward one page (if the message help spans more than one page) Moves backward one page (if on other than the first page of message help) Moves forward one page (if the message help spans more than one page) F10 PF10 N.A. N.A. Moves backward one message F11 PF11 N.A. N.A. Moves forward one message ENTER ENTER Moves forward one message, or looks for the message number you type in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Message===> field Looks for the message number you type in the Message ID field Looks for the message number you type in the Message ID field N.A. Not Applicable Note A page is the amount of information currently visible in the window Tandem Computers Incorporated

39 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Help Facility Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER Messages Manual for more information about messages. Customized Message Help Information A programmer or system manager can customize message help information. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide for more information. Help for a Command You can use many commands from NonStop NET/MASTER MS. There are four methods you can use to obtain online help about a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. The following table displays the locations from which you can use each method: Method OCS Command Entry Activity Log 1 Yes Yes Yes 2 Yes Yes No 3 Yes Yes No 4 Yes No No Method 1 is to position the cursor on a line on which the command is displayed (next to the command) and press the HELP function key. Method 2 is to type the name of a command in the OCS command input line or the Command Entry facility COMMAND field, and to press the HELP function key. For both Method 1 and Method 2, if NonStop NET/MASTER MS recognizes the command, detailed help information for the command is displayed. Press the F3 (PF03) or F4 (PF04) function key to return to the location from which you requested help. For both Method 1 and Method 2, if NonStop NET/MASTER MS does not recognize the command (perhaps you mistyped the command or the command was ambiguous), NonStop NET/MASTER MS displays the NonStop NET/MASTER Command Tutorial Selection List panel. See Scrolling Through the Command Tutorial Selection List, later in this section, for how to continue. Method 3 is to type HELP in the OCS command input line or the Command Entry facility COMMAND field, and to press the ENTER key. Method 4 is to leave the OCS command input line blank and press the HELP function key. For both Method 3 and Method 4, the NonStop NET/MASTER Command Tutorial panel appears. To continue, do one of the following: Press the ENTER key. The NonStop NET/MASTER Command Tutorial Selection List panel appears. See Scrolling Through the Command Tutorial Selection List, later in this section, for how to continue Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 15

40 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Help Facility Type the name of a command in the HELP FOR COMMAND ==> field and press the ENTER key. Detailed help for the command is displayed. Press the F3 (PF03) function key to return to the NonStop NET/MASTER Command Tutorial panel or the F4 (PF04) function key to return to OCS. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for detailed information about commands. Scrolling Through the Command Tutorial Selection List The Command Tutorial Selection List is a list of NonStop NET/MASTER MS and SOLVE management services commands. When the selection list appears, the cursor is positioned next to the command that is alphabetically the closest to the string you typed. To scroll through the Command Tutorial Selection List, enter a value in the Scroll field to control the amount of scrolling. Then press the F7 (PF07) or F8 (PF08) function key to determine the type of scrolling (backward or forward), as described in Table 1-2. This table also lists the values that you can enter in the Scroll field. Table 1-2. Scrolling Through the Command Tutorial Selection List Scroll Field Value 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Amount and Type of Scrolling C[SR] (default) F7 PF07 Scrolls backward one page, based on the current position of the cursor. The line on which the cursor is positioned becomes the last line of the new screen. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward one page, based on the current position of the cursor. The line on which the cursor is positioned becomes the first line of the new screen. P[AGE] F7 PF07 Scrolls backward one page. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward one page. H[ALF] F7 PF07 Scrolls backward one half page. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward one half page. nnn F7 PF07 Scrolls backward nnn lines. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward nnn lines. M[AX] F7 PF07 Scrolls backward to the first page of the command tutorial selection list. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward to the last page of the command tutorial selection list. Note A page is the amount of information currently visible in the window Tandem Computers Incorporated

41 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS The Function Keys When you find the command you are interested in: 1. Position your cursor to the left of the command. 2. Type an S. 3. Press the ENTER key to display detailed help for the selected command. Customized Command Help Information A programmer or system manager can customize command help information using the Help Maintenance facility and Edit Services, or the HLPMAINT command and Edit Services. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide for information on the Help Maintenance facility. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for information about the HLPMAINT command. See Section 9, Using Edit Services, for information on Edit Services. The Function Keys The function keys on your keyboard are assigned default definitions (listed in Table 1-3), which are generally consistent throughout NonStop NET/MASTER MS. In addition, each NonStop NET/MASTER MS facility has its own specialized function key definitions, which are described in the appropriate sections throughout the rest of this manual. Table 1-3. Default Function Key Definitions 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Description F1 PF01 Displays help. F2 PF02 Executes the NonStop NET/MASTER MS SPLIT command to open a new window. F3 PF03 Executes the NonStop NET/MASTER MS X command to return to the screen from which the current screen was invoked. (Note: in some panels, the F3 (PF03) key is used to update information.) F4 PF04 Executes the NonStop NET/MASTER MS RETURN command to return to the menu from which the current screen was invoked. F9 PF09 Executes the NonStop NET/MASTER MS SWAP command: if you are operating with a single window open, opens a second window displaying the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen (the original window moves into the background and is hidden); if you have two windows open, reverses their dimensions and enters the other window. Note In OCS only, you can redefine any or all of the default function key definitions. See "Customizing Function Keys," in Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS), for more information Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 17

42 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Working With Two Windows Working With Two Windows In NonStop NET/MASTER MS, you can divide your display screen into two windows. Each window operates independently of the other. You can open a second window anywhere in NonStop NET/MASTER MS by using the SPLIT or SWAP function. Note You cannot run a block-mode application from one window and simultaneously retain a view of NonStop NET/MASTER MS in the other window. Splitting Windows The SPLIT function, by default assigned to the F2 (PF02) function key, lets you: Split your window vertically, so that you have two windows side by side, as in the following example, where OCS is active in the left window and the Command Entry facility is active in the right window: (11:06) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES COMMAND : : SYSTEM : SYS1 ASYN UTILITY : SCROL NonStop NET/MASTER D M=> Tandem Computers Incorporated

43 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Working With Two Windows Split your window horizontally, so that you have one window above the other, as in the following example, where the limited UMS facility is active in the top window, and the Edit Services facility is active in the bottom window: SYS User ID Management Services : Primary Menu ZUMSMN2P Select Option ===> B - Browse User Definition Userid OPER3 L - List User Definitions Term # P - Password Change for your User Time 08:35:22 V - Maintain Console Extras Utilities FRI 11-NOV-1994 X - Exit Edit Services : Selection List ZEDSPN1P File Spec: Subvolume: $DATA.ZNCLPGN Page Down for more files T=Test a panel S/B=Browse C=Compile D=Delete E=Edit Filename Code EOF Last Modification Owner RWEP AAREADME NOV :23:47 100,21 NCNC BUILTIN NOV :23:48 100,21 NCNC BUILTIN NOV :23:49 100,21 NCNC HELLO NOV :23:52 100,21 NCNC HELLO NOV :23:53 100,21 NCNC F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Return F7=Prev F8=Next F11=Error List The SPLIT function is handled differently on 6530 and 3270 terminals. It is also handled differently when you invoke it by pressing the SPLIT function key or when you explicitly issue a SPLIT command. For example: If you issue a SPLIT command with no operands, your screen is split horizontally at row 12. If you press the SPLIT function key on a Tandem 6530 or compatible terminal, you are presented with a SPLIT grid that requires you to position your cursor on a horizontal or vertical grid line to specify the window dimensions, and then press the ENTER key to execute the split. By default (if you simply press the ENTER key without moving the cursor), your screen is split horizontally at row 12. You can cancel the SPLIT function by pressing the F3 function key. On an IBM 3270 or compatible terminal, NonStop NET/MASTER MS does not present a SPLIT grid. Instead, the bottom row and the left column of the screen serve as the SPLIT grid. Position your cursor on the grid before you press the SPLIT function key. See the description of the SPLIT command in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for a detailed discussion on splitting windows Tandem Computers Incorporated 1 19

44 Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS Working With Two Windows Swapping Windows The SWAP function, by default assigned to the F9 (PF09) function key, lets you: Open a second full-screen window if you are currently operating with a single window open. In this case, the SWAP function automatically opens a second window displaying the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen. The second window occupies the entire screen. The original window moves into the background and is hidden. Press the F9 (PF09) function key again to toggle back and forth between the two windows. Reverse the dimensions of the two current windows (if you have two windows open and both are visible on the screen), and toggle back and forth between them. If each window takes up the whole screen, the SWAP function toggles between both windows. Refer to the description of the SWAP command in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for a detailed discussion on swapping windows Tandem Computers Incorporated

45 What Is in This Section 2 User ID Management Services (UMS) User ID Management Services (UMS) provides the security required to manage access to the many options that NonStop NET/MASTER MS provides. Through UMS, your system manager or security administrator can perform the following: Add, modify, and delete user ID definition records Define utilities and applications external to NonStop NET/MASTER MS so they can be used from within the NonStop NET/MASTER MS environment Most operators are limited to a restricted set of UMS options. This section discusses the following options: Accessing UMS Browsing your user ID definition record Listing user IDs Viewing the contents of individual user ID definition records Changing your own password and other personal information Browsing the Console Extras utility list, if you have been granted Console Extras Access authority on page 3 of your user ID definition record (see Browsing Your User ID Definition Record later in this section) Accessing UMS Note Select option M from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen to access UMS. If you only have access to one NonStop NET/MASTER MS service (OCS, Edit Services, Console Extras, System Support Services, or User Services), you might enter directly into that particular service as soon as you log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. To access the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen, you must open a second window by using either the SPLIT or SWAP function (as described in Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS ) Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 1

46 User ID Management Services (UMS) Accessing UMS The following discussion assumes that when you enter UMS, a User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen similar to the following appears: SYS User ID Management Services : Primary Menu ZUMSMN2P Select Option ===> B - Browse User Definition Userid OPER3 L - List User Definitions Term # P - Password Change for your User Time 10:47:40 V - Maintain Console Extras Utilities THU 10-NOV-1994 X - Exit User... OPER3 ( Required B Optional L ) F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F9=Swap Note This is the basic UMS screen that appears if you have not been given access to UMS in your user ID definition record. See The Access Authorities Screen, later in this section. If you have extended UMS authority, an expanded User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen appears when you enter UMS, as the following screen shows: SYS User ID Management Services : Primary Menu ZUMSMN1P Select Option ===> A - Add User Definition Userid SYSMAN B - Browse User Definition Term # C - Copy User Definition Time 10:21:31 D - Delete User Definition THU 10-NOV-1994 F - Force User's Password Change L - List User Definitions P - Password Change for your User U - Update User Definition V - Maintain Console Extras Utilities W - Maintain Utility Command Set Definitions Y - Maintain Utility Definitions Z - Maintain Utility Maintenance Users X - Exit User... SYSMAN ( Required B C D F U Optional A L ) Definition Type... USER ( Required A - 'USER' or 'GROUP' ) Confirm Delete?... YES ( Required D ) F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F9=Swap Tandem Computers Incorporated

47 User ID Management Services (UMS) The User Details Screen If you have been granted UMS Management authority on page 3 of your user ID definition record (see Browsing Your User ID Definition Record next), you can add and delete user ID definition records to and from the database of NonStop NET/MASTER MS users, and can modify existing user ID definition records. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide for a detailed discussion of the additional UMS options. These functions are often considered to be system management or security administration tasks. Browsing Your User ID Definition Record The User Details Screen Select option B from the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen to view your user ID definition record. The five pages of your user ID definition record are described below. Press the F8 (PF08) function key to move forward from one page to the next and the F7 (PF07) function key to turn back to previous pages. The following is a sample User Details screen: OPER UMS : User Details Page 1 of 5 Command ===> Function=BROWSE User ID... OPER3 Last Logon.. THU 10-NOV :00 Last Updated THU 10-NOV :45 Definition.. USER Guardian ID , , 21,,,,,, User Name... Christine Lang User Location... Data Center Phone Number Language Code... US Suspend Date... User Timeout... Y Group ID... Group Name... (YY.DDD or Blank) (Y/N) (Valid Group User or Blank) F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F8=Forward F9=Swap F11=Menu Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 3

48 User ID Management Services (UMS) The User Details Screen Table 2-1 describes the information in the User Details fields. Table 2-1. UMS User Details Fields Field User ID Guardian ID Last Logon Last Updated Definition User name User Location Phone Number Language Code Suspend Date User Timeout Group ID Group Name Description A one to eight-character name that identifies you to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Your Guardian user ID (GUID) consists of a group number and a user number, separated by a comma. You must have at least one GUID; you may have up to eight GUIDs associated with your NonStop NET/MASTER MS user ID. Your GUID defines your access to the operating system files and programs that you can access through NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Guardian security features are discussed in the Guardian User s Guide. You can switch between GUIDs by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS PROFILE GUID command (see Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS), for more information about the PROFILE command). The date and time you last logged on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. The date and time your user ID definition record was last updated. Indicates whether the security attributes described in this user ID can be used as a GROUP definition, or whether they are unique to you as a USER. Your name (up to 20 characters). Your location (up to 20 characters). Your telephone number (up to 12 characters). A two-character code specifying the spelling (US or UK) used in error messages. The date after which you can no longer log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. If blank, there is no suspension date. Indicates whether you are subject to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS timeout facility (see Terminal Timeouts later in this section for more information). The name of the group to whom you belong, if any. All members of a group share the same security attributes. A description of the above group user ID Tandem Computers Incorporated

49 User ID Management Services (UMS) The User Attributes Screen The User Attributes Screen The following is a sample User Attributes screen: OPER UMS : User Attributes Page 2 of 5 Command ===> Function=BROWSE Authority Level... 4 (0-255) Multiple Signon Authority... Y Password Expire... N (Y/N) (Y/N) NCL Library Subvol... $DATA.ZNCLPGN (std lib) NCL Object File Name... $DATA9.ZNNMUCO.ZNCLPGN Panel Library Subvol... $DATA.ZNCLPGP (std lib) Main Menu Procedure... ZHWKMMNN User Services Procedure... USERSVCS (Blank if not authorized ) Terminals to which User will be restricted 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F11=Menu Table 2-2 describes the information in the User Attributes fields. Table 2-2. UMS User Attributes Fields (Page 1 of 2) Field Authority Level Multiple Signon Authority Password Expire Description Determines which NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands you can execute. Each command has an authority level associated with it in the range 0 through 255. You may execute all commands that have an authority level equal to or lower than your authority level. See Section 3, Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands, for more information on command authority levels. If Y, you can have multiple concurrent terminal logons to the same NonStop NET/MASTER MS system. If N, you are limited to one local and one remote session to the same system at the same time. If Y, you are subject to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS password expiration facility (see Changing Your Password, later in this section, for more information). If N, password remains effective until changed Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 5

50 User ID Management Services (UMS) The User Attributes Screen Table 2-2. UMS User Attributes Fields (Page 2 of 2) Field NCL Library Subvol NCL Object File Name Panel Library Subvol Main Menu Procedure User Services Procedure Terminals 1 through 10 Description The \system.$volume.subvolume of the user procedure library containing source files for NCL procedures. NonStop NET/MASTER MS searches this library first when you invoke an NCL procedure. This library may belong to you alone or be shared by a group of users. This is also the default \system.$volume.subvolume that appears when you enter the Edit Services facility. If blank (or if the procedure is not in the user procedure library), NonStop NET/MASTER MS searches the NCL procedure library search path, then the NCL object file search path. See Section 10, Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures, for more information on search paths. The \system.$volume.subvolume.filename containing the object code from every NCL user library procedure executed by you. The \system.$volume.subvolume of the user panel library containing source files for panels. NonStop NET/MASTER MS searches this library first when an NCL process attempts to display a panel. This library may belong to you alone or be shared by a group of users. If blank (or if the panel is not in the user panel library), NonStop NET/MASTER MS searches the panel library search path, then the panel object file search path. See Section 10, Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures, for more information on search paths. The NCL procedure that runs when you log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. If ZHWKMMNN is displayed, the default NCL procedure that displays the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen executes. The NCL procedure that runs when you enter User Services. If blank, you are not authorized to enter User Services. The logical or physical device names of the terminals from which you are authorized to log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. If all blank, you may log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS from any terminal Tandem Computers Incorporated

51 User ID Management Services (UMS) The Access Authorities Screen The Access Authorities Screen The following is a sample Access Authorities screen: OPER UMS : Access Authorities Page 3 of 5 Command ===> Function=BROWSE Authorized Functions: UMS Management... N OCS Access... Y System Support Access... Y Edit Services Access... Y Console Extras Access... Y Logon from Remote System... Y Logon to Remote System... Y Dynamic Logon... Y Rule Management Services... N Help Maintenance Access... N (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F11=Menu Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 7

52 User ID Management Services (UMS) The Access Authorities Screen The Access Authorities fields determine which NonStop NET/MASTER MS services you are allowed to use. Table 2-3 describes the information in the Access Authorities fields. Table 2-3. UMS Access Authorities Fields Field UMS Management OCS Access System Support Access Edit Services Access Console Extras Access Logon from Remote System Logon to Remote System Dynamic Logon Rule Management Services Help Maintenance Description If Y, you are authorized to perform extended User ID Management Services functions. If N, you are only authorized to use the B (Browse), L (List), and P (Password Change) functions. If you are authorized to use Console Extras, you can also browse Console Extras utility lists. If Y, you are authorized to use Operator Control Services. If N, you are not authorized to use Operator Control Services. If Y, you are authorized to use System Support Services. If N, you are not authorized to use System Support Services. If Y, you are authorized to use Edit Services. If N, you are not authorized to use Edit Services. If Y, you are authorized to use Console Extras. If N, you are not authorized to use Console Extras. If Y, you can access the local system from a remote system (see Section 8, Communicating With Remote Systems ). If N, you cannot access the local system from a remote system. If Y, you can access remote systems from the local system. If N, you cannot access remote systems from the local system. If Y, you are allowed to dynamically bring up a NonStop NET/MASTER MS logon screen on your terminal with the NNM utility (see Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, for more information). If N, you can log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS only from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS logon screen displayed on a terminal that has been explicitly opened by your system manager (with the OPENTERM command). If Y, you are authorized to use Rule Management Services. If N, you are not authorized to use Rule Management Services. If Y, you are authorized to use Help Maintenance. If N, you are not authorized to use Help Maintenance Tandem Computers Incorporated

53 User ID Management Services (UMS) The User Installation Attributes Screen The User Installation Attributes Screen The following is a sample User Installation Attributes screen: OPER UMS : User Installation Attributes Page 4 of 5 Command ===> Function=BROWSE The fields displayed below represent user attributes allocated by this installation. The function of any attributes defined in these fields is determined by your installation. No validation is performed against these fields. Installation Attribute 1... $DATA.ZNNMNCS.DISPSET Installation Attribute 2... Installation Attribute 3... Installation Attribute 4... F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F11=Menu The User Installation Attributes fields contain information specific to your installation. For instance, in the above example, Installation Attribute 1 contains the name of the default display set that is displayed when you run the NetStatus network management application (an optional product) from within NonStop NET/MASTER MS. (See Section 7, Accessing External Utilities and Applications, for more information on the NetStatus application.) Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 9

54 User ID Management Services (UMS) The OCS Details Screen The OCS Details Screen The OCS Details screen is only displayed if you have been given OCS access. The following is a sample OCS Details screen: OPER UMS : OCS Details Page 5 of 5 Command ===> Function=BROWSE Receive EMS Messages... Y Monitor Status... Y Message Code Message Procedure... (Y/N) (Y/N) (00-FF) Minimum Severity Class... WARN (INFO, WARN, NORM or SER) Unsolicited Message Receipt.. Y (Y/N - Default PROFILE UNSOL= setting) Initial OCS command... INITCMD F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F7=Backward F9=Swap F11=Menu The OCS Details fields define what types of messages are displayed in your OCS message display area. Table 2-4 describes the information in the OCS Details fields. Table 2-4. UMS OCS Details Fields (Page 1 of 2) Field Receive EMS Messages Monitor Status Message Code Description If Y, you are authorized to receive Event Management Service messages. If N, you are not able to receive Event Management Service messages. If Y, you are authorized to receive monitor-class messages, such as the notification of security violations or of other users logging on or off the system. If N, you are not able to receive monitor-class messages. A two-digit hexadecimal number that restricts the messages you are authorized to receive, based on the msgcode value indicated by an NCL WRITE verb. If the msgcode specified in an NCL WRITE verb when logically AND ed to the Message Code specified in the UMS record produces a non-zero result ( true ), then the message is displayed on the OCS screen; otherwise, the message is not displayed Tandem Computers Incorporated

55 User ID Management Services (UMS) The OCS Details Screen Table 2-4. UMS OCS Details Fields (Page 2 of 2) Field Message Procedure Minimum Severity Class Unsolicited Message Receipt Initial OCS command Description The name of an NCL procedure that is invoked when you enter OCS to process and respond to all messages sent to your OCS screen. This procedure is referred to as your MSGPROC procedure. If blank, standard message delivery applies. EMS and PPO messages are classified according to their level of severity. If you are authorized to receive these messages, you can receive messages that are at or above the following severity levels: INFO You receive all INFO, WARN, NORM, and SER messages. INFO messages are informational messages: for example, notification that a NetBatch job has finished normally. WARN You receive all WARN, NORM, and SER messages. WARN messages are warnings: for example, notification that a file is empty. NORM You receive all NORM and SER messages. NORM messages report occurrences that are not of a critical nature. Unless your site uses an EMSPROC procedure that further processes event messages, all non-ser EMS messages are considered NORM. SER You receive only SER messages. SER messages identify potentially critical situations: for example, notification that a disk drive has become inoperable. This value is the default value for your PROFILE UNSOL setting when you enter OCS. If Y, the unsolicited messages you are authorized to receive (as configured by the other fields on this page of your user ID definition record) are sent to your OCS window. If N, no unsolicited messages are sent to your OCS window, regardless of your user ID definition record settings. Your OCS profile, as well as solicited and unsolicited messages, are discussed in detail in Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS). A command, a set of commands, or an NCL procedure that is automatically executed whenever you enter OCS. The value in this field can be changed by using the PROFILE INITCMD command. (See Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS). ) When you have finished looking at the user ID definition record, press the F3 (PF03) or F11 (PF11) function key to return to the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 11

56 User ID Management Services (UMS) Listing User ID Definition Records of Other Users Listing User ID Definition Records of Other Users Select option L from the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen to display a list of user ID definitions. The List User Definitions function displays a list of user ID definition record values for all user IDs that match or contain the characters displayed in the User field at the bottom of the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen. By default, when you enter UMS, your user ID appears in this field. For example, if the following user IDs are defined: USER1 USER2 USER10 and you enter USER1 in the User field of the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen, the User Definition List screen would list records for: USER1 USER10 To display a list of all user ID records, blank out the User field before you select the L option. Note If you select option L without changing the value in the User field (for example, if you use panel skipping to access the List User Definitions function), the User Definition List screen displays a list that starts with your own user ID Tandem Computers Incorporated

57 User ID Management Services (UMS) Listing User ID Definition Records of Other Users The User Definition List is two screens wide. The left screen displays the user name, location, telephone number, and type of definition (user or group) associated with each user ID. The following example assumes you have limited UMS access: UMS : User Definition List ZUMSLISP Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE S/B=Browse User ID User Name Location Phone Number Type BAN Sidney Ban Sydney, N.S.W User BARNABY Fred Barnaby Bank of Zetland 000 User BOND James Bond England 007 User BOSTROM Kim Bostrom Cupertino User CURTIS Tony Curtis Manchester, U.K User FOSTER Lydia Foster Cupertino x931 User JOE Wesley Joe Office 2 x980 User JOHNSON Andrew Johnson Reston User LARIVIER Carrie La Riviere Paris User LO C.W. Lo Room User NETOPER NETWORK OPERATOR Group NEW John New Office 3 x341 User NG Chen Ng New Zealand User OPER1 Paul Anderson Data Center 111 User OPER2 Ian MacKenzie Data Center 111 User OPER3 Christine Lang Data Center 111 User F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F5=Find F6=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F11=Right Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 13

58 User ID Management Services (UMS) Listing User ID Definition Records of Other Users The right screen repeats the user ID and shows the group user ID associated with the set of privileges the user is sharing (if the user ID definition record belongs to a group). It also shows the user s command authority level and management services access authorities. To move from the left screen to the right screen, an example of which is shown below, press the F11 (PF11) function key. To move back to the left screen, press the F10 (PF10) function key UMS : User Definition List ZUMSLISP Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE S/B=Browse Cmd UMS OCS Sys Edit Cons Help Rule User ID Group ID Auth Auth Auth Supp Serv Extr Mnt Mgt BAN NETOPER 4 N Y Y Y Y N N BARNABY 0 N N Y N N N N BOND 255 N Y Y Y Y Y Y BOSTROM NETOPER 4 N Y Y Y Y N N CURTIS 3 N Y N Y N N N FOSTER OPERATOR 3 N Y Y Y Y N N JOE OPERATOR 3 N Y Y Y Y N N JOHNSON 0 N Y N N N N N LARIVIER NETOPER 4 N Y Y Y Y N N LO 0 N Y N N N N N NETOPER 4 N Y Y Y Y N N NEW OPERATOR 3 N Y Y Y Y N N NG 1 N Y N N Y N N OPER1 OPERATOR 3 N Y Y Y Y N N OPER2 OPERATOR 3 N Y Y Y Y N N OPER3 4 N Y Y Y Y N N F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F5=Find F6=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F10=Left Note If you are authorized to perform extended UMS functions, the User Definition List gives you the following options in addition to the S/B=Browse function: F=Force U=Update D=Delete C=Copy These functions are described in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide Tandem Computers Incorporated

59 User ID Management Services (UMS) Scrolling Through the User Definition List Scrolling Through the User Definition List To scroll through the user definition list, enter a scroll value in the Scroll field to control the amount of scrolling. Then press either the F7 (PF07), F8 (PF08), F10 (PF10), or F11 (PF11) function key to determine the type of scrolling (backward, forward, left, or right) as described in Table 2-5. Table 2-5. Scrolling Through the User Definition List Scroll Field Value 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Amount and Type of Scrolling F7 PF07 Scrolls backward one page, based on the current position of the cursor. The line on which the cursor is positioned becomes the last line of the new screen. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward one page, based on the current position of the cursor. The line on which the cursor is positioned becomes the first line of the new screen. D[ATA] F7 PF07 Scrolls backward one page. The first line of the former screen becomes the last line of the new screen. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward one page. The last line of the former screen becomes the first line of the new screen. P[AGE] F7 PF07 Scrolls backward one page. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward one page. H[ALF] F7 PF07 Scrolls backward one half page. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward one half page. nnn F7 PF07 Scrolls backward nnn lines. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward nnn lines. M[AX] F7 PF07 Scrolls backward to the first page of the user definition list. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward to the last page of the user definition list. any valid scroll value F10 PF10 Displays the right screen of the user definition list. F11 PF11 Displays the left screen of the user definition list. Note A page is the amount of information currently visible in the window. There must be a valid scroll value in the Scroll field. If the Scroll field is blank, the following error message is displayed: NNM0794 SCROLL AMOUNT MUST BE SPECIFIED If it contains an invalid scroll value, the following error message is displayed: NNM0793 INVALID SCROLL AMOUNT Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 15

60 User ID Management Services (UMS) Locating a Record in the User Definition List Note On 6530 and compatible terminals, you can use the function keys PAGEUP and PAGEDOWN for F7 and F8. Locating a Record in the User Definition List To locate a record in the user definition list, enter a search command in the Command field, as described in Table 2-6 below, and press the ENTER key. Table 2-6. Locating a Record in the User Definition List Command Field Value 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Type of Search L[OCATE] userid ENTER ENTER Locates the record containing the first user ID equal to or greater than the user ID requested (allows for partial user ID specification). The screen is reformatted so that the found record is the first record on the screen. This type of search only looks at the User ID field; you cannot use it to locate a location or user name, for example. F[IND] string [PREV] ENTER F5 ENTER PF05 Finds the record containing the first instance of string, starting at your current display. The cursor is positioned to the left of the record, and the row and column of the found string are displayed in the line below the Command line. This type of search looks at all the user definition fields, including the User ID field. Press the F5 (PF05) function key to find the next occurrence of string. Use the PREV option to search backward. string [PREV] F5 PF05 Same as F[IND] string [PREV]. Continue pressing the F5 (PF05) function key to find subsequent occurrences of string. Use the PREV option to search backward. Note There must be a valid scroll value in the Scroll field when you are searching for a particular record. If the Scroll field is blank, the following error message is displayed: NNM0794 SCROLL AMOUNT MUST BE SPECIFIED If it contains an invalid scroll value, the following error message is displayed: NNM0793 INVALID SCROLL AMOUNT The value in the Scroll field does not affect the scope of the search Tandem Computers Incorporated

61 User ID Management Services (UMS) Locating a Record in the User Definition List Issuing an L NG command results in a display similar to the next example: UMS : User Definition List ZUMSLISP Command ===> _ Scroll ===> PAGE S/B=Browse User ID User Name Location Phone Number Type NG Chen Ng New Zealand User OPER1 Paul Anderson Data Center 111 User OPER2 Ian MacKenzie Data Center 111 User OPER3 Christine Lang Data Center 111 User OPERATOR LOCAL OPERATOR Data Center 111 Group SMITH John Smith United Kingdom User SYSMAN David Morgan Data Center 111 User WELTI Jennifer Welti Office 1 x837 User YAO Henry Yao 3rd Floor x354 User ZAMMUT Brian Zammut Sydney, N.S.W User **END** F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F5=Find F6=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F11=Right The underscore (_) shows the cursor position. Issuing an F NG command results in a display similar to the next example: UMS : User Definition List ZUMSLISP Command ===> Scroll ===> DATA NNM0798 CHARS NG FOUND AT 9,36 S/B=Browse User ID User Name Location Phone Number Type BAN Sidney Ban Sydney, N.S.W User BARNABY Fred Barnaby Bank of Zetland 000 User _ BOND James Bond England 007 User BOSTROM Kim Bostrom Cupertino User CURTIS Tony Curtis Manchester, U.K User FOSTER Lydia Foster Cupertino x931 User JOE Wesley Joe Office 2 x980 User JOHNSON Andrew Johnson Reston User LARIVIER Carrie La Riviere Paris User LO C.W. Lo Room User NETOPER NETWORK OPERATOR Group NEW John New Office 3 x341 User NG Chen Ng New Zealand User OPER1 Paul Anderson Data Center 111 User OPER2 Ian MacKenzie Data Center 111 User OPER3 Christine Lang Data Center 111 User F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F5=Find F6=Refresh F7=Backward F8=Forward F9=Swap F11=Right The underscore (_) shows the cursor position Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 17

62 User ID Management Services (UMS) Viewing the User ID Definition Record of Another User Viewing the User ID Definition Record of Another User Exiting From the User Definition List Changing Your Password To view the full user ID definition record of a user in the user definition list, proceed as follows: 1. Position your cursor to the left of the user ID. 2. Type either S or B. 3. Press the ENTER key. When you finish looking at the user ID definition record, press the F3 (PF03) or F11 (PF11) function key to return to the User Definition List screen. Press the F3 (PF03) or F4 (PF04) function key from the User Definition List screen to return to the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen. Select option P from the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen to display the UMS Details screen from which you change your password. Your system manager may also set up NonStop NET/MASTER MS and your user ID definition record such that you must change your password at regular intervals. You must also change your password the first time you log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. In this case, the UMS Details panel (with Function=EXPIRED) is automatically displayed once you successfully log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Note If you are changing your password because it has expired, the F1 (PF01), F2 (PF02), and F9 (PF09) function keys are invalid in the UMS Details panel: that is, you cannot request help, split your screen, or swap windows. Pressing the F12 (PF12) function key from the Function=EXPIRED panel returns you to either the NonStop NET/MASTER MS logon screen or your TACL prompt Tandem Computers Incorporated

63 User ID Management Services (UMS) Viewing the User ID Definition Record of Another User The following is an example of an UMS Details screen: OPER UMS : Details Page 1 of 1 Command ===> Function=REQUEST User ID... OPER3 Current Password... New Password... User Name... Christine Lang User Location... Data Center Phone Number F1=Help F2=Split F3=File F9=Swap F12=Cancel To change your password, proceed as follows: 1. Type your current password in the Current Password field. Remember, your password is case sensitive: you must enter it with the assigned uppercase and lowercase characters. Your current password is not displayed as you type. 2. Position your cursor in the New Password field and type in a new password. Your new password can be up to eight #, and $ characters. The default minimum length is three characters (this may be different for your installation; check with your system manager if you have a problem). See the next subsection, Valid Passwords, for rules on what constitutes a valid password. Your new password is not displayed as you type Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 19

64 User ID Management Services (UMS) Viewing the User ID Definition Record of Another User 3. Press the F3 (PF03) function key. A screen similar to the following prompts you to reenter your new password to verify the change: OPER UMS : Details Page 1 of 1 Command ===> Function=REQUEST NNM0789 REENTER PASSWORD TO VERIFY CHANGE User ID... OPER3 Reenter New Password... User Name... Christine Lang User Location... Data Center Phone Number F1=Help F2=Split F3=File F9=Swap F12=Cancel 4. Reenter your new password and press the F3 (PF03) function key. If you reenter your new password incorrectly, the following message appears: NNM2101 NEW PASSWORD FAILED VERIFICATION - PLEASE REENTER Reenter your new password and press the F3 (PF03) function key again Tandem Computers Incorporated

65 User ID Management Services (UMS) Valid Passwords If you reenter your new password correctly, you are returned to the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen, and the following message appears in the line below the Select Option field: NNM0790 PASSWORD AND/OR USER DETAILS FOR USER user-id UPDATED The following is an example: SYS User ID Management Services : Primary Menu ZUMSMN2P Select Option ===> NNM0790 PASSWORD AND/OR USER DETAILS FOR USER OPER3 UPDATED B - Browse User Definition Userid OPER3 L - List User Definitions Term # P - Password Change for your User Time 13:07:08 V - Maintain Console Extras Utilities THU 10-NOV-1994 X - Exit User... OPER3 ( Required B Optional L ) F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F9=Swap Note Valid Passwords If you are changing your password because it has expired or because you are logging on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS for the first time, you are returned to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen, where a message confirming the change appears. NonStop NET/MASTER MS is designed to prevent you from creating passwords that are easy for an unauthorized person to guess. A valid password must meet the following criteria: The password must contain only the following characters: Alphabetic characters: A through Z and a through z Numeric characters: 0 through 9 Other characters: # The password must be from the value specified by the SYSPARMS PWMIN command through eight characters in length. The default value of SYSPARMS PWMIN is 3. If you enter a password longer than eight characters, it is truncated to the first eight characters Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 21

66 User ID Management Services (UMS) Valid Passwords For example, the following passwords are invalid because they contain fewer than three characters (using the default value of SYSPARMS PWMIN): 1, 12, The password must not have consecutive characters that: Are identical to the user s user ID Match any part of the user ID Contain the user ID For example, if a user ID is OP1SYD, the following passwords are invalid: OP1SYD, P1S, SYD, AOP1SYDZ, 12OP1SYD If the user s user name does not have embedded spaces, the password must not have consecutive characters that: Are identical to the user s user name Match any part of the user name Contain the user name For example, if a user name is John, the following passwords are invalid: JOHN, JOH, OHN, AJOHNZ, JOHN12 If the user s user name has embedded spaces, the password is checked against the user name in three ways. First, the embedded spaces are removed and the password is checked against the concatenated user name. The password must not have consecutive characters that: Are identical to the user s concatenated user name Match any part of the concatenated user name Contain the concatenated user name For example, if a user name is Tom Day, the following passwords (when checked against TomDay) are invalid: TOMDAY, TOMD, MDAY, ATOMDAYZ, TOMDAY12 Second, the embedded spaces are retained and the password is checked against each individual name in the user name. (A name is a first, middle, or last name. Also, a name is more than one character in length; otherwise, it is an initial.) The password must not have consecutive characters that: Are identical to a name Contain a name For example, if a user name is John Edward Sam Grey, the following passwords (when checked in turn against John, Edward, Sam, and Grey) are invalid: JOHN, AJOHNZ, EDWARD, 12EDWARD, SAM, 0SAM0, GREY, GREYAZ Tandem Computers Incorporated

67 User ID Management Services (UMS) Changing Your User Name, Location, or Telephone Number Third, the embedded spaces are retained and the password is checked against the initials of the user name. The password must not be the initials from the user name. For example, if a user name is Clair Rebecca New, the following password is invalid: CRN The password must not contain three or more consecutive instances of the same character. For example, the following passwords are invalid: HAL9000, AAABBB, You cannot reassign your current password as your new password. Your new password must not be in the current password history file. NonStop NET/MASTER MS keeps a file of passwords you have used in the past. The number of entries in this file is configured by your system manager. For example, if the password history file length is 32, you cannot reassign any of your previous 32 passwords as a new password. Changing Your User Name, Location, or Telephone Number In addition to changing your password, you can also change your user name, location, or telephone number by selecting option P (Password Change for your User) from the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen. You do not have to change your password from the UMS Details (Function=REQUEST) screen. Simply position your cursor on the field you wish to change, enter a new value, and press the F3 (PF03) function key to update the UMS database. Except for the initial OCS command (see Note, below), your password, user name, location, and telephone number are the only aspects of your user ID definition record you can change if you do not have authority to access extended UMS features. Your user ID definition record is updated immediately. For example, if you display the User Definition List screen, the screen will show the changes you have made to your user name, location, or telephone number. Note You can issue a PROFILE INITCMD command to specify a command to automatically execute whenever you enter OCS. When you issue the PROFILE INITCMD command, it dynamically replaces the initial OCS command value on page 5 of your user ID definition record (OCS Details). The PROFILE INITCMD command is discussed in detail in Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS) Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 23

68 User ID Management Services (UMS) Refreshing Your User ID Definition Record Refreshing Your User ID Definition Record If your system manager makes any security-related changes to your user ID definition record (beside user name, location, or telephone number) while you are logged on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS (for example, giving you a higher command authority level or enabling you to receive monitor-class messages), these changes are implemented the next time you do one of the following: Log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Open a new window. Issue a SIGNON command with no operands. The SIGNON command automatically refreshes your user ID definition record. Note The SIGNON command does not automatically refresh your NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen. To access any new options given to you, you need to open a new window, or log off then log on again. The SIGNON command also resets some of the profile settings in the environment from which you issued the command. For example, if your monitor status is set to Y (yes) in your user ID definition record, then the MONMSG profile setting is YES when you first enter an environment. While you are in the environment, you temporarily change the MONMSG profile setting to NO. If you later issue the SIGNON command in the environment, the command not only refreshes your user ID definition record, but also resets the MONMSG profile setting back to YES (assuming that your user ID definition record still defines you as having monitor status). If You Forget Your Password Console Extras Configurations If you forget your password, ask your system manager for a new temporary password. When you log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS with your temporary password, you are presented automatically with the UMS Details (Function=EXPIRED) screen, just as if you were logging on for the first time. You must assign yourself a new password before you can proceed. Follow the instructions outlined in Changing Your Password, earlier in this section. The Console Extras facility holds configurations of the following utility lists: 1. User utility lists are lists that belong to particular user IDs. 2. A customized utility list is a list that has been customized for your system. 3. The default utility list is the list that is installed with NonStop NET/MASTER MS. When you access Console Extras from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu, the facility searches for a configured utility list in the sequence 1 (your personal utility list), 2, and 3. You can ask your system manager to customize a utility list for your user ID Tandem Computers Incorporated

69 User ID Management Services (UMS) Refreshing Your User ID Definition Record Browsing Console Extras Configurations You can browse the Console Extras configurations. To browse the configurations, select option V from the User ID Management Services Primary Menu screen. An UMS Console Extras Maintenance Menu screen similar to the following appears: SYS UMS : Console Extras Maintenance Menu ZUMSXMMP Select Option ===> 1 - User Configuration Userid OPER3 2 - Customized Configuration Term # Default Configuration Time 13:11:40 X - Exit THU 10-NOV-1994 User... OPER3 ( Required 1 ) F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F9=Swap Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 25

70 User ID Management Services (UMS) Refreshing Your User ID Definition Record Select option 1, 2, or 3 to access a user utility list, the customized utility list, or the default utility list. If you select option 1, you must also specify in the User field the user ID that owns the utility list. The UMS Console Extras Configuration Menu screen appears. The following example shows the screen that appears when you select option 3: SYS UMS : Console Extras Configuration Menu ZUMSXC2P Select Option ===> B - Browse Utility Userid OPER3 L - List Utilities Term # X - Exit Time 13:13:10 THU 10-NOV-1994 Configuration... DEFAULT Utility Name... ( Required B Optional L ) F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F9=Swap You can view the details of a utility on the Console Extras Utility Details screen. There are two ways by which you can access the screen: If you know the name of the utility you want details on, specify the name of the utility in the Utility Name field and select option B to view the details on the Console Extras Utility Details screen. When you have finished looking at the utility details, press the F3 (PF03) function key to return to the UMS Console Extras Configuration Menu screen Tandem Computers Incorporated

71 User ID Management Services (UMS) Refreshing Your User ID Definition Record You can also access the details of a utility through a selection list. Select option L to display the utility list. The List Utilities function displays a list of the utilities for the configuration displayed in the Configuration field. The Console Extras Utility List screen displays the name and a description of the utility. The following screen is for the default utility list: SYS UMS : Console Extras Utility List ZUMSXULP Command ===> Utility DSMPM EMSA NETSTATUS OMF VIEWSYS **END** Description Distributed Systems Management/Problem Manager Event Management Service Analyzer Distributed Systems Management Solutions NetStatus Object Monitoring Facility System Resource Monitor Utility S/B=Browse F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F9=Swap To view the details of a utility in the list: a. Position your cursor to the left of the utility name. b. Type either S or B. c. Press the ENTER key to access the Console Extras Utility Details screen. When you finish looking at the utility details, press the F3 (PF03) function key to return to the Console Extras Utility List screen. Press the F3 (PF03) or F4 (PF04) function key from the Console Extras Utility List screen to return to the UMS Console Extras Configuration Menu screen Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 27

72 User ID Management Services (UMS) The Console Extras Utility Details Screen The Console Extras Utility Details Screen A sample Console Extras Utility Details screen is shown below: SYS UMS : Console Extras Utility Details ZUMSXDEP Command ===> Function=BROWSE Configuration... DEFAULT Utility Name... DSMPM Description... Distributed Systems Management/Problem Manager File Name... $SYSTEM.SYSTEM.PATHCOM Startup Text... $zpmp; run pmt; exit Support Terminals... BOTH (3270, 6530, or BOTH) CPU... Priority... Process name... F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap The Console Extras Utility Details screen contain the following information. Field Configuration Utility Name Description File Name Startup Text Support Terminals CPU Priority Process name Description Console Extras configuration that defines the utility list is: user ID User utility list CUSTOMIZED Customized utility list DEFAULT Default utility list Name of the utility. Description of the utility. Name that locates the utility. Startup parameters sent to the utility. Types of terminal that the utility supports: and compatible terminals and compatible terminals BOTH 3270, 6530, and compatible terminals CPU in which the utility will be run. If blank, NonStop NET/MASTER MS chooses a CPU on its own. Execution priority of the utility. If blank, NonStop NET/MASTER MS chooses a priority on its own. Tandem process name given to the utility process when the utility is run. If blank, NonStop NET/MASTER MS chooses a name on its own Tandem Computers Incorporated

73 User ID Management Services (UMS) How Global Configuration Values Affect Your Operations Environment Terminal Timeouts How Global Configuration Values Affect Your Operations Environment Your installation may be set up so that after a period of inactivity (for example, if your terminal is left logged on but unattended overnight or over a weekend), some action automatically occurs. For example: A message may be logged to the activity log and sent to all monitor-class operators. Your terminal alarm might ring. Your terminal may be locked. In this case, you must reenter your password before you can continue. Your terminal may be disconnected from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS application. If this happens, your system manager or another operator with sufficient authority must reopen your terminal by using the OPENTERM command. In addition to your user ID definition record, your NonStop NET/MASTER MS operations environment is affected by global values that may be configured for your particular NonStop NET/MASTER MS site. Many system-wide settings affect your interaction with NonStop NET/MASTER MS, such as whether the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen is displayed if you are only allowed to choose one menu item, how many days your password is valid before you must change it, whether the current time is displayed in the title line of your OCS window, and so on. Your system manager should inform you of how site-specific customizations affect your interaction with NonStop NET/MASTER MS Tandem Computers Incorporated 2 29

74 User ID Management Services (UMS) How Global Configuration Values Affect Your Operations Environment (This page left intentionally blank) Tandem Computers Incorporated

75 What Is in This Section 3 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) provides a comprehensive set of commands with which you can control, display information about, and customize your NonStop NET/MASTER MS operations environment. You can use NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands to communicate with local and remote systems, the operating system, Tandem subsystems such as SNAX/XF and Pathway, and remote IBM systems running the SOLVE management services. This section introduces the NonStop NET/MASTER MS command set and discusses: Command authority levels Command syntax Issuing timer commands Submitting commands to be executed in the background You can issue NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from: The OCS command input line (discussed in Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS)) The Command Entry facility command input line (discussed in Section 5, System Support Services ) The Activity Log Browse facility command input line (discussed in Section 6, Examining the Activity Log ) Network Control Language (NCL) procedures (discussed in Section 10, Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures ) See Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, for information on getting help for commands. Differences pertaining to command entry and response display from within the various facilities are discussed in the appropriate sections. Command Authority Levels NonStop NET/MASTER MS uses command authority levels to restrict access to NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands by users. Each NonStop NET/MASTER MS command has an authority level assigned to it. In addition, each operand of a command has an authority level. Authority levels are in the range 0 (zero) through 255, with 0 representing the lowest authority level and 255 representing the highest. An operand may have an authority level that is higher than that of its corresponding command. For instance, the default authority level of the PURGE command is 0, but its TIMER=ALL operand has an authority level of 2. When you enter a command, the authority level associated with your user ID must be equal to or higher than the authority level of the command and any operands you use; otherwise, the command is rejected. For example, if you want to use the TIMER=ALL operand of the PURGE command, you must have an authority level of at least 2 for your user ID Tandem Computers Incorporated 3 1

76 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Command Authority Levels There is, however, an exception to this general rule: if the authority level of an operand of a command is higher than your authority level, you can still use the operand if the operand only affects you (or an NCL procedure executing under your user ID). For example, by default, the ID operand of the FLUSH command requires an authority level of 2. If you have a lower authority level, you can still issue a FLUSH ID command if the NCL process you wish to terminate is executing under your user ID. The command is rejected if you try to terminate an NCL process belonging to another user. Default authority levels for all the NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands are listed in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual. Also, when you request help for NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands, the default authority levels of the command and its operands are displayed. At your site, some NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands and command operands may have a higher or lower command authority level than the default values. Some commands or operands may be disabled. See your system manager if you cannot execute a command or command operand that is necessary for your job. The authority level for the command may have been changed, or you may need a higher command authority level configured in your user ID definition record. You can use the SHOW COMMANDS command to display the current authority level of commands and operands, as the following screen shows: (07:48) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES SHOW COMMANDS NNM2800 COMMANDS AVAILABLE TO USER: OPER1 WITH AUTH: 4 NNM0023 COMMAND AUTH OP-AUTH NOTE EQUATE TEXT NNM0024! 0 - NNM0024? 0 - NNM0024 AT 0 2 NNM0024 AUTOHOLD 0 - NNM0024 CANCEL 1 - NNM0024 CLEAR 0 - NNM0024 CLOSTERM 1 3 NNM0024 CNM 3 - NNM0024 CS- 0 - NNM0024 CS+ 0 - NNM0024 DEBUG 0 - NNM0024 DEFLINK 3 - NNM0024 DEFMODE 4 - NNM0024 DEFOPSET 4 - NNM0024 DEFTRANS 4 - NNM0024 DELLINK 3 - NNM0024 DELMODE 4 - NNM0024 DELOPSET 4 - MSG QUEUED NonStop NET/MASTER D M=> Note The SHOW COMMANDS command does not display the authority level of external utility commands Tandem Computers Incorporated

77 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Manually Entering NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands There are several ways you can issue NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands: Manually enter the command(s) at a command input line and press the ENTER key. The following NonStop NET/MASTER MS facilities have command input lines: OCS Command Entry facility Activity Log Browse facility Press a function key that has a command (or series of commands) assigned to it (in the OCS window only). Execute an NCL procedure that contains NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. Enter commands in any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. Use at least one space to separate a command from its operand(s) and to separate multiple operands. NonStop NET/MASTER MS compresses multiple spaces to single space when spaces are used to separate operands. When spaces are part of a message text, as in MSG ALL Shutdown in 10 minutes. LOG OFF IMMEDIATELY NonStop NET/MASTER MS preserves the number of spaces you enter. Caution Do not include spaces around the equal sign (=) in commands when assigning a value to an operand. The following are examples of correctly using the equal sign: SHOW FILEINFO=$DATA2.MYSUBVOL.* PROFILE CMDSTACK=5 CMDKEEP=YES AT 21:30 ROUTE=MON CMD=SHOW LINKS Abbreviating Commands You can abbreviate any command to the least number of characters needed to distinguish it from all other commands. For example, to display information about your OCS operator profile, enter PROFILE or PROF. However, abbreviating the PROFILE command to PRO would result in an error because NonStop NET/MASTER MS would not be able to distinguish it from the PROGRUN command. Concatenating Commands If your OCS profile has been configured so that NonStop NET/MASTER MS recognizes the semicolon (;) as a command separator, you can enter multiple commands on the same command line by separating each command with a semicolon. (Refer to the PROFILE CMDSEP=YES description in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual.) Commands are initiated in the order you enter them, but Tandem Computers Incorporated 3 3

78 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands are not necessarily processed in the order you enter them. For example, the following does not necessarily cause NonStop NET/MASTER MS to process a SHOW SYSPARMS command and then a SHOW OCS command: SHOW SYSPARMS;SHOW OCS Note Exceptions are the CLEAR and K commands, which are always processed first, regardless of their location in the command string. If a semicolon is part of your command string, use two semicolons (;;) if you want a semicolon as part of the text. For example: SHOW USERS;MSG ALL Meeting at 1:00;; MANDATORY attendance! Using Function Keys to Issue NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands The function keys on your keyboard are assigned default definitions. Some of these function keys have been defined to execute NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. To execute a command assigned to a function key, simply press the appropriate function key. In addition to the function key definitions listed in Table 1-1, which are generally consistent throughout NonStop NET/MASTER MS, each NonStop NET/MASTER MS facility has specialized function key definitions, which are described in the appropriate sections. Note OCS has function keys defined to execute the AUTOHOLD, CLEAR, CS+, CS-, and ORDER commands. You can redefine any or all of the default OCS function key definitions. See Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS), for more information. Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From NCL Procedures The NonStop NET/MASTER Network Control Language (NCL) is a structured, highlevel language that is ideally suited to writing procedures that perform system and network operations tasks. You can execute most NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from an NCL procedure by using either the INTCMD core statement or the CMD verb. This includes timer commands, informational commands, and commands routed to remote systems. Command authority-level checking applies to all commands executed from NCL procedures invoked under your user ID. Any command that you are authorized to issue from OCS can be issued from an NCL procedure. Section 10, Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures, discusses how to issue NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from within NCL procedures Tandem Computers Incorporated

79 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Issuing Timer Commands Issuing Timer Commands Two NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands enable you to control the time and interval at which other NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands are executed: AT and EVERY. These two commands are referred to as timer commands. The AT command issues a command or series of commands at a specific time of the day. For example, to start the remote link REMOTE1 at 1:00 p.m., enter: AT 13:00 CMD=LINK START=REMOTE1 The EVERY command issues a command or series of commands at a specified time interval. For example, to monitor the status of REMOTE1 every 10 minutes, enter: EVERY :10 CMD=SHOW LINKS=REMOTE1 You can combine the AT and EVERY commands in a single command string to execute a command at a specific time and then at regular intervals. For example, to display all OCS users starting at 12:10 p.m. and at two minute intervals after that for three times, enter: AT 12:10 CMD=EVERY :02 LIMIT=3 SHOW OCS Attributes of Timer Commands By default, timer commands execute only when you are logged on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Timer commands execute under your authority level, even if you route them to be executed under another user ID. Each timer command has an associated purge ID number, which is displayed in the message display area when you first issue the timer command. For example: NNM1706 COMMAND ACCEPTED, PURGE ID NUMBER IS 7 Issue a SHOW TIMER command to display information about currently queued timer commands. For example: SHOW TIMER NNM1721 ID BY INTERVAL -USERID-R LIM CNT K/P ENV P/M TID NNM EV 00:02:00 MGRDEMO 3 2 NO PRI YES OCSUSERS NNM1725 CMD=SHOW OCS NNM1723 NUMBER OF TIMER COMMANDS DISPLAYED WAS 1 The AT and EVERY timer commands have operands that enable you to do the following: Determine what happens if you are logged off from NonStop NET/MASTER MS when the scheduled command is ready to be executed (the KEEP operand). Send the command to be executed under the control of another user ID (the ROUTE operand). Specify how many times the command should be executed at the specified interval (the LIMIT operand) Tandem Computers Incorporated 3 5

80 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Issuing Timer Commands Specify a 1-character to 12-character timer ID that you can use instead of the system-generated purge ID number to explicitly purge timer commands from the timer queue (the TID operand). Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for a complete description of these and other AT and EVERY command operands. The Timer Queue Executing Timer Commands When You Are Not Logged On When you issue a timer command to schedule the execution of other commands, the commands are placed in a timer queue. NonStop NET/MASTER MS does not save the timer queue when it shuts down. Prior to each attempt to execute a command in the timer queue, NonStop NET/MASTER MS checks that you are still logged on. By default, if you are no longer logged on, NonStop NET/MASTER MS deletes the command from the timer queue. Use the KEEP or ROUTE operand to override the automatic deletion of commands from the timer queue. Using the KEEP Operand Include the KEEP operand in your timer command string to specify that the command be executed under the control of either the Background Monitor (BMON) or the Background Logger (BLOG) if you log off. The BMON and BLOG background processes are discussed in Executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands in the Background, later in this section. For example, the following command string specifies that if you are not logged on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS at 9:00 p.m., the LNKCHECK procedure is executed by BLOG. The results of the procedure are sent to the activity log: AT 21:00 KEEP=LOG CMD=START LNKCHECK The KEEP operand only takes effect when NonStop NET/MASTER MS attempts to execute a timer command and determines that you are no longer logged on. If you log on to the system again, the KEEP operand is ignored and normal execution resumes. Using the ROUTE Operand You can also use the ROUTE operand in your timer command string to override the automatic deletion of commands from the timer queue when you are not logged on (see Sending a Timer Command to Another User, next). Using the ROUTE operand with your user ID (and without specifying a KEEP operand) ensures that the command is not automatically deleted when you are not logged on and is only executed when you are logged on. Sending a Timer Command to Another User The ROUTE operand sends a command for execution under the control of a specified target NonStop NET/MASTER MS user. If the target user is not logged on when NonStop NET/MASTER MS attempts to execute the command, NonStop NET/MASTER MS does not delete the command from the timer queue, but instead reschedules it for execution on the following day Tandem Computers Incorporated

81 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Issuing Timer Commands Timer commands execute under your authority level, even if you route them to be executed under another NonStop NET/MASTER MS user. Note Timer commands included in an NCL procedure that executes during system startup execute under the authority level of the NonStop NET/MASTER MS user who is bringing up the NonStop NET/MASTER MS application. Limiting the Number of Times a Command Is Executed Include a LIMIT operand in your timer command string to limit the number of times a command executes. A limit counter is incremented each time the command is executed. After reaching the specified limit, NonStop NET/MASTER MS purges the command from the timer queue. Note If you include a PMSG=YES operand in your timer command string, a message is displayed when the command is purged from the timer queue. If you include a ROUTE operand in your timer command string, and the command is not executed because the target user is not logged on, the limit counter is not incremented. The following example executes the SHOW USERS command every 10 minutes for a total of five times starting at 1:30 p.m : AT 13:30 EVERY :10 LIMIT 5 CMD=SHOW USERS To display the limit and the number of times a command has already executed, issue a SHOW TIMER command. Purging a Timer Command Use the following PURGE commands to explicitly purge timer commands from the timer queue. Purge all timer commands owned by your user ID by using the PURGE TIMER=OWN command. Purge all timer commands in the queue by using the PURGE TIMER=ALL command (provided you have sufficient authority). Purge a particular timer command by using either the user-supplied timer ID or the system-generated timer ID number to identify the command with the PURGE TIMER={ user-timer-id system-timer-id } command. To purge several individual timer commands, repeat the TIMER operand. For example: PURGE TIMER=12 TIMER=15 TIMER=OCSUSERS returns the following confirmation messages in the message display area: NNM1737 TIMER COMMAND ID NUMBER 12 PURGED NNM1737 TIMER COMMAND ID NUMBER 15 PURGED NNM1737 TIMER COMMAND ID NUMBER OCSUSERS PURGED Issue a SHOW TIMER command to display the purge IDs and timer IDs (if assigned) of all commands in the timer queue Tandem Computers Incorporated 3 7

82 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands System-Wide Customized Commands System-Wide Customized Commands Global Equates Each NonStop NET/MASTER MS command discussed in this manual and described in detail in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual may be replaced at your site with a customized version. In addition, some NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands may be replaced with an abbreviation at your site, or your site may have unique commands configured that are a combination of one or more NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. The two types of system-wide customized commands are global equates and command replacements. A global equate is a one-character to eight-character string assigned to a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command string. Global equates are created with the EQUATE command during NonStop NET/MASTER MS startup in the INIT NCL procedure. A global equate becomes the default for all NonStop NET/MASTER MS users. Use the SHOW EQUATES command to display all the available equates. The global equate has two types: In the first type of global equate, the character string is the same as an existing NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. The default NonStop NET/MASTER MS command is replaced with a different command string. For example, suppose you write an NCL procedure called NEWTIME that performs some additional processing. The default NonStop NET/MASTER MS TIME command could be replaced with a command to start the NEWTIME procedure, as in: EQUATE TIME START NEWTIME Then, when you issue a TIME command, the NCL procedure NEWTIME executes rather than the default TIME command. When you display all available equates with the SHOW EQUATES command, this type of global equate is displayed as type REPL. In the second type of global equate, the character string is not the same as a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. For example, if the following global equate has been defined for your system: EQUATE R3 ROUTE REMOTE1 ROUTE REMOTE2 ROUTE REMOTE3+ you can send a command (for example, the SHOW USERS command) to the remote system REMOTE3 by issuing the following command string: R3 SHOW USERS When you display all available equates with the SHOW EQUATES command, this type of global equate is displayed as type GLBL. Note In OCS, you can also set up local equates that remain in effect as long as your current OCS session. When you exit from OCS, local equates are lost. Local equates display as type LOCL when you issue a SHOW EQUATES command. Creating local equates is discussed in more detail in Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS) Tandem Computers Incorporated

83 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands System-Wide Customized Commands Command Replacements NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands can be replaced with an NCL procedure of the same name. For example, at your site, the NonStop NET/MASTER MS SHUTDOWN command may be replaced with an NCL procedure called SHUTDOWN that includes a timer command to warn users at 1-minute intervals that shutdown is imminent. (Command replacements are created with the SYSPARMS CMDREPL command, usually by your system manager.) You can display all the NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands that have been replaced by NCL procedures of the same name with the SHOW PRELOAD command. Replaced commands are displayed as type CMDREPL. Two prominent examples of system-wide command replacements are the OPSYS and PROGRUN commands. OPSYS and PROGRUN commands are used to access Guardian utilities and other applications external to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. By default, the native NonStop NET/MASTER MS OPSYS and PROGRUN commands are replaced by NCL procedures by the same name that include extra security checking and other enhancements. (OPSYS and PROGRUN are described in detail in Section 7, Accessing External Utilities and Applications. ) Tandem Computers Incorporated 3 9

84 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands in the Background Executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands in the Background Virtual Users Two types of users operate within the NonStop NET/MASTER MS environment: real users and virtual users. Real users are human operators who interact with NonStop NET/MASTER MS from a terminal, choose options from menu panels, and enter NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands to instruct the system to perform various tasks. Virtual users are processes that operate in the background and do not have terminals associated with them. They provide a processing environment in which NCL procedures are run and commands are executed without having to interact with a terminal. NonStop NET/MASTER MS creates five virtual users when it starts. These virtual users process NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands on behalf of other users or procedures, exist as long as NonStop NET/MASTER MS is running (unless explicitly stopped), and have user IDs associated with them. The five virtual users are as follows: BMON (the Background Monitor) processes commands and sends the results to the terminals of all users who have been defined as monitor-class users (discussed in Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, and Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS) ) and to the activity log (discussed in Section 6, Examining the Activity Log ). BLOG (the Background Logger) processes commands, and sends the commands and the results to the activity log. BSYS (the Background System process) executes the READY and INIT NCL procedures during system startup. It can also execute user-defined NCL procedures after the system is running. EMSP runs the EMSPROC procedure, an NCL procedure that intercepts each event message and determines whether to discard it or allow it to proceed for further filtering. (The EMSPROC procedure is discussed in Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS). ) LOGP runs the LOGPROC procedure, an NCL procedure that intercepts and processes all messages destined for the activity log. (The LOGPROC procedure is discussed in Section 6, Examining the Activity Log. ) Tandem Computers Incorporated

85 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands in the Background The virtual users are displayed when you issue a SHOW USERS command, as shown in the following example: (15:12) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES SHOW USERS NNM0656 USERID TERMINAL TYPE PHYSICAL NAME PROCESS NNM NNM0659 OPER1 # $ATP2.#TERM1 $U000 NNM0658 SYS1BLOG BG-LOG BLOG $U000 NNM0658 SYS1BMON BG-MON BMON $U000 NNM0658 SYS1BSYS BG-SYS BSYS $U000 NNM0658 SYS1EMSP EMS-PROC EMSP $U000 NNM0658 SYS1LOGP LOG-PROC LOGP $U000 NNM USERS LOGGED ON NonStop NET/MASTER D M=> The user ID of the virtual user is the name of the virtual user prefixed by a domain ID (SYS1). (OPER1 is a real user.) Submitting Commands to Virtual Users You can submit a command for a virtual user to execute by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS SUBMIT command. The processing of that command is managed entirely by the virtual user and is not affected if you then log off from NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Background environments, therefore, are ideal for systemmonitoring functions such as executing a procedure that regularly checks the status of network components. The destination of the output depends on the virtual user processing the command. For example, the results of commands sent to BLOG are sent only to the activity log. The results of commands sent to BMON are sent to all monitor-class operator terminals as well as to the activity log. The following example tells BMON to execute the NCL procedure MYPROC: SUBMIT BMON START MYPROC You can also use the KEEP or ROUTE operands of the AT and EVERY commands to send a timer command to execute under the control of a virtual user. The next example sends a command to BLOG to execute the SHOW USERS command at 6:00 p.m.: AT 18:00 ROUTE=LOG CMD=SHOW USERS Virtual users are discussed in more detail in the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide Tandem Computers Incorporated 3 11

86 Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands Executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands in the Background (This page left intentionally blank) Tandem Computers Incorporated

87 What Is in This Section 4 Operator Control Services (OCS) This section introduces the Operator Control Services (OCS) environment and describes its event monitoring and command entry facilities. It describes: Entering and exiting OCS The standard OCS window The OCS message display area The OCS recall buffer Using and defining OCS function keys Your OCS operator profile Issuing and customizing NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) commands Monitoring events Working with two windows See Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, for information on getting help for commands and messages from OCS. What Is OCS? Entering and Exiting OCS Operator Control Services (OCS) is the NonStop NET/MASTER MS central control environment for system and network operators. From OCS, you can: Issue NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands without waiting for each response before entering the next command. View event messages about network activity. Access other NonStop NET/MASTER MS facilities such as the Activity Log Browse facility, the Command Entry facility, and Edit Services. To enter OCS, select option 2 from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen. Note Your user ID may be configured so that you enter OCS automatically when you log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. To exit from OCS, do one of the following: Enter an X command in the command input line and press the ENTER key Press either the F3 (PF03) or F4 (PF04) function key Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 1

88 Operator Control Services (OCS) The Standard OCS Window The Standard OCS Window Figure 4-1 illustrates the standard OCS window. The OCS window includes a title line, a message display area, an information line, a command input line, and a mode indicator. Figure 4-1. The Standard OCS Window 1 (08:38) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES Current time Non-roll-delete messages ========================================== 2 Message display area newest Roll-delete messages oldest 3 Holding mode messages Version level OCS window identifier NonStop NET/MASTER D30 D M=> 5 Mode indicator Legend Title line Non-roll-delete delimiter line Roll-delete delimiter line 4 5 Information line Command input line 005 The OCS Message Display Area Messages (both responses to commands and messages reporting the occurrence of events throughout the network) are displayed in the OCS message display area. Command results and events are displayed asynchronously. You do not have to wait for each response before entering another command. Messages are written line by line from the top to the bottom of the message display area. When the display area is full, new output messages wrap to the top of the screen again, overwriting the oldest displayed messages. You can, however, recall the most recent 100 messages through the OCS recall buffer Tandem Computers Incorporated

89 Operator Control Services (OCS) Roll-Delete Messages There are two major classifications of messages displayed in the message display area: Roll-delete messages convey information that is not of immediate critical importance to your installation. Non-roll-delete (NRD) messages convey information that is of critical importance to your installation. By default, when non-roll-delete messages are not present, the roll-delete message area occupies the entire window space between the title line and information line. As non-roll-delete messages appear, the non-roll-delete message area expands downward from the top of the window, compressing the available space for roll-delete messages until only the minimum roll-delete message area remains. NonStop NET/MASTER MS requires that there always be at least one line of rolldelete message space available. Note You can change the minimum size of the roll-delete message area by using the PROFILE RDMIN command. Both roll-delete and non-roll-delete messages are also recorded in the activity log. You can view them at any time by entering the Activity Log Browse facility. You can access the Activity Log Browse facility by pressing the F7 (PF07) function key. See Section 6, Examining the Activity Log, for more information on the Activity Log Browse facility. Roll-Delete Messages Most messages displayed in your OCS window are classified as roll-delete messages. Typically, such messages are not of critical importance to your installation. These messages might be the response to a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command, a report that a user has logged on, or a report that a terminal has been opened. Roll-delete messages are written line by line from the top to the bottom of the rolldelete message display area. By default, when the roll-delete message display area is full, the flow of incoming messages pauses for a specified number of seconds (roll-time delay interval) and then wraps to the top of the window again, overwriting the oldest displayed messages. If, however, NonStop NET/MASTER MS determines that later messages will wrap past the line on which the first message in the group is displayed, the message display freezes and the holding-mode message AUTO HOLD appears in the information line. Press the ENTER key to continue the message display. (This assumes the default AUTOHOLD setting of AUTO; see Table 4-1 for more information.) The roll-delete delimiter line (by default a line of - characters) separates the most recent messages from the earlier messages Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 3

90 Operator Control Services (OCS) Roll-Delete Messages Note You can change the roll-time delay interval by using the PROFILE ROLL command, and the roll-delete delimiter character by using the PROFILE DELCHAR command. Temporarily Suspending Roll-Delete Message Delivery If so many roll-delete messages are being written to your window that you cannot read them, you can temporarily suspend the flow by pressing the ENTER key. The holding-mode message HOLDING appears in the information line. If additional messages arrive while the window is frozen, the terminal alarm rings and the HOLDING holding-mode message changes to MSG QUEUED Press the ENTER key to restart the flow of messages. Controlling the Roll-Delete Message Display Flow The AUTOHOLD command allows you to control what happens after the roll-delete message display area is filled and there are more messages in a group of messages to display. Think of AUTOHOLD as consisting of two toggles: the ON/OFF toggle and the AUTO/NOAUTO toggle. Table 4-1 describes how the AUTOHOLD settings affect message displays Tandem Computers Incorporated

91 Operator Control Services (OCS) Roll-Delete Messages Table 4-1. AUTOHOLD Settings AUTO NOAUTO AUTOHOLD ON Window freezes whenever it is full, regardless of how many messages are waiting to be displayed. Same behavior as above. When AUTOHOLD ON is in effect, the AUTO/NOAUTO toggle has no effect. AUTOHOLD OFF The window freezes only if there are enough messages in a group queued to cause later messages in the group to wrap past the line on which the first message in the group is displayed. If the number of messages queued for display does not cause the first message in the group to be overwritten, the message display pauses for the roll-time delay interval and then automatically wraps to the top of the window. AUTOHOLD OFF/AUTO is the default setting when you enter OCS. The window never freezes, regardless of the number of messages being sent to it. Messages roll by continuously, paused only by the roll-time delay interval. Whenever a window freezes, the AUTO HOLD holding-mode message is displayed. Whenever extra messages arrive at a frozen window, the MSG QUEUED message is displayed. From any frozen window, press the ENTER key to cause message output to continue: messages wrap to the top of the window, overwriting earlier messages until the message display area fills again. To toggle between AUTOHOLD ON and AUTOHOLD OFF, issue the AUTOHOLD command with no operands; by default, the F6 (PF06) function key is defined to issue the AUTOHOLD command. Toggling between AUTOHOLD ON and AUTOHOLD OFF does not affect the AUTOHOLD AUTO/NOAUTO setting. If you enter the AUTOHOLD command with no operands while the screen is frozen, AUTOHOLD OFF is assumed. All queued messages are displayed with the flow of messages, pausing only for the roll-time delay interval each time the window is filled. After all queued messages are displayed, the window behaves according to the current AUTO/NOAUTO setting. The AUTOHOLD command is described in detail in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 5

92 Operator Control Services (OCS) Roll-Delete Messages The Message Hold Queue While the roll-delete message display is frozen (either in the AUTO HOLD or HOLDING holding-mode), pending roll-delete messages are stored in a message hold queue, and the AUTO HOLD or HOLDING holding-mode message is replaced with: MSG QUEUED The default number of messages that can be held in this queue is 200. When the limit is reached, the earliest messages are discarded and the newest messages are added to the end of the queue. Each OCS window has a message hold queue associated with it. There is no central queue for roll-delete messages. As the queue fills up, the MSG QUEUED holding-mode message is replaced with the following messages which reflect how full the queue is: %75 LIMIT %100 LIMIT MSGS LOST Note You can change the size of the message hold queue by using the PROFILE HOLD command. Reorganizing the Message Display Area At any time, you can issue the ORDER command to reorganize the roll-delete and non-roll-delete message displays to appear in chronological order. The ORDER command releases any AUTO HOLD or HOLDING holding-mode condition. The F12 (PF12) function key is defined to execute this command. Clearing the Roll-Delete Message Area Use the CLEAR or K (these two commands are synonymous) or PAGE command to clear the roll-delete message area. CLEAR K Clears the roll-delete message area immediately. The CLEAR (or K) command is processed ahead of any other commands waiting for processing. By concatenating the CLEAR (or K) command with another command, you can ensure that the full roll-delete message area is available to display the results of a command Tandem Computers Incorporated

93 Operator Control Services (OCS) Non-Roll-Delete (NRD) Messages PAGE Clears the roll-delete message area. Unlike the CLEAR (or K) command, the PAGE command is not moved to the front of the command queue. If you issue a PAGE command while AUTOHOLD is ON, the AUTO HOLD holding-mode message is displayed before the screen is erased. Non-Roll-Delete (NRD) Messages Non-roll-delete (NRD) messages convey information that is of critical importance to your installation. These messages do not roll by and disappear from your OCS window. They remain displayed until you either delete or remove them from the window, or the event that caused the message to be sent is resolved. When a NRD message is delivered to an OCS window, it is initially displayed in the roll-delete message area. It may be colored or highlighted, but there is no special indication that it is a NRD message. When the roll-delete message area is full and a NRD message is overwritten by another message, the NRD message currently embedded in the roll-delete message area is redisplayed in the non-roll-delete message area. The non-roll-delete message area expands downward from the top of the window, compressing the available space for roll-delete messages. NRD messages are separated from the roll-delete message area by a non-roll-delete delimiter line (by default a line of = characters). Note You can change the non-roll-delete delimiter character by using the PROFILE NRDELCH command. There are two types of NRD messages: Full NRD messages NRD messages with the OPER attribute Full NRD Messages A full NRD message is a non-roll-delete message that has a Delete Operator Message Identifier (DOM ID) assigned to it when it is created. A DOM ID has the following format: where domain-id/nrd-id domain-id is the domain ID of the system from which the NRD message originated, and nrd-id is a unique number assigned by NonStop NET/MASTER MS. The following is an example: SYS1/ Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 7

94 Operator Control Services (OCS) Non-Roll-Delete (NRD) Messages A full NRD message, which can be displayed on more than one OCS window concurrently, can be simultaneously purged from all the OCS windows on which it is displayed. The Central NRD Message Queue. All full NRD messages are held in a central NRD message queue until they are deleted from both the queue and the OCS windows on which they are displayed. If the number of messages in the queue exceeds the limit of the queue, the oldest outstanding message is deleted from the queue and copies of the message are removed from all OCS windows in which the message is displayed. OCS operators with monitor-class status receive a warning when the central NRD message queue is 75% full and when NRD messages are lost from the queue. Issue a SHOW NRD command to display the NRD messages currently stored in the central queue. Displaying the Messages Held in the Central NRD Message Queue. When you enter OCS, you must explicitly issue a NRDRET command to display all the NRD messages currently in the central NRD message queue that are associated with your OCS window. It might be a good idea to include a NRDRET command as one of the commands to execute automatically when you enter OCS (see Your OCS Operator Profile, later in this section). NRD Messages With the OPER Attribute A NRD message with the OPER attribute is a non-roll-delete message that is local to an OCS window. It does not have a DOM ID assigned to it, and it is not stored in the central NRD message queue. When a NRD Message Is Displayed on an OCS Window A NRD message is displayed on an OCS window: If the NRD message is unsolicited, and the OCS window is profiled to receive the unsolicited message. That is: For monitor-class messages, PROFILE UNSOL=YES and PROFILE MONMSG=YES For EMS messages, PROFILE UNSOL=YES and PROFILE EMS=YES For all other unsolicited NRD messages, PROFILE UNSOL=YES For messages with a certain message code, the value of PROFILE MSGCODE entitles the OCS window to receive messages with that message code The default values of these PROFILE command operands are determined by your user ID definition record. You can find out the default values by browsing to the UMS : OCS Details panel in your user ID definition record. See Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS), for details. If the NRD message is sent directly to the OCS window by an NCL procedure. That is, the NCL procedure uses the WRITE verb to create a NRD message and to specify the terminal to which to send the message Tandem Computers Incorporated

95 Operator Control Services (OCS) Non-Roll-Delete (NRD) Messages Pending NRD Messages Because NRD messages remain displayed until some action is taken, the non-rolldelete message display area may become full if you do not remove the messages from your window. New NRD messages are added to the non-roll-delete message queue until there is room in the non-roll-delete message area for them to be displayed. At any time when NRD messages are pending display, the following message is displayed on the non-roll-delete message area delimiter line: NRD PEND Removing NRD Messages From Your OCS Window To remove a NRD message from your window, move your cursor to the line containing the message and press the ENTER key. This is called NRD message cursor deletion. Note Removing a full NRD message by the cursor deletion method only removes it from display on your OCS window; it does not delete it from the central NRD message queue. Removing a NRD message with the OPER attribute by the cursor deletion method is the same as deleting it. For a full NRD message, however, this method simply removes it from your OCS window; you must still use the PURGE command to delete full NRD messages from the central NRD message queue. Restoring Full NRD Messages to Your OCS Window Issue a NRDRET command to redisplay all full NRD messages removed from your OCS window by the cursor deletion method. The oldest removed full NRD messages are redisplayed in the NRD message area until the area has expanded to its maximum size. The NRDRET command redisplays all full NRD messages you are entitled to view, including those still outstanding that occurred before you entered OCS. Deleting NRD Messages From Your OCS Window and the Central Queue There are four ways a NRD message can be deleted, both from the central NRD message queue and from all OCS windows on which it appears: You issue a PURGE NRD command. You can purge NRD messages: From a specified domain. The following example purges all NRD messages from a specific domain (SYS1): PURGE NRD=SYS1/* Older than a specified number of minutes, hours, or days. The following example purges all NRD messages older than 1 hour: PURGE NRD=1H Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 9

96 Operator Control Services (OCS) Non-Roll-Delete (NRD) Messages Generated by a specified NCL process. The following example purges all NRD messages from the NCL process with the NCL ID of 5494: PURGE NRD=5494N Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for more information about the PURGE NRD command. The event that caused the message to be generated is resolved. An NCL process issues a NRDDEL command, specifying the DOM ID of the NRD message to be deleted. An NCL process that has a NRD message associated with it terminates. When a full NRD message is purged from the queue, the first character of the message is replaced by a vertical bar ( ) on all windows that display the message. The message becomes a roll-delete message and disappears when the next set of roll-delete messages rolls past on each window. NRD Messages From Remote Locations NRD messages originating from remote locations are displayed and handled in the same way as NRD messages generated locally. If a link fails, breaking any remote connections, all NRD messages that originated from the remote system are automatically deleted. If you log off from a remote system (with the SIGNOFF command), any NRD messages you have received from that remote system are deleted from your OCS window. Other users displaying the same NRD messages are not affected. Remote operations are discussed more fully in Section 8, Communicating With Remote Systems Tandem Computers Incorporated

97 Operator Control Services (OCS) The Command Input Line The Information Line The information line above the OCS command input line displays the following information: Holding-mode messages, as described earlier in this section and summarized in Table 4-2 Table 4-2. Holding-Mode Messages Message Description HOLDING You have pressed the ENTER key to temporarily suspend the flow of messages to the roll-delete message area. AUTO HOLD AUTOHOLD ON is in effect, and the screen is frozen until you press the ENTER key to allow the message display to wrap to the top of the roll-delete message area. MSG QUEUED Additional messages have arrived while the screen is frozen. %75 LIMIT The message hold queue is 75% full. %100 LIMIT The maximum message hold queue limit is reached. MSGS LOST The maximum message hold queue limit is exceeded. FS-HOLD Your OCS screen is taken over by another screen as soon as you press the ENTER key (or another function key). This occurs only when AUTOHOLD AUTO is set. It allows you a grace period before the OCS messages disappear from the window. The OCS window identifier If you have set an OCS identifier by using the OCSID command, this identifier is displayed at the right of the information line (see Working With Two OCS Windows, later in this section, for more information). The Command Input Line The OCS command input line is where you enter NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. The results of these commands are displayed in the roll-delete message area of the OCS window from which the command was entered. Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from the OCS command input line is discussed in more detail later in this section Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 11

98 Operator Control Services (OCS) The Mode Indicator The Mode Indicator The OCS command input line prompt indicates whether you are authorized to receive monitor-class messages and also notifies you when NCL procedures are waiting for some type of action, as defined in Table 4-3. Table 4-3. The Mode Indicator Mode Indicator M P A Description You are authorized to receive monitor-class messages (the Monitor Class field is set to YES in your user ID definition record). Monitor-class messages are messages that have the monitor-class attribute set. Examples are messages reporting that a user has logged on or off the system. If you are authorized to receive monitor-class messages, you may disable this feature during your current OCS session by using the PROFILE MONMSG=NO command (see Your OCS Operator Profile, later in this section). This clears the M mode indicator. An NCL process is currently paused, pending the entry of a GO or FLUSH command. Enter the SHOW PAUSE command to display information about paused NCL processes. An NCL process invoked by an action function key is currently executing. Refer to Table 4-5 for an explanation of an action function key. For example, if you place the cursor to the left of a message in your OCS message display area and then press F1 to get help on the message, the mode indicator A appears to the left of the command input line, indicating that the help text is being retrieved or waiting to be displayed. Without mode indicators, the prompt looks like this: => With all mode indicators present, the prompt looks like this: APM=> Tandem Computers Incorporated

99 Operator Control Services (OCS) Entering and Exiting the Recall Buffer The OCS Recall Buffer Entering and Exiting the Recall Buffer The OCS recall buffer contains the current messages in your OCS message display area and the past 100 messages that have been displayed. Using the recall buffer, you can redisplay messages that have been overwritten. The recall buffer holds only messages that have been displayed, not the ones that are queued. For example, when there are queued messages and you issue the CLEAR ALL command, the displayed and queued messages are cleared but only the displayed messages are placed in the recall buffer. As the recall buffer fills up, the oldest roll-delete messages are deleted. As time progresses, the non-roll-delete messages tend to accumulate at the top of the buffer. A non-roll-delete message in the recall buffer becomes a candidate for deletion only if you have deleted the message from your OCS window. To accommodate the non-roll-delete messages, the recall buffer may hold more than 100 messages if there are no roll-delete messages to delete. To access the recall buffer from a Tandem 6530 or compatible terminal, press one of the following from OCS: PAGEUP, which brings up the previous page of messages in the buffer. SHIFT and PAGEUP, which brings up the page of the oldest messages, that is, the top of the buffer. SHIFT and PAGEDOWN, which brings up the page of messages currently on your OCS window, that is, the end of the buffer. To exit from the recall buffer, press F13 (RECALLEND). If you are at the end of the list of messages in the buffer, you can also press PAGEDOWN to exit. To access the recall buffer from an IBM 3270 or compatible terminal, you must first define the recall buffer function keys you want to use (see The Recall Buffer Function Keys, later in this section, for more information). After defining the function keys, press one of the following from OCS: PREV, which brings up the previous page of messages in the buffer. SPREV, which brings up the page of the oldest messages, that is, the top of the buffer. SNEXT, which brings up the page of messages currently on your OCS window, that is, the end of the buffer. To exit from the recall buffer, press the RECALLEND function key. If you are at the end of the list of messages in the buffer, you can also press the NEXT function key to exit Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 13

100 Operator Control Services (OCS) The Recall Buffer Screen The Recall Buffer Screen The recall buffer screen is similar to the OCS window. The command input prompt, however, is replaced by one of the following: CURR: if the screen contains messages that were in the OCS message display area when you accessed the recall buffer PAST: when the screen contains only messages that were overwritten in the OCS message display area You can still issue commands from the command input line. However, if you are expecting some messages in response, you will not be able to see those messages until you exit from the recall buffer. The MSG QUEUED holding-mode message appears in the information line when the response messages are available. Other commands will act normally: for example, =X will log you off from NonStop NET/MASTER MS. The following is an example of the recall buffer screen. (13:52) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES TOP OF BUFFER -- START INITCMD NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM1005 START INITCMD PROCESSING COMPLETE. NCLID NNM0363 NEW TITLE SET PROFILE NNM0381 USERID: OPER3 TERMINAL-ID: # NNM0382 NCL PROCEDURE LIBRARY ID: $DATA.ZNCLPGN NNM0383 USERID HAS MONITOR STATUS. NNM0384 AUTOHOLD SETTING IS OFF AUTO NonStop NET/MASTER D PAST: Tandem Computers Incorporated

101 Operator Control Services (OCS) The Recall Buffer Function Keys The Recall Buffer Function Keys In the recall buffer, the function-key definitions are the same as in OCS. The OCS function keys that are specifically defined for the recall buffer are described in Table 4-4. Table 4-4. Recall Buffer Function Key Definitions 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Description F13 User-defined Exits from the OCS recall buffer. ROLLUP User-defined Moves toward the top of the recall buffer by one line. However, if you are at the end of the buffer and the displayed messages do not fill the whole screen, moves toward the top of the buffer by the number of lines required to fill the screen. ROLLDOWN User-defined Moves toward the end of the recall buffer by one line. However, if you are at the top of the buffer and the displayed messages do not fill the whole screen, moves toward the bottom of the buffer by the number of lines required to fill the screen. PAGEUP User-defined Moves toward the top of the recall buffer by one page. PAGEDOWN User-defined Moves toward the end of the recall buffer by one page. SHIFT and ROLLUP User-defined Moves toward the top of the recall buffer by half a page. SHIFT and ROLLDOWN SHIFT and PAGEUP SHIFT and PAGEDOWN User-defined User-defined User-defined Moves toward the end of the recall buffer by half a page. Moves to the top of the recall buffer. Moves to the end of the recall buffer Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 15

102 Operator Control Services (OCS) The Recall Buffer Function Keys Table 4-4 shows that all recall buffer function keys for IBM 3270 and compatible terminals are user-defined. You can use either the FK or PF command to define these function keys. For example, you can define the function keys by using the following FK commands: FK PF13 IMM,PREV FK PF14 IMM,RECALLEND FK PF15 IMM,ROLLUP FK PF16 IMM,ROLLDOWN FK PF19 IMM,PREV FK PF20 IMM,NEXT FK PF21 IMM,HALFUP FK PF22 IMM,HALFDOWN FK PF23 IMM,SPREV FK PF24 IMM,SNEXT Or by using the following PF commands: PF13 IMM,PREV PF14 IMM,RECALLEND PF15 IMM,ROLLUP PF16 IMM,ROLLDOWN PF19 IMM,PREV PF20 IMM,NEXT PF21 IMM,HALFUP PF22 IMM,HALFDOWN PF23 IMM,SPREV PF24 IMM,SNEXT Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for the complete syntax of the FK and PF commands Tandem Computers Incorporated

103 Operator Control Services (OCS) Displaying the Current Function Key Definitions Using the OCS Function Keys Displaying the Current Function Key Definitions Function keys on your keyboard are assigned default definitions. To perform a function assigned to a function key, simply press the appropriate function key. To display the function key settings for your current OCS window, enter the FK command at the OCS command input line. Issuing an FK command from a 6530 keyboard might result in a display similar to that shown in the following example. (13:54) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES FK NNM1852 KEY TYPE --ASSOCIATED TEXT-- NNM1853 F1 PREF -START ZOCHHLPN+ NNM1853 F1 ACT ZOCHHLPN NNM1853 F2 IMM SPLIT NNM1853 F3 IMM X NNM1853 F4 IMM RETURN NNM1853 F5 PREF -START ZCENFACN+ NNM1853 F6 IMM AUTOHOLD NNM1853 F7 IMM -START ZLOGBRWN NNM1853 F8 IMM CLEAR NNM1853 F9 IMM SWAP NNM1853 F10 IMM CS+ NNM1853 F11 IMM CS- NNM1853 F12 IMM ORDER NNM1853 F13 IMM RECALLEND NNM1853 F14 PREF -START ZUANPRGN+ NNM1853 F14 ACT ZUANPRGN NNM1853 F15 PREF -START ZOCHHLPN+ NNM1853 F15 ACT ZOCHHLPN NNM1853 F16 IMM X AUTO HOLD NonStop NET/MASTER D M=> Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 17

104 Operator Control Services (OCS) Customizing Function Keys In the preceding screen example, function keys F1 through F16 are defined to perform the following functions: Function Key F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 Definition Displays help text for the command or event message, depending on where the cursor is positioned. Executes the SPLIT command to open a new window. Executes the X command to return to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen. Executes the RETURN command to return to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen. Enters the Command Entry facility. Executes the AUTOHOLD command to toggle between AUTOHOLD ON and AUTOHOLD OFF. Enters the Activity Log Browse facility to view the activity log. Executes the CLEAR command to clear all roll-delete messages currently displayed or queued for display. Executes the SWAP command to open a new window or, if two windows are already open, to reverse their dimensions and enter the other window. Executes the CS+ command to redisplay the most recently executed command from the command history buffer on the OCS command input line. If you position the cursor on a line in the roll-delete message display area, F10 copies the line to the command input line. Executes the CS- command to redisplay the earliest command from the command history buffer on the OCS command input line. If you position the cursor on a line in the roll-delete message display area, F11 copies the line to the command input line. Executes the ORDER command to reformat the message area so that messages are displayed chronologically. Exits from the OCS recall buffer. Used during an OPSYS session, with the cursor positioned to the left of a non-rolldelete Guardian utility prompt message and an answer to the prompt in the OCS command input line. Pressing the key answers the prompt message and removes the non-roll-delete attribute of the message. (See Section 7, Accessing External Utilities and Applications, for more information on responding to prompts generated by utilities.) Same as F1, displays help text for the command or event message, depending on where the cursor is positioned. Same as F3, executes the X command to return to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen. Customizing Function Keys You can save time and keystrokes by defining additional function keys or redefining currently assigned function keys to issue frequently used commands by using the FK or PF command. The following discussion describes how to use the FK command for both the Tandem 6530 or compatible terminal keyboards and the IBM 3270 or compatible terminal keyboards Tandem Computers Incorporated

105 Operator Control Services (OCS) Customizing Function Keys Note You can also use the PF command to define function key settings for both the Tandem 6530 or compatible terminal keyboards and the IBM 3270 or compatible terminal keyboards. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for details on using the PF command. If you have two OCS windows open, each one can have a unique set of function key definitions. Unless you include FK commands in the initial OCS procedure (see Customizing Your Initial Operator Profile, later in this section), your customized function key definitions only remain in effect for the current OCS session. When you exit from OCS, any function key assignments made during your OCS session are forgotten. The five types of function key assignments are defined in Table 4-5. Table 4-5. Types of Function Key Assignments (Page 1 of 2) Type ACT, ncl-proc CONV, nnm-cmd IMM [, nnm-cmd ] Definition Specifies an action function key assignment. Pressing an action function key passes the message on which the cursor is positioned to the specified NCL procedure for processing. For example, the following command causes the ZOCHHLPN NCL procedure to process the contents of the message line on which the cursor is located when you press the F1 function key on a 6530 keyboard: FK F1 ACT,ZOCHHLPN Specifies a conversational function key assignment. Pressing a conversational function key displays the specified NonStop NET/MASTER MS command on the OCS command input line. The command string can be added to or modified before you press the ENTER key to issue it. For example, the following command causes SHOW to be displayed on the OCS command input line when you press the PF24 function key on a 3270 keyboard: FK PF24 CONV,SHOW You can then type in USERS or OCS or whatever SHOW command you wish to issue and press the ENTER key. Specifies an immediate function key assignment. Pressing an immediate function key displays the specified NonStop NET/MASTER MS command on the OCS command input line and executes it immediately. For example, the following command causes the SHOW LINKS command to be executed immediately when you press the F13 function key on a 6530 keyboard: FK F13 IMM,SHOW LINKS If no command is included in the IMM definition, the function key acts as an ENTER key and issues whatever command is currently displayed on the OCS command input line Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 19

106 Operator Control Services (OCS) Customizing Function Keys Table 4-5. Types of Function Key Assignments (Page 2 of 2) Type PREF, text [+] SUFF, [+] text Definition Specifies a prefix function key assignment. Pressing a prefix function key prefixes tex to whatever text is currently displayed on the OCS command input line and executes the concatenated string immediately. Including a plus sign (+) adds a blank to the end of text before it is prefixed to the currently displayed text. For example, the following command causes MSG ALL followed by a space to be prefixed to whatever text has been entered on the OCS command input line when you press the PF14 function key on a 3270 keyboard: FK PF14 PREF,MSG ALL+ So, if you have entered SYSTEM DOWN AT 17:00 on the OCS command input line, pressing PF14 causes the command MSG ALL SYSTEM DOWN AT 17:00 to be executed immediately. Specifies a suffix function key assignment. Pressing a suffix function key appends tex to whatever text is currently displayed on the OCS command input line and executes the concatenated string immediately. Including a plus sign (+) adds a blank to the beginning of text before it is appended to the currently displayed text. For example, the following command causes FROM SYSOP1 preceded by a space to be appended to whatever text has been entered on the OCS command input line: FK F12 SUFF,+FROM SYSOP1 So, if you have entered MSG ALL SYSTEM DOWN AT 17:00 on the OCS command input line, pressing F12 causes the command MSG ALL SYSTEM DOWN AT 17:00 FROM SYSOP1 to be executed immediately. You can assign a series of commands to a single function key by using two semicolons (;;) to separate the commands. For example, to assign the F2 function key to first clear all roll-delete messages from your current window and then display information about users, enter: FK F2 IMM,K;;SHOW USERS If you did not include the second semicolon, NonStop NET/MASTER MS would treat the above example as two separate commands. The F2 function key would only be assigned to clear roll-delete messages from your current window. (The SHOW USERS command would execute only once, when you initially issue the FK command.) Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for the complete syntax of the FK command Tandem Computers Incorporated

107 Operator Control Services (OCS) Your OCS Operator Profile Your OCS Operator Profile Displaying Your Operator Profile Modifying Your Operator Profile for the Current Session When you enter OCS, an OCS operator profile is created for you. Your OCS operator profile is a set of attributes, privileges, and options gathered from the following sources: The values in your user ID definition record System-wide settings configured by your system manager Default values assumed by NonStop NET/MASTER MS Information you provide with the PROFILE command Aspects of your OCS operator profile determine the following: The size and appearance of the message display area The type of messages displayed in the message display area How you enter NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands and how the responses to those commands are displayed on your terminal You can view the settings in your OCS operator profile, and you can change some attributes, such as the roll-time delay interval, by using the PROFILE command. Other attributes, such as your command authority level, can only be changed by your system manager. You can customize your OCS operator profile attributes for each OCS window, so that if you have two OCS windows open on the same terminal, each can have a different profile. To display your OCS profile, enter the PROFILE command with no operands. All the PROFILE operands are discussed in detail in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual. To modify your OCS operator profile, enter the PROFILE command with one or more operands. Except for the INITCMD operand, modifications made to your OCS operator profile remain in effect only until you exit from OCS. For example, if you have more than one Guardian user ID assigned to you in your user ID definition record, you can switch from your currently assigned Guardian user ID to another one by using the PROFILE GUID command: PROFILE GUID=91,93 If you have more than one window open, each one has its own OCS profile associated with it (see Working With Two OCS Windows, later in this section). You cannot change the value of an operand so that it supersedes the value specified in your user ID definition record or permits you to do something that your user ID definition record prohibits Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 21

108 Operator Control Services (OCS) Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From OCS Customizing Your Initial Operator Profile Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From OCS Entering Commands on the Command Input Line The PROFILE INITCMD command specifies a command (or NCL procedure) to automatically execute when you enter OCS. The PROFILE INITCMD value remains in effect after you exit from OCS. The command string you assign to the PROFILE INITCMD operand replaces the value that is currently stored in the Initial OCS Command field in your user ID definition record. For details on using this command, refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual. To automatically change your OCS operator profile settings whenever you enter OCS, set PROFILE INITCMD to start an NCL procedure that resets your OCS operator profile values. See Section 10, Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures, for an example of an initial OCS procedure that sets up a customized operator profile for you. From OCS, you can issue NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands by one of the following methods: Manually entering commands on the OCS command input line Pressing function keys that have been defined to execute commands Retrieving commands from the history buffer for modification and reexecution Executing NCL procedures that contain NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands To enter a command, move your cursor to the OCS command input line, type the command string, and press the ENTER key. The command and its results are displayed in the roll-delete message area of the OCS window from which you entered the command. The length of the command string you can enter is determined by the length of the OCS command input line. If you have split your OCS window vertically, you may only have enough room to enter short command strings. Suppressing the Command Echo The commands you enter are echoed in the roll-delete message area. You can override the display of a command by preceding the command string with a hyphen (-). Only the results are displayed in the message area. This also suppresses the logging of the command (but not its results) in the activity log. Note In some instances, such as when you are interacting with an external utility or application (see Section 7, Accessing External Utilities and Applications ), you may have to respond to a prompt that requires you to enter a password. To ensure that your password is not echoed on your OCS window or in the activity log, precede your response command string with a hyphen Tandem Computers Incorporated

109 Operator Control Services (OCS) Reexecuting Previously Entered Commands Retaining Commands on the Command Input Line The commands you enter on the OCS command input line remain on the input line after you press the ENTER key. You can override this feature and cause the command input line to be cleared as soon as you press the ENTER key by issuing a PROFILE CMDKEEP=NO command. Defining Function Keys to Issue Commands Reexecuting Previously Entered Commands As discussed in Using the OCS Function Keys, earlier in this section, you can save time and keystrokes by defining function keys to issue frequently used commands for you. To execute a command string assigned to a function key, simply press the appropriate function key. Each OCS window maintains a history buffer (sometimes referred to as the command stack) of the most recent unique command strings entered from the command line, including commands entered from function keys. (If you enter the same command string more than once consecutively, only the first occurrence of the string appears in the history buffer.) You can manage and use the history buffer through the following functions: Change the number of entries kept in the history buffer by using the PROFILE CMDSTACK=history-buffer-size command (the default size is 20; the range of sizes is 0 through a value set by the CMDSTACK system parameter (the maximum value is 99)). Display the contents of the history buffer by using the HISTORY command. Retrieve a command string from the history buffer for display on the OCS command input line for modification and reexecution by using the FC command. Retrieve a command string from the history buffer for display in the roll-delete message area by using the? command. Immediately reexecute a command string from the history buffer without modification by using the! command. Retrieve the most recently executed command string stored in the history buffer for display on the OCS command line by using the CS+ command. The F10 (PF10) function key is defined to perform this function. Retrieve the earliest command string currently stored in the history buffer for display on the OCS command line by using the CS- command. The F11 (PF11) function key is defined to perform this function. For complete syntax of any of the above commands, refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual. You can also reexecute previously entered commands by positioning your cursor on an echoed command line in the OCS message area and pressing the F10 (PF10) or F11 (PF11) function key. The contents of the line are copied to the command input line for modification and reexecution Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 23

110 Operator Control Services (OCS) Executing Commands From an NCL Procedure Executing Commands From an NCL Procedure Creating Customized Commands in OCS Local Equates Deleting a Local Equate You can execute most NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from within NCL procedures. These commands include timer commands, informational commands, and commands routed to remote systems. Command authority-level checking applies to all commands executed from NCL procedures invoked under your user ID. In other words, if your NonStop NET/MASTER MS user ID definition record allows you to perform a certain task, any NCL procedure that executes under your control can also perform it. An NCL procedure that executes under your control cannot perform tasks that your user ID definition record does not allow you to perform. Section 10, Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures, discusses how to execute NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands within NCL procedures. In OCS, you can create customized commands by using the EQUATE command. These customized commands are called local equates. Local equates differ from global equates (discussed in Section 3, Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands ) in that they are created by an individual user after NonStop NET/MASTER MS startup. Local equates are command substitutions that are only in effect: For your user ID For the OCS window from which the EQUATE command was issued For the duration of your current OCS session. When you exit from OCS, local equates are lost A local equate is a string, one through eight characters in length, assigned to a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command string after NonStop NET/MASTER MS startup. For example, the following command sets the local equate, ABC, to execute the SHOW USERS command: EQUATE ABC SHOW USERS When you display all available equates using the SHOW EQUATES command, a local equate is displayed as type LOCL. You can define a local equate in OCS to override a global equate with type GLBL, but not type REPL. The value of the global equate is restored when you exit from OCS. See Section 3, Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands, for the difference between type GLBL and type REPL global equates. To delete a local equate, issue an EQUATE command and assign a null value to the character string you wish to disable. For example, the following command disconnects the string ABC from the SHOW USERS command: EQUATE ABC Tandem Computers Incorporated

111 Operator Control Services (OCS) Monitoring Events Monitoring Events A primary function of the NonStop NET/MASTER MS product is to process messages that report the occurrences of events throughout the network. Messages may be: Solicited (responses to commands) Unsolicited (generated by the occurrence of an event) Examples of unsolicited messages you might receive are as follows: Messages sent from other operators by using the MSG command, if your PROFILE MSG=YES Monitor-class messages (messages that have the monitor-class attribute set) such as notification of other users logging on or off the system, if the Monitor Status field in your user ID definition record is set to Y and your PROFILE MONMSG=YES. (Your OCS prompt will have an M as the first character) Tandem EMS and IBM PPO messages, if the Receive EMS Messages field in your user ID definition record is set to Y and your PROFILE EMS=YES Both solicited and unsolicited messages may be further classified as: Informational, such as the response to a command Critical, such as a report that a terminal has failed. Critical events or events requiring immediate action are highlighted Messages are displayed in the OCS message display area, the OCS recall buffer, and in the activity log. Note You can also request that messages be displayed in your Command Entry facility message display area (see Section 5, System Support Services ). The OCS message display allows you to monitor significant events or problems as they occur throughout the network. The OCS recall buffer allows you to view the most recent events (about 100 messages). The activity log allows you to view events that occurred earlier. In addition, the activity log contains messages which were delivered to other users' terminals. The types of messages displayed on your OCS screen depend on: The following fields in your user ID definition record: Receive EMS Messages Monitor Status Message Code Message Procedure Minimum Severity Class Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 25

112 Operator Control Services (OCS) The Event Message Flow Unsolicited Message Receipt The following PROFILE attributes for current OCS session: PROFILE EMS=YES, NO, INFO, NORM, WARN, or SER PROFILE MONMSG=YES or NO PROFILE MSG=YES or NO PROFILE MSGCODE=message-code PROFILE MSGPROC=ncl-procedure PROFILE UNSOL=YES or NO The level of message filtering programmed into: The EMSPROC system procedure (see The Event Message Flow next) The MSGPROC procedure (if any) associated with your current OCS window (see The Event Message Flow next) The Event Message Flow Within the local system, NonStop NET/MASTER MS works with the Tandem Event Management Service (EMS). Objects in Tandem subsystems generate EMS event messages when events occur that usually require external resolution. These event messages are sent to an EMS collector process for storage and distribution. Several EMS collectors can be collecting events from several sources concurrently. Both Tandem EMS messages and IBM PPO messages routed to the local system are passed to a NonStop NET/MASTER NCL procedure referred to as an EMSPROC procedure. Each NonStop NET/MASTER MS system may have an associated EMSPROC procedure (configured with the SYSPARMS EMSPROC command) that intercepts and processes unsolicited messages. The EMSPROC procedure can be programmed to: Delete, change, or pass messages Create new messages Forward messages to other systems Respond to specific types of messages and either discard them or change their attributes before forwarding them on Note EMSPROC, LOGPROC, and MSGPROC are generic names that refer to the function of the associated NCL procedures. They may have any legal file name Tandem Computers Incorporated

113 Operator Control Services (OCS) The Event Message Flow The EMSPROC procedure determines which events are passed on to the following three NonStop NET/MASTER MS components: The NCL log procedure (referred to as the LOGPROC procedure) that is configured with the SYSPARMS LOGPROC command for your system. A LOGPROC procedure intercepts and processes messages destined for the NonStop NET/MASTER MS activity log. The NCL message procedure (referred to as the MSGPROC procedure) associated with your current OCS window. If you have a MSGPROC procedure assigned to your OCS window, it processes all messages directed to your OCS window. The MSGPROC procedure analyzes the message content and takes appropriate action. Functions available to this procedure include the ability to delete messages, modify the message text, and issue internal commands as a result of a message. Each operator may have different MSGPROC procedures to process messages in different ways or may have different MSGPROC procedures operating in different OCS windows. If you have a default MSGPROC procedure specified in the Message Procedure field of your user ID definition record, it is invoked automatically when you enter OCS. You can terminate execution of the current MSGPROC procedure by using the PROFILE MSGPROC=FLUSH command, and explicitly start up a different MSGPROC procedure by using a PROFILE MSGPROC command (refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for details). (The different MSGPROC procedure is only active for the current OCS session: if you exit from and return to OCS, the default MSGPROC procedure is again invoked automatically.) The NonStop NET/MASTER MS Inter-System Routing (ISR) component for routing messages to other NonStop NET/MASTER MS or NET/MASTER nodes (see Section 8, Communicating With Remote Systems, for more information on the ISR component of NonStop NET/MASTER MS). EMSPROC, LOGPROC, and MSGPROC procedures are discussed in detail in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide and the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 27

114 Operator Control Services (OCS) Message Color and Highlighting Figure 4-2 illustrates how event messages flow between systems and how they are passed to the various message filtering procedures within your local NonStop NET/MASTER MS system. Figure 4-2. The Event Message Flow Remote System Event Management Service (EMS) NonStop NET/MASTER MS ISR INMC Link OCS OCS OCS Message Display Windows Display MSGPROCs EMSPROC Inter-System Routing (ISR) EMSPROC LOGPROC Activity Log Local System 006 Message Color and Highlighting Depending on the type of terminal you are using, messages may be displayed in different colors and with different highlighting schemes. When links are defined with remote systems (see Section 8, Communicating With Remote Systems, ) the appearance of messages from that particular remote system are configured at each local system Tandem Computers Incorporated

115 Operator Control Services (OCS) Viewing Messages in the Activity Log Event Message Codes Messages may be identified by one of the message codes defined in Table 4-6: Table 4-6. Event Message Codes Mode Indicator M E L Description Identifies the message as being a monitor-class message. Monitor-class messages have the monitor-class attribute set. They are sent to all users who are authorized to receive such messages in the Monitor Status field of their user ID definition record and whose current PROFILE MONMSG=YES. An example of a monitor-class message is: 16:00:05 M NNM0654 LOCAL USER JENNIFER LOGGED OFF FROM # Identifies the message as having been internally generated by the EMSPROC NCL procedure. Such messages are sent to all monitor-class operators. Identifies the message as having been internally generated by the LOGPROC NCL procedure. Such messages are sent to all monitor-class operators. Viewing Messages in the Activity Log The activity log is a log file where event messages and responses to NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands are recorded. It represents a record of activity occurring throughout the network. You can view event messages that have scrolled off of your screen or that occurred at an earlier date or time by browsing the activity log with the Activity Log Browse function. From OCS, you can access the Activity Log Browse facility by: Invoking the NCL procedure ZLOGBRWN. For example: START ZLOGBRWN In OCS, by default, the F7 (PF07) function key is assigned to this function. Panel skipping to the Activity Log Browse facility by entering the following sequence in the OCS command input line: =S.3 This selects option 3 from the System Support Services Primary Menu screen. Once you are in the activity log, you can press F3 (PF03) to return to your OCS window or the System Support Services Primary Menu screen. The activity log and the Activity Log Browse facility are described in Section 6, Examining the Activity Log Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 29

116 Operator Control Services (OCS) Working With Two OCS Windows Working With Two OCS Windows Opening a Second OCS Window Moving Between Two OCS Windows You can work with two OCS windows. Each window operates independently of the other. Input is accepted from the window in which the cursor is located; results of commands are returned to the same window. Each window can be customized by using the PROFILE command. Any modifications that you make to your OCS operator profile apply only to the current OCS window. If you have another OCS window that you want to customize, you must move to the other window and execute the PROFILE command in that window. Each OCS window has a primary processing environment associated with it. The primary processing environment provides the internal NonStop NET/MASTER MS services and facilities that are required to execute NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands (including those that execute NCL procedures) from the window that is associated with it. Thus, you can have one or two active primary processing environments from which to execute NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands and NCL procedures. Issue the SPLIT command, assigned to the F2 (PF02) function key, or the SWAP command, assigned to the F9 (PF09) function key, to divide your display screen into two logical OCS windows. With the SPLIT command, you can: Split your window vertically, so that you have two windows side by side. Split your window horizontally, so that you have one window above the other. With the SWAP command, you can open a second window that occupies the entire screen. In this case, you can only see one window at a time, and the window that is currently in the background is hidden. If you press the SPLIT function key to split your OCS window, you can include an =2 panel skip specification in the ZPSKIP grid line to open the second window directly into OCS (otherwise, your second window opens in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen, and you must access OCS from there). The SPLIT and SWAP functions are described in more detail in Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, and in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual. Issue the SWAP command, assigned to the F9 (PF09) function key, to move from one OCS window to the other: If you have two windows open and both windows are visible on the screen, the SWAP function swaps the sizes of each window. If you are operating with two windows open where each window occupies the entire screen, the SWAP function brings the hidden window into the foreground. If you are operating with a single window open, the SWAP function automatically opens a second window displaying the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen Tandem Computers Incorporated

117 Operator Control Services (OCS) Naming Windows Naming Windows If you are operating with two OCS windows, use the OCSID command to name each window. The OCS window identifier displayed at the right of the information line enables you to easily distinguish between the two windows. Note If you usually work with two OCS windows open on your terminal, you might want to include NCL code in your initial OCS procedure that names both windows for you when you enter OCS. The &SYS.OCS.ID and &SYS.OCS.IDO system variables supply the current window and other window names, respectively. See Section 10, Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures, for an example of an initial OCS procedure that does this Tandem Computers Incorporated 4 31

118 Operator Control Services (OCS) Naming Windows (This page left intentionally blank) Tandem Computers Incorporated

119 What Is in This Section 5 System Support Services System Support Services provides access to the following facilities: Activity Log Browse facility, which allows you to browse through and search the NonStop NET/MASTER MS activity log. Command Entry facility, which offers an alternative to OCS for entering NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings, which lets you view and modify the current SYSPARMS settings by means of a full-screen selection list. This section describes the Command Entry and Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facilities. The Activity Log Browse facility is discussed in Section 6, Examining the Activity Log. See Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, for information on getting help on commands and messages from the Command Entry facility. Entering System Support Services Select option S from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen to display the System Support Services Primary Menu screen, as shown here: SYS System Support Services : Primary Menu ZHWKSSSP Select Option ===> 3 - Activity Log Browse Facility Userid OPER3 6 - Command Entry Facility Term # S - Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings Time 13:59:25 X - Exit THU 10-NOV-1994 F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F9=Swap Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 1

120 System Support Services The Command Entry Facility The Command Entry Facility The Command Entry facility provides: An alternative to OCS for entering NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands A means of entering external utility commands without having to type the utility name every time Entering commands from the Command Entry facility differs from entering commands from OCS in the following ways: When you enter a command from the Command Entry screen, the results of the command are returned to you in a continuous sequence; the results are not automatically intermixed with unsolicited messages arriving at the same time. When you enter a new command, the response from the previous command is cleared from the screen. Commands, responses, and (optionally) unsolicited messages (see Receiving Unsolicited Messages in this section) are saved in a capture buffer, which you can scroll through and print. Commands are saved on a command stack, which you can display. You can select previously entered commands from the command stack for reexecution, and you can delete commands from the command stack. The Command Entry facility automatically routes a command for execution at a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system if you supply the name of the link that connects it. In OCS, you must use the ROUTE command. The Command Entry facility can automatically send a command or command string for execution by an external utility if you supply the name of the utility or the name of a session that you have established with the utility. You do not have to reenter the utility name or the session name each time you send a command to the utility. In OCS, you must refer to the utility name or the session name each time you send a command to the utility. Furthermore, if you are accessing the utility through a session name, you must use the OPSYS command. If you are receiving event messages at your OCS screen at a rate high enough that NonStop NET/MASTER MS keeps taking control of your keyboard to write to the screen, entering commands from the Command Entry facility can alleviate this problem. The disadvantages of entering commands from the Command Entry facility are that: There is no persistent critical message area for non-roll-delete messages, so critical messages might be lost while in the Command Entry environment. The display of responses to commands is slower than in OCS Tandem Computers Incorporated

121 System Support Services Entering the Command Entry Facility Entering the Command Entry Facility Select option 6 from the System Support Services Primary Menu screen to display the Command Entry screen, as shown here: COMMAND ENTRY COMMAND : : SYSTEM : SYS1 ASYNC ON WRAP OFF CAPTURE 0 LINE 1 UTILITY : SCROLL OFF F4 PRINT MAX CAP 1000 COLUMN Note You can also enter the Command Entry facility by starting the NCL procedure ZCENFACN. In OCS, the F5 (PF05) function key is assigned by default to this procedure Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 3

122 System Support Services The Command Entry Function Keys The Command Entry Function Keys Table 5-1 describes how function keys are defined in the Command Entry facility. Table 5-1. Command Entry Function Key Definitions 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Description F1 PF01 Displays help. F2 PF02 Executes the SPLIT command to open a new window. F3 PF03 Returns to the previous screen. F4 PF04 Prints the contents of the capture buffer. F5 PF05 Repeats the last FIND command. F6 PF06 Retrieves the last command entered and displays it in the COMMAND field. F6 (twice) PF06 (twice) Displays a list of previously entered commands (the command stack). F7 PF07 Scrolls backward the number of lines specified in the last scroll command. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward the number of lines specified in the last scroll command. F9 PF09 Executes the SWAP command to open a new window or, if two windows are already open, to reverse their dimensions and enter the other window. F10 PF10 Scrolls left the number of columns specified with the last scroll command. F11 PF11 Scrolls right the number of columns specified with the last scroll command. The following function keys are valid only if the UTILITY field is not blank: F13 PF13 Issues the command OPSYS EOF utility-name where utility-name is the value in the UTILITY field. F14 PF14 Issues the command OPSYS ANSWER utility-name where utility-name is the value in the UTILITY field. SF13 Not applicable Issues the command OPSYS BREAK utility-name where utility-name is the value in the UTILITY field. SF14 Not applicable Issues the command OPSYS KILL utility-name where utility-name is the value in the UTILITY field. Note If you issue an FK command on the Command Entry COMMAND field, the current OCS function key definitions are listed Tandem Computers Incorporated

123 System Support Services The Command Entry Screen The Command Entry Screen The Command Entry screen includes: A two-line COMMAND field A parameter area comprising a set of fields where you specify the system to which commands are to be sent and how you want the responses to those commands to be displayed A message display area The Command Entry screen fields are described in Table 5-2. Table 5-2. Command Entry Screen Fields (Page 1 of 2) Command Entry Field COMMAND SYSTEM UTILITY Description Enter the command you wish to execute in this field. If the UTILITY field is not blank and you do not want a command to be sent to the utility, prefix your command with a slash (/). If you are having a session on your own system, the field should display the ID of the system (if you fill the field with blanks, the value defaults to the ID of your system). If you want to route the command to a remote system, enter the name of the link connecting the remote system in this field. Enter the name of the external utility to which the utility command is to be sent in this field (refer to Section 7, Accessing External Utilities and Applications ) Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 5

124 System Support Services The Command Entry Screen Table 5-2. Command Entry Screen Fields (Page 2 of 2) Message Display Attributes Field ASYNC WRAP SCROLL MAX CAP Description Determines how messages are displayed in the message display area: ON Messages are displayed on arrival without operator intervention. OFF Messages are displayed when the operator next interacts with the command entry. This only affects asynchronous commands and unsolicited messages. Determines how messages are displayed in the message display area once the capture buffer is full: ON When the capture buffer limit (MAX CAP value) is reached, Command Entry continues to add new messages to the capture buffer, forcing the oldest messages out. OFF When the capture buffer limit is reached, the message CAPTURE BUFFER IS FULL appears, and new messages are discarded. Determines how messages are scrolled in the message display area: ON The latest screenful of most recently received messages is displayed. For example, if a command results in 100 lines of response messages, and the message display area can display 24 lines, the last 24 lines of the response are displayed. OFF The earliest screenful of most recently received messages is displayed. For example, if a command results in 100 lines of response messages, and the message display area can display 24 lines, the first 24 lines of the response are displayed. Determines how many lines the capture buffer can hold before the WRAP option takes effect. The default is 1000; the maximum is Statistics Field CAPTURE LINE COLUMN Description Displays the number of messages currently in the capture buffer. This field is updated each time messages are received. Displays the position in the capture buffer of the first line currently displayed in the message display area. Displays the position of the leftmost column in the message display area (0 when you are not scrolling to the left or right). Print Function Field F4 PRINT Description Indicates that F4 is the function key to press to print the contents of the capture buffer (see Printing the Capture Buffer, later in this section) Tandem Computers Incorporated

125 System Support Services Entering Commands Receiving Unsolicited Messages Entering Commands In addition to command responses, you may explicitly request that unsolicited messages be displayed in the message display area. Use the PROFILE ENV=CURRENT command followed by the appropriate operand(s) to turn the display of unsolicited messages on or off. For example: PROFILE ENV=CURRENT EMS=YES UNSOL=YES The PROFILE command is discussed in more detail in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual. When the UTILITY field on the Command Entry screen is blank, you can enter a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command in the COMMAND field. If you want to execute a command on a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS or SOLVE management services system, also enter the name of the link connecting that system in the SYSTEM field and press the ENTER key. Responses to commands are displayed in the message display area. When the UTILITY field is not blank, you should be aware of the following rules and restrictions when entering commands: If the command goes to the utility, enter the command as is. If the utility accepts multiple commands, enter the commands together with the command separators. However, if the command separator is a semicolon (;), use two semicolons (;;) instead. For example, if the utility is PERUSE and you want help, and you want to display the names of the files in the current subvolume, enter the following command: HELP;;FILES If you do not want the command to go to the utility, you must prefix the command with a slash (/). If you want to enter multiple commands but do not want them to go to the utility, you must prefix the first command with a slash (/) as in the following example: /PROFILE; SHOW TERMDEF=ALL You can concatenate commands that do not go to the utility to a command that goes to the utility. For example, if the utility is FUP and the command string is SECURE $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE, "CCCC"; PROFILE with the two commands separated by a semicolon (;), only the first command goes to the utility. The second command displays the profile of the environment. You can use only NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands that can be issued through the NCL INTCMD verb (refer to NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual), except for the following:!, CLEAR, FC, K, and X Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 7

126 System Support Services The Command Stack You cannot use the PROFILE GUID command to change your Guardian user ID. Even though the profile is changed in the Command Entry facility, you will still be identified by your Guardian user ID before the change when you access external utilities. (Therefore, you must use the PROFILE GUID command from OCS to change your Guardian user ID before you enter Command Entry when you access external utilities.) For instructions on reexecuting previously entered commands, see The Command Stack, next. The Command Stack All the commands you enter while using the Command Entry screen are saved on the command stack. You can display the contents of the command stack, select commands for reexecution, and delete commands from the stack. You use the F6 (PF06) function key to access commands in the command stack: 1. The first time you press the F6 (PF06) function key after executing a command, you retrieve that command. The command appears in the COMMAND field. Press the ENTER key to reexecute the command. 2. To display the contents of the command stack, press the F6 (PF06) function key again. A list of previously entered commands, from most to least recent, is displayed, as shown here: COMMAND STACK Select System Utility Command SYS1 FUP INFO * SYS1 SHOW PARAM SYS1 SHOW OCS SYS1 STATUS SYS1 SHOW NCL SYS1 SHOW TERMDEF=ALL SYS1 PROFILE In this example, FUP INFO * is the most recently executed command; PROFILE is the least recently executed command Tandem Computers Incorporated

127 System Support Services The Capture Buffer 3. To reexecute a command from the command stack: a. Position your cursor to the left of the command and type S. b. Press the ENTER key to return to the Command Entry screen. The selected command appears in the COMMAND field. c. Press the ENTER key to execute the command. If the Utility column is not blank for a command and the command is not prefixed with a slash (/), the command is sent to the utility if selected. 4. To delete a command from the command stack: a. Position your cursor to the left of the command and type D. b. Press the ENTER key to delete the command from the command stack. c. Press the F3 (PF03) or F4 (PF04) function key to return to the Command Entry screen. The Capture Buffer Commands, responses, and (optionally) unsolicited messages are saved in a capture buffer. When the capture buffer is full, the Command Entry facility only puts more messages into it if the WRAP option is ON, in which case the oldest messages are deleted to make room for new messages Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 9

128 System Support Services The Capture Buffer Figure 5-1 illustrates the relationship between the capture buffer and the message display area. Figure 5-1. The Command Entry Capture Buffer Capture Buffer 001 message line 002 message line 003 message line 004 message line 005 message line 006 message line 007 message line 008 message line 009 message line 010 message line nnn message line MAX CAP value COMMAND ENTRY COMMAND : 1 : SYSTEM : 2 ASYNC 3 WRAP 4 CAPTURE 5 LINE 6 UTILITY : 7 SCROLL 8 F4 PRINT 9 MAX CAP 10 COLUMN message display area Legend Command entry field System to which commands are routed Asynchronous/synchronous message display Messages saved when capture buffer is full Current count of messages in capture buffer Position of top message display line in capture buffer External utility to which commands are sent Message display scrolling attribute Print contents of capture buffer Maximum size of capture buffer Position of leftmost message display column (LEFT/RIGHT scroll) Tandem Computers Incorporated

129 System Support Services Examining the Capture Buffer Examining the Capture Buffer You can examine the contents of the capture buffer either by scrolling through it or by searching for particular messages. As described in Table 5-3, you can either: Enter a scroll command to control the amount of scrolling and then press a function key to determine the type of scrolling (forward, backward, left, or right). Enter an F (for find ) command followed by the string you are searching for. Press the ENTER key to start the search and the F5 (PF05) function key to find the next occurrence. In addition, you can clear the capture buffer by using the ERASE or REINIT command. Note If the UTILITY field on the Command Entry screen is not blank, you must prefix the commands in Table 5-3 with a slash (/): for example, /M. Table 5-3. Examining the Command Entry Capture Buffer (Page 1 of 2) Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Amount and Type of Scrolling Scroll (blank) Cursor in COMMAND field (blank) Cursor on a message line F7 F8 PF07 PF08 Scrolls backward one screenful of messages. Scrolls forward one screenful of messages. F7 F8 PF07 PF08 Scrolls backward so that message line on which cursor is positioned is at the bottom of the screen. Scrolls forward so that message line on which cursor is positioned is at the top of the screen. F10 PF10 Shifts display left one screenful of columns. F11 PF11 Shifts display right one screenful of columns. M F7 PF07 Displays screenful of earliest messages. F8 PF08 Displays screenful of most recent messages. F10 PF10 Displays leftmost columns of currently displayed messages. F11 PF11 Displays rightmost columns of currently displayed messages. P F7 PF07 Pages backward one screenful of messages. F8 PF08 Pages forward one screenful of messages. F10 PF10 Pages left one screenful. F11 PF11 Pages right one screenful Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 11

130 System Support Services Examining the Capture Buffer Table 5-3. Examining the Command Entry Capture Buffer (Page 2 of 2) Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Amount and Type of Scrolling Scroll (continued) H F7 PF07 Pages backward one half screenful. F8 PF08 Pages forward one half screenful. F10 PF10 Pages left one half screenful. F11 PF11 Pages right one half screenful. nn F7 PF07 Scrolls backward nn messages. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward nn messages. F10 PF10 Scrolls left nn columns. F11 PF11 Scrolls right nn columns. Search F string ENTER F5 ENTER PF05 Searches for messages containing the specified string. Press F5 (PF05) to search for the next matching message. Clear contents ERASE ENTER ENTER Erases the contents of the capture buffer. REINIT ENTER ENTER Erases the contents of the capture buffer and resets the message display parameters. For example: To display the earliest messages in the capture buffer, enter M in the COMMAND field and press the F7 (PF07) function key. To scroll a half screen to the right in the message display area, enter H in the COMMAND field and press the F11 (PF11) function key Tandem Computers Incorporated

131 System Support Services Examining the Capture Buffer To search for messages containing the string GUID, enter F GUID in the COMMAND field and press the ENTER key. NonStop NET/MASTER MS positions the cursor on the first line containing the specified text, and displays the line and column number in which the text occurs in the top right corner of the screen, as in the following example: COMMAND ENTRY ---- TEXT GUID FOUND AT 30,11 COMMAND : : SYSTEM : SYS1 ASYNC ON WRAP OFF CAPTURE 34 LINE 29 UTILITY : SCROLL OFF F4 PRINT MAX CAP 1000 COLUMN NNM0396 (TRUNC=NO...) MESSAGES ARE NOT TRUNCATED. _ NNM0380 (GUID=100,021) CURRENT GUARDIAN USERID IS 100,021. NNM0387 (PREFEMS=BOTH) EMS EVENTS WILL HAVE PROCESS AND SYSTEM NAME PREFIX. NNM0352 (INDENT=8...) MULTILINE MESSAGES WILL BE INDENTED BY 8 COLUMNS. NNM0391 Profile complete for primary OCS environment NNM0999 *END* ** END OF DELIVERED MESSAGES ** To find the next occurrence of the specified text, press the F5 (PF05) function key. The underscore (_) indicates the cursor position. Note The F command searches in a forward direction only, starting either at the top line of the current display or at the current cursor position. To search for all occurrences of a given string, start your search at the top of the capture buffer by entering M in the COMMAND field and pressing the F7 (PF07) function key before issuing the F command Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 13

132 System Support Services Printing the Capture Buffer Printing the Capture Buffer To print the contents of the capture buffer, press the F4 (PF04) key. An Enter Print Details window overlays the message display area, as illustrated in Figure 5-2. Fill in the appropriate print values and press the ENTER key to print the contents of the capture buffer. Messages appear in the top right corner of the Command Entry display to indicate the status of the print. Figure 5-2. The Command Entry Print Details Screen COMMAND ENTRY COMMAND : : SYSTEM : SYS1 ASYNC ON WRAP OFF CAPTURE 66 LINE 2 UTILITY : SCROLL OFF F4 PRINT MAX CAP 1000 COLUMN SHOW SYSPARMS NNM0601 SYSPARMS VALUE NNM0602 AUTOEXEC ******************************************** NNM0602 CDELAY * * NNM0602 CMDSTACK * ENTER PRINT DETAILS * NNM0602 CNMAPPLN * * NNM0602 CONMSG * SPOOLER NAME ===> 1 * NNM0602 EMSCOLLP * * NNM0602 EMSCOLOU * LOCATION ===> 2 * NNM0602 EMSDISTB * * NNM0602 EMSDISTC * COPIES ===> 3 * NNM0602 EMSDISTF * * NNM0602 EMSDISTP * RECORD LENGTH ===> 4 * NNM0602 EMSDISTP * * NNM0602 EMSDISTP * ENTER to print, F3/F16 to exit * NNM0602 EMSDISTP ******************************************** NNM0602 EMSFLTLIB $DATA8.ZNNMDATA NNM0602 EMSHLITE NONE Legend 1 2 Spooler name Printer location 3 4 Number of copies; default is 1 Record length; default is Note The owner of the print job is the person who started NonStop NET/MASTER MS; you cannot use the PERUSE utility to manage your print job unless you acquire the Guardian user ID of the person who started NonStop NET/MASTER MS Tandem Computers Incorporated

133 System Support Services Emptying the Capture Buffer The following example prints one copy of the user s OCS operator profile on printer $S.#SLOW: COMMAND ENTRY COMMAND : : SYSTEM : SYS1 ASYNC ON WRAP OFF CAPTURE 34 LINE 1 UTILITY : SCROLL OFF F4 PRINT MAX CAP 1000 COLUMN PROFILE NNM0381 USERID: OPER3 TERMINAL-ID: # NNM0382 NCL PROC ******************************************** NNM0383 USERID H * * NNM0384 AUTOHOLD * ENTER PRINT DETAILS * NNM0385 AUTHORIT * * NNM0386 USER SER * SPOOLER NAME ===> $S * NNM0388 EMS MESS * * NNM RECEI * LOCATION ===> #SLOW * NNM0358 Operand * * NNM0359 (CMDKEEP * COPIES ===> 1 * NNM0361 (CMDSTAC * * NNM0362 (DELCHAR * RECORD LENGTH ===> 132 * NNM0364 (HOLD=20 * * NNM0365 (INITCMD * ENTER to print, F3/F16 to exit * NNM0378 (EMS=YES ******************************************** ORM. NNM0375 (ROLL=0...) SCREEN ROLL DELAY TIME IS 0. NNM0366 (MONMSG=YES..) MONITOR CLASS MESSAGES WILL BE DISPLAYED. Emptying the Capture Buffer Within the Command Entry facility, two commands ERASE and REINIT are available for emptying the capture buffer: ERASE Enter the ERASE command in the COMMAND field to empty the capture buffer without resetting the SYSTEM, ASYNC, WRAP, SCROLL, and MAX CAP values. Note You can also use the NonStop NET/MASTER MS command CLEAR or K to empty the Command Entry capture buffer. REINIT Enter the REINIT command in the COMMAND field to empty the capture buffer and reset the SYSTEM, ASYNC, WRAP, SCROLL, and MAX CAP values to their default values Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 15

134 System Support Services The Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings Facility The Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings Facility Entering the Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings Facility The Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility provides a full-screen selection list as an alternative to using the SHOW SYSPARMS and SYSPARMS commands for viewing and updating system-wide settings for your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system. Select option S from the System Support Services Primary Menu screen to display the Display/Update SYSPARMS Operands screen, as shown here: Display/Update SYSPARMS Operands COMMAND ===> SYSPARM STATUS VALUE AUTOEXEC YES CDELAY 15 CMDSTACK 20 CNMAPPLNME $SSCP.#ZNNM CONMSG NO EMSBKGCOLOUR NONE EMSCOLLPNM $0 EMSCOLOUR NONE EMSDISTBCP 0 EMSDISTCOLL $0 EMSDISTFLT FLUSH EMSDISTPCP 1 EMSDISTPFN $SYSTEM.SYSTEM.EMSDIST EMSDISTPNM EMSDISTPRI 145 EMSEVENTTD $SYSTEM.SYSTEM.EVENTTD EMSFLTLIB $DATA4.ZNNMDATA EMSHLITE NONE EMSLINELEN 1000 EMSLINENUM 10 Note You can also enter the Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility by starting the NCL procedure ZHWKPMSN from OCS Tandem Computers Incorporated

135 System Support Services The Display/Update SYSPARMS Function Keys The Display/Update SYSPARMS Operands screen does not display values for the following system parameters: CMDAUTH CMDREPL MAPDEL MAPLOAD PPRELOAD PRELOAD PUNLOAD UNLOAD Issue a SHOW COMMANDS command from the OCS command input line to display the command authority level of commands. Issue a SHOW PRELOAD command from the OCS command input line to display the value of the CMDREPL, PRELOAD, and UNLOAD system parameters. Issue a SHOW MAPS command from the OCS command input line to display the value of the MAPDEL and MAPLOAD system parameters. Issue a SHOW PANELS command from the OCS command input line to display the value of the PPRELOAD and PUNLOAD system parameters. The Display/Update SYSPARMS Function Keys Table 5-4 shows how function keys are defined in the Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility. Table 5-4. Display/Update SYSPARMS Function Key Definitions 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Description F1 PF01 Displays help. F2 PF02 Executes the SPLIT command to open a new window. F3 PF03 Returns to the previous screen. F7 PF07 Scrolls backward. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward. F9 PF09 Executes the SWAP command to open a new window or, if two windows are already open, to reverse their dimensions and enter the other window Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 17

136 System Support Services The Display/Update SYSPARMS Operands Screen The Display/Update SYSPARMS Operands Screen The Display/Update SYSPARMS Operands screen includes: A command line A message line (directly below the command line) A three-column display indicating: The names of the SYSPARMS operands The status of any update or reset operations you perform The current values of the SYSPARMS operands Examining the SYSPARMS Values You can examine the system parameter values either by scrolling through the display or by searching for a particular SYSPARMS operand. Do one of the following: Press the F8 (PF08) and F7 (PF07) function keys to scroll forward and backward through the display, respectively. Enter an L (for locate) command followed by the name of a particular SYSPARMS operand on the command line and press the ENTER key. Table 5-5 describes how to examine the SYSPARMS values. Table 5-5. Examining the SYSPARMS Operands Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Description Scroll (blank) F7 PF07 Scrolls backward one page. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward one page. M F7 PF07 Displays first page of system parameter values. F8 PF08 Displays last page of system parameter values. Locate L operand ENTER ENTER Locates specified SYSPARMS operand Tandem Computers Incorporated

137 System Support Services Updating a SYSPARMS Operand Value For example: To display the last page of the system parameter values, enter M in the command line and press the F8 (PF08) function key. To locate the LOGWRAP operand, enter the following command in the command line and press the ENTER key: L logwrap The LOGWRAP operand and its value appears at the top of the display area, as shown in the following example: Display/Update SYSPARMS Operands COMMAND ===> SYSPARM STATUS VALUE LOGWRAP NO MAXPANEL 10 MODLUSER NONE NCLGBTRC NCLMAXK 0 NCLOBJPATH $DATA4.ZNNMNDO.NCODE NCLOGTRM NO NCLPEND YES NCLPRSHR 20 NCLTRLFF ONE NCLTRMAX 100 NCLUMAX 128 NCLXUSER YES NETNAME SYS1 NMIQLIM 1000 NRDLIM 200 OCSTIME YES PNLOBJPATH $DATA4.ZNNMPDS.PCODE PROCESSCHAR U PWEXPIRE 30 Updating a SYSPARMS Operand Value If the command authority level associated with your user ID is high enough, you can update the values of most system parameters. A few system parameters can be modified only during system startup (before any users are logged on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS). To update the value of a SYSPARMS operand, position your cursor on the field containing the current value, overtype it with the new value, and press the ENTER key. If the update is successful, the STATUS field displays an updated message. The update may not be successful due to the following reasons: If you enter an invalid value, the STATUS field displays an invalid message. A message similar to the following appears in the message line, providing more information about the nature of the invalid value: CDELAY - THE NUMERIC VALUE '400' WAS OUT OF RANGE, THE RANGE IS 0 TO Tandem Computers Incorporated 5 19

138 System Support Services Resetting a SYSPARMS Operand Value To clear the invalid status, you can do one of the following: Enter a valid value. Reset the value (see Resetting a SYSPARMS Operand Value, next in this section). Exit (by pressing the F3/PF03 function key) and then reenter the Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility. The old value is retained. If you try to change the value of a system parameter that can only be set during system initialization, an error message is displayed. An example is: ID - SYSPARMS ID OPERAND NOT VALID AFTER INITIALIZATION COMPLETED and the STATUS field displays the invalid message. To clear the invalid status, you must exit (by pressing the F3/PF03 function key), and then reenter the Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility. If your command authority level is not high enough to change the value of a particular operand, an error message is displayed. For example: CDELAY - INSUFFICIENT COMMAND AUTHORITY LEVEL and the STATUS field displays the invalid message. To clear the invalid status, you must exit (by pressing the F3/PF03 function key), and then reenter the Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility. Note You cannot use the scroll function keys or the L command when you have invalid in any of the STATUS fields. If you attempt to use the keys or the command, the following message appears: Requested function denied... invalid SYSPARMS displayed Resetting a SYSPARMS Operand Value To reset the value of a SYSPARMS operand, enter the R (for reset) command with the name of the operand you wish to reset in the command line and press the ENTER key. R SYSPARMS-operand SYSPARMS-operand is the name of the SYSPARMS operand whose value you want to reset. The value of the operand is reset to its original value, and the STATUS field displays a reset message Tandem Computers Incorporated

139 What Is in This Section 6 Examining the Activity Log This section describes the activity log, where messages about network activity are recorded, and describes the Activity Log Browse facility, with which you can examine this log. In addition, this section covers the following procedures: Entering and exiting the Activity Log Browse facility Understanding activity log records Browsing through the activity log Searching the activity log for specific records Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from within the Activity Log Browse facility Sending messages to the activity log Opening a new activity log file Displaying information about activity log files Browsing through an earlier activity log file Browsing through a remote activity log file See Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, for information on getting help on commands and messages from the Activity Log Browse facility. What Is the Activity Log? The activity log is a log file where event messages and responses to NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands are recorded. It represents a record of activity occurring throughout the network. Depending on how your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system is configured, there may be up to nine physical activity log files available for recording network activity. An activity log file may contain records for several days. Although only one activity log file is open at a time, you may view the contents of earlier activity log files. When the current activity log file is full, or if an I/O error on the log file occurs, the current log file is automatically closed and the next available log is opened. In every NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, an NCL procedure referred to as the LOGPROC procedure (the activity log procedure) can be set up to intercept and process all messages destined for the activity log. Configuring the activity log files and the system LOGPROC procedure is discussed in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 1

140 Examining the Activity Log Entering and Exiting the Activity Log Browse Facility Entering and Exiting the Activity Log Browse Facility The Activity Log Browse facility allows you to view the contents of, and search for particular records in, the activity log. To enter the Activity Log Browse facility, do one of the following: Invoke the NCL procedure ZLOGBRWN. For example: START ZLOGBRWN In OCS, by default, the F7 (PF07) function key is assigned to this function. Select option 3 from the System Support Services Primary Menu screen. You enter the Activity Log Browse facility at the last page of the current day s activity log. 13:50: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==> DISPLAY >> 13:50:33 RANGE >> 13:50:33 TIME TEXT 13:50:33 PROFILE PREFEMS=BOTH 13:50:33 PROFILE PRFTM=YES 13:50:33 PROFILE UNSOL=YES 13:50:33 PROFILE MONMSG=YES 13:50:33 TITLE OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES 13:50:33 NNM1005 START INITCMD PROCESSING COMPLETE. NCLID :50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 NNM0363 NEW TITLE SET ********************************** END-OF-LOG ******************************* To exit from the Activity Log Browse facility, press the F3 (PF03) or F4 (PF04) function key to return to the screen from which you invoked the Activity Log Browse facility (either the OCS or the System Support Services Primary Menu screen). How Activity Log Records Are Displayed Records in the activity log can be displayed in three formats: Short format (one line of message text only) Normal format (time plus one line of message text) Full format (time, terminal, user ID, and message text) By default, when you enter the Activity Log Browse facility, records are displayed in normal format Tandem Computers Incorporated

141 Examining the Activity Log Short Record Format Press the F10 (PF10) function key to rotate between normal format, full format, short format, and back to normal format, and press the F11 (PF11) function key to move in the reverse direction, as illustrated in Figure 6-1. Figure 6-1. Switching Between Activity Log Record Formats F10 F11 Activity Log Normal Format Display F11 F10 Activity Log Short Format Display F11 F10 Activity Log Full Format Display 008 The display range in the top right corner of the activity log screen shows the time of the first and last records displayed in the current window. This is most useful when you are viewing records in the short format mode. Short Record Format Short format displays one line of text for each message. The text is truncated if it exceeds one line. 14:15: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==> DISPLAY >> 13:38:06 RANGE >> 13:38:06 TEXT PROFILE CMDKEEP=NO PROFILE TRUNC=NO PROFILE INDENT=8 PROFILE PREFEMS=BOTH PROFILE PRFTM=YES PROFILE UNSOL=YES PROFILE MONMSG=YES TITLE OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES NNM1005 START INITCMD PROCESSING COMPLETE. NCLID NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 3

142 Examining the Activity Log Normal Record Format Normal Record Format Normal format displays the time and one line of message text. Message text is truncated if it exceeds one line. This is the default record format. 14:16: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==> DISPLAY >> 13:38:06 RANGE >> 13:38:06 TIME TEXT 13:38:06 PROFILE TRUNC=NO 13:38:06 PROFILE INDENT=8 13:38:06 PROFILE PREFEMS=BOTH 13:38:06 PROFILE PRFTM=YES 13:38:06 PROFILE UNSOL=YES 13:38:06 PROFILE MONMSG=YES 13:38:06 TITLE OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES 13:38:06 NNM1005 START INITCMD PROCESSING COMPLETE. NCLID :38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED Full Record Format Full format displays the time, logical terminal name, user ID (or NCL ID), and text of the message. Message text may continue over more than one line. 14:14: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==> DISPLAY >> 13:38:06 RANGE >> 13:38:06 TIME TERM USER TEXT 13:38:06 # NMTTH PROFILE CMDKEEP=NO 13:38:06 # NMTTH PROFILE TRUNC=NO 13:38:06 # NMTTH PROFILE INDENT=8 13:38:06 # NMTTH PROFILE PREFEMS=BOTH 13:38:06 # NMTTH PROFILE PRFTM=YES 13:38:06 # NMTTH PROFILE UNSOL=YES 13:38:06 # NMTTH PROFILE MONMSG=YES 13:38:06 # NMTTH TITLE OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM1005 START INITCMD PROCESSING COMPLETE. NCLID :38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:38:06 # NMTTH NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED Tandem Computers Incorporated

143 Examining the Activity Log Examining the Activity Log Refreshing the Record Display The Activity Log Browse Facility Function Keys Messages are logged into the activity log as they are generated. To refresh the display to include records that were added while you were viewing the activity log, press the ENTER key. You may have to scroll to the end of the log file to see the added records. Table 6-1 describes how function keys are defined in the Log Browse facility. Table 6-1. Activity Log Browse Function Key Definitions 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Definition F1 PF01 Displays help text for the command, message, or Activity Log Browse facility in general, depending on where the cursor is positioned. F2 PF02 Executes the SPLIT command to open a new window. F3 PF03 Exits from the Activity Log Browse facility to return to the screen from which Activity Log Browse was invoked (OCS or System Support Services Primary Menu). F4 PF04 Same as F3 (PF03) function key. F5 PF05 Searches for next occurrence of a record matching a FIND command value or continues a paused search. F7 PF07 Scrolls back. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward. F9 PF09 Executes the SWAP command to open a new window or, if two windows are already open, to reverse their dimensions and enter the other window. F10 PF10 Switches record format in forward direction from normal to full to short and back to normal. F11 PF11 Switches record format in backward direction from normal to short to full and back to normal. Examining the Activity Log To examine activity log records, enter a command in the command line to control the amount of scrolling or type of search, and then press a function key to determine the direction of the scrolling or search. Table 6-2 describes the Activity Log Browse commands and how they are used with function keys to examine the activity log. Note A page is the amount of information currently visible in the window Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 5

144 Examining the Activity Log Examining the Activity Log Table 6-2. Examining the Activity Log (Page 1 of 3) Scrolling Through the Activity Log Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Amount and Type of Scrolling (blank) Cursor in command line (blank) Cursor on a message line F7 PF07 Scrolls backward one page. If the current log position is at TOP-OF-LOG, scrolls backward to the end of the previous day s log (if data exists). F8 PF08 Scrolls forward one page. If the current log position is at END-OF-LOG, scrolls forward to top of the next day s log (if data exists). F7 PF07 Scrolls backward so that message line on which the cursor is positioned is at the bottom of the screen. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward so that message line on which the cursor is positioned is at the top of the screen. nn F7 PF07 Scrolls backward nn records. This command does not cross date boundaries. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward nn records. M[AX] F7 PF07 Scrolls to the top of the currently displayed day s log records. This command does not cross date boundaries. F8 PF08 Scrolls to the end of the currently displayed day s log records. Searching Activity Log Records by Date Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Amount and Type of Scrolling or Search D[ATE] F7 PF07 Scrolls to the end of the previous day s log records. F8 PF08 Scrolls to the top of the next day s log records. D[ATE] dd-mmm-yy ENTER ENTER Locates the first record in the log for dd-mmm-yy. D[ATE] +nn ENTER ENTER Locates the first record in the log for the currently-browsed date plus nn days. D[ATE] -nn ENTER ENTER Locates the first record in the log for the currently-browsed date less nn days Tandem Computers Incorporated

145 Examining the Activity Log Examining the Activity Log Table 6-2. Examining the Activity Log (Page 2 of 3) Searching Activity Log Records by Time Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Type of Search T[IME] hh ENTER ENTER Locates the first record for the hour specified for the currently displayed date. T[IME] hh:mm ENTER ENTER Locates the first record for the hour and minute specified for the currently displayed date. T[IME] hh:mm:ss ENTER ENTER Locates the first record for the hour, minute, and second specified for the currently displayed date. Searching the Activity Log by String or Field Value For all FIND command searches, press F5 (PF05) to continue a paused search or to find the next record that matches the search criterion. Use the PREV option to change the direction of the search. Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Type of Search F[IND] C string [PREV] ENTER F5 ENTER PF05 Locates a record containing the specified character string, starting with the current screen display. F[IND] E emphasis [PREV] ENTER F5 ENTER PF05 Locates a record for the given SPI emphasis token. Press F5 (PF05) to continue. F[IND] M msg-num [PREV] ENTER F5 ENTER PF05 Locates a record for the given SPI message number token. Press F5 (PF05) to continue. F[IND] N term-name [PREV] F[IND] T term-name [PREV] ENTER F5 ENTER PF05 Locates a record for the given terminal name. Press F5 (PF05) to continue. F[IND] S domainid [PREV] ENTER F5 ENTER PF05 Locates a record for the given NonStop NET/MASTER MS domain ID. Press F5 (PF05) to continue. F[IND] U user-id [PREV] ENTER F5 ENTER PF05 Locates a record for the given user ID. Press F5 (PF05) to continue Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 7

146 Examining the Activity Log Examining the Activity Log Table 6-2. Examining the Activity Log (Page 3 of 3) Marking and Locating a Position in the Activity Log Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Type of Search.label ENTER ENTER Marks a position in the activity log to later locate with the LOCATE command. L[OCATE] label ENTER ENTER Locates the log record associated with the specified label. Changing the Search Scope Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Amount of Scrolling SCANMAX nn ENTER ENTER Specifies the number of records scanned at one time before a FIND search prompts you for permission to continue. Browsing Through Another Activity Log File Command 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Type of Search S[WAP] LOGFILEn ENTER ENTER Specifies an earlier activity log file to browse. S[WAP] udb-id ENTER ENTER Specifies an archived or remote activity log file to browse through. You have previously used the UDBCTL OPEN command to open the file with an identifier udb-id Tandem Computers Incorporated

147 Examining the Activity Log Searching Activity Log Records by Date Searching Activity Log Records by Date Issue the DATE command to search through the activity log by date. The syntax for the DATE command is as follows: D[ATE] [ dd-mmm-yy +nn -nn ] dd-mmm-yy displays the top of the log records for the specified date if the records are found in the current activity log. +nn displays the top of the log for the current date plus nn days. -nn displays the top of the log for the current date minus nn days. Considerations To display the end of the log for the previous day, enter the DATE command with no operands and press the F7 (PF07) function key. To display the top of the log for the next day, enter the DATE command with no operands and press the F8 (PF08) function key. When supplying an operand with the DATE command, press the ENTER key to execute the command. If the log records for the date you specified are not in the current activity log, use the Log Browse command SWAP to browse another activity log file. Example To display the first page of activity log entries for 10 November 1994, enter the following command in the command line and press the ENTER key: D 10-NOV Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 9

148 Examining the Activity Log Searching Activity Log Records by Time The following is an example of the first page of an activity log for 10 November 1994: 14:21: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==> DISPLAY >> 12:33:40 RANGE >> 12:33:49 TIME TEXT ********************************* TOP-OF-LOG ******************************** 12:33:40 START SETPROF 12:33:41 START SETPROF 12:33:43 START SETPROF 12:33:45 prof roll=0 12:33:45 prof ncltest=yes 12:33:45 NNM1005 START SETPROF PROCESSING COMPLETE. NCLID :33:45 NNM0997 INVALID OR MISSING OPERAND 12:33:45 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 12:33:45 prof roll=0 12:33:45 prof ncltest=yes 12:33:45 NNM0222 AUTOHOLD COMMAND NEEDS OCS ENVIRONMENT 12:33:45 NNM0222 AUTOHOLD COMMAND NEEDS OCS ENVIRONMENT 12:33:45 NNM1005 START SETPROF PROCESSING COMPLETE. NCLID :33:45 NNM0997 INVALID OR MISSING OPERAND 12:33:45 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 12:33:46 Executing NCL INIT during system initialisation... 12:33:47 STATUS 12:33:49 prof roll=0 12:33:49 prof ncltest=yes Searching Activity Log Records by Time Issue the TIME command to search through the activity log by time. The syntax for the TIME command is as follows: T[IME] { hh hh:mm hh:mm:ss } hh hh:mm locates the first record for the hour specified, where hh is in the range 0 through 23. locates the first record for the hour and minute specified, where hh is in the range 0 through 23 and mm is in the range 0 through 59. hh:mm:ss locates the first record for the hour, minute, and second specified, where hh is in the range 0 through 23, mm is in the range 0 through 59, and ss is in the range 0 through Tandem Computers Incorporated

149 Examining the Activity Log Searching the Activity Log by String or Field Value Example To display the first page of activity log entries beginning at 13:35 pm for the current date, enter the following command in the command line and press the ENTER key: T 13:35 The resulting display starts with one record before the requested time, as illustrated in the following example: 14:29: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==> DISPLAY >> 13:05:17 RANGE >> 13:38:06 TIME TEXT 13:05:17 NNM0652 LOCAL USER NMTJN LOGGED ON AT # MYNAME 13:36:55 NNM0652 LOCAL USER NMTTH LOGGED ON AT # Tina Harrison 13:38:05 START INITCMD 13:38:05 equate zzz show users 13:38:06 NNM0235 TEXT SET FOR EQUATE STRING ZZZ 13:38:06 PROFILE RDMIN=99 13:38:06 PROFILE CMDSTACK=99 13:38:06 PROFILE EMS=YES 13:38:06 PROFILE ROLL=0 13:38:06 PROFILE NCLTEST=YES 13:38:06 PROFILE CMDKEEP=NO 13:38:06 PROFILE TRUNC=NO 13:38:06 PROFILE INDENT=8 13:38:06 PROFILE PREFEMS=BOTH 13:38:06 PROFILE PRFTM=YES 13:38:06 PROFILE UNSOL=YES 13:38:06 PROFILE MONMSG=YES 13:38:06 TITLE OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES 13:38:06 NNM1005 START INITCMD PROCESSING COMPLETE. NCLID :38:06 NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED Searching the Activity Log by String or Field Value Issue the FIND command to search for records that contain a specified string in the message text area or a specified value in a key field. The syntax for the FIND command is as follows: F[IND] { C string E emphasis M msg-num N T term-name S domainid U user-id } [PREV] C string locates records that contain a matching character string in the message text. E emphasis locates records that contain a matching ZEMS_TKN_EMPHASIS token (0 or 1) Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 11

150 Examining the Activity Log Searching the Activity Log by String or Field Value M msg-num locates records that contain a matching ZEMS_TKN_EVENTNUMBER token (may be numeric or symbolic). N T term-name locates records that contain a matching terminal name in the TERM field. S domainid locates records that contain a matching NonStop NET/MASTER MS domain ID. The matching domain ID is not displayed. U user-id locates records that contain a matching user ID in the USER field. Considerations The search starts at the current cursor position and stops when either: A matching record is found. For 3270 terminals, if a match is found in the currently displayed screen, the cursor is positioned in the first character of the field. For 6530 terminals, if a match is found in the currently displayed screen, the cursor is positioned at the start of the matching line. In both cases, if a match is found in a screen other than the currently displayed screen, the screen is reformatted with the record containing the match at the top of the screen. Five hundred records (the default) are scanned, and no matching record has been found. If a match is not found after 500 records are scanned, the search pauses and a message is displayed providing the total number of records read. The times displayed in the top right corner of the screen are updated to reflect the search scope. To increase or decrease the number of records to be scanned before the search pauses for permission to continue, issue a SCANMAX command. See Changing the Search Scope, later in this section, for more information. To find the next occurrence of a matching record, or to continue a search after it has been paused, press the F5 (PF05) function key. Use the PREV option to change the direction of the search from forward to backward Tandem Computers Incorporated

151 Examining the Activity Log Searching the Activity Log by String or Field Value Examples To find records containing the string OPER3, enter the following command in the command line and press the ENTER key: F C OPER3 In this example, the search is paused twice (and continued with the F5 function key) with the following messages before the search is successful: NNM LINES SEARCHED - STRING 'OPER3' NOT FOUND NNM LINES SEARCHED - STRING 'OPER3' NOT FOUND 14:29: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==> DISPLAY >> 13:05:17 NNM1537 STRING 'OPER3' FOUND RANGE >> 13:38:06 TEXT NNM0765 PASSWORD CHANGED FOR OPER3 NNM0672 YOUR SESSION -SYSMAN- ENDED ON TERMINAL # NNM0654 LOCAL USER SYSMAN LOGGED OFF FROM # NNM0652 LOCAL USER OPER3 LOGGED ON AT # Christine Lang NNM0765 PASSWORD CHANGED FOR OPER3 START INITCMD PROFILE RDMIN=99 PROFILE CMDSTACK=99 PROFILE EMS=YES PROFILE ROLL=0 PROFILE NCLTEST=YES PROFILE CMDKEEP=NO PROFILE TRUNC=NO PROFILE INDENT=8 PROFILE PREFEMS=BOTH PROFILE PRFTM=YES PROFILE UNSOL=YES PROFILE MONMSG=YES TITLE OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 13

152 Examining the Activity Log Marking and Locating a Position in the Activity Log To find the records generated from the terminal # , enter the following command in the command line and press the ENTER key: F T # :36: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==> DISPLAY >> 13:50:32 NNM1537 TERM '# ' FOUND RANGE >> 13:50:33 TIME TERM USER TEXT 13:50:32 # NMTJN START INITCMD 13:50:33 # NMTJN equate zzz show users 13:50:33 # NMTJN NNM0235 TEXT SET FOR EQUATE STRING ZZZ 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE RDMIN=99 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE CMDSTACK=99 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE EMS=YES 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE ROLL=0 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE NCLTEST=YES 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE CMDKEEP=NO 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE TRUNC=NO 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE INDENT=8 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE PREFEMS=BOTH 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE PRFTM=YES 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE UNSOL=YES 13:50:33 # NMTJN PROFILE MONMSG=YES 13:50:33 # NMTJN TITLE OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES 13:50:33 # NMTJN NNM1005 START INITCMD PROCESSING COMPLETE. NCLID :50:33 # NMTJN NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED 13:50:33 # NMTJN NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED Marking and Locating a Position in the Activity Log You can mark a position in the activity log and then use the LOCATE command to return directly to that position. Marking a Position To mark a position, follow these steps: 1. Enter a period (.) followed by a one to eight-character label in the command line:.label 2. Perform one of the following steps: Press the ENTER key to associate the first record displayed on the screen with the specified label. Position the cursor to the left of the line you wish to be associated with the label and then press the ENTER key. Any number of labels may be defined, and a previously used label may be redefined to a new position. Note The labels FSTART and FEND have special meanings. See Changing the Search Scope, later in this section, for more information Tandem Computers Incorporated

153 Examining the Activity Log Locating a Position Locating a Position To return to a previously marked position in the activity log, issue a LOCATE command: L[OCATE] label where label is the previously marked position you wish to return to. The LOCATE command searches backward and forward across date boundaries for the specified label. Example In this example, the operator marks a message beginning with TAC with the label.tac. The operator does so by entering the label in the command line and positioning the cursor to the left of the logged TAC message, as shown in the following screen: 14:29: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==>.TAC DISPLAY >> 00:00:34 RANGE >> 06:30:57 TIME TEXT 00:00:34 SX10042 PU : \SYS1.$SNA02.#EM3270 NOT READY, ERROR # 66 00:00:35 SX10023 LDEV 0029 LINE NOT READY, ERROR #066 00:00:35 EMS0150 LDEV 0064 CU %232 CSS ACTIVATE PATH, CIU A % % _ 06:27:45 TAC0001 TACL TERMINAL I/O ERROR 162, $ATP2.#TERM1 06:30:47 EMS0150 LDEV 0064 CU %230 CSS ACTIVATE PATH, CIU A % % :30:49 SX10022 LDEV 0029 LINE READY 06:30:52 SX10041 PU : \SYS1.$SNA02.#SNAVIEW CONTACTED 06:30:55 SX10041 PU : \SYS1.$SNA02.#EM3270 CONTACTED 06:30:55 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM01, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM02, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM03, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM04, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM05, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM06, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM07, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM08, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM09, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM10, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM11, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM12, ACTIVE,STATUS The underscore (_) shows the cursor position Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 15

154 Examining the Activity Log Changing the Search Scope The following screen is displayed when the ENTER key is pressed: 14:29: Log LOGFILE1 (\SYS1.$DATA4.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1) for 10-NOV COMMAND ==> DISPLAY >> 06:27:45 NNM1541 LABEL 'TAC' DEFINED RANGE >> 06:30:57 TIME TEXT 06:27:45 TAC0001 TACL TERMINAL I/O ERROR 162, $ATP2.#TERM1 06:30:47 EMS0150 LDEV 0064 CU %230 CSS ACTIVATE PATH, CIU A % % :30:49 SX10022 LDEV 0029 LINE READY 06:30:52 SX10041 PU : \SYS1.$SNA02.#SNAVIEW CONTACTED 06:30:55 SX10041 PU : \SYS1.$SNA02.#EM3270 CONTACTED 06:30:55 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM01, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM02, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM03, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM04, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM05, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM06, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM07, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:56 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM08, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM09, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM10, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM11, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM12, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM13, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM14, ACTIVE,STATUS :30:57 SX10061 LDEV 0029 LU - #TERM15, ACTIVE,STATUS The following command locates the record identified with the label TAC: L TAC Changing the Search Scope You can change the search scope of the FIND command in two ways: By modifying the number of records to be searched at one time By limiting the search to a specific area of the activity log Modifying the Number of Records to Be Searched By default, when you start a search in the Activity Log Browse facility, the search pauses if no match is found after 500 records have been scanned. The SCANMAX command allows you to specify a larger or smaller number of records (between 1 and 5000) to be scanned before your search pauses: SCANMAX nn where nn is a number between 1 and For example, the following command causes each search to scan through 1000 messages before pausing: SCANMAX Tandem Computers Incorporated

155 Examining the Activity Log Browsing Through Another Activity Log File Defining the Region to Be Searched You can limit the search to a specific area of the activity log by assigning beginning and ending labels, FSTART and FEND, to define the region you wish to be searched. This region must be within a date boundary. By default, the top of the displayed day s activity log is assigned the label FSTART, and the end of the displayed day s activity log is assigned the label FEND. When you begin a search, the search starts at the record at the top of the currently displayed screen or at the record at which the cursor is positioned. The implicit FSTART label is redefined to this position if it is earlier in the log than the current FSTART label. Normally, the current FSTART label marks the top of the day s log, and redefinition cannot occur. However, if you have previously used the FSTART command to reposition the FSTART label to somewhere within the day s log, then redefinition may occur. The search continues forward or backward across date boundaries, pausing every nn records according to the SCANMAX value, until the end or the top of the activity log is reached. As the search crosses a date boundary, the FSTART and the FEND labels are repositioned to the new day s log. If the end of the activity log is reached, press the F5 (PF05) function key to resume the search at the FSTART position: that is, at the start of the last day s log. If PREV is specified in the FIND command and the top of the activity log is reached, the search does not wrap around again. You can explicitly assign FSTART and FEND labels to any records in a day s log to define new upper and lower boundaries for the search within the day. When you assign your own FSTART and FEND labels, a forward search continues until the FEND position is reached. You can press the F5 (PF05) function key to resume the search at the FSTART position. A backward search continues searching to the top of the activity log. The positions of these labels are reset as the search crosses a date boundary. Browsing Through Another Activity Log File By default, when you enter the Activity Log Browse facility, the contents of the current IN USE activity log file are displayed. Within the Activity Log Browse facility, you can issue a SWAP command to select another activity log file to be browsed. The syntax for the SWAP command is as follows: S[WAP] { LOGFILEn udb-id } where n is the number of an earlier activity log you wish to browse and udb-id is the identifier of an archived or remote activity log file that you have opened using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS UDBCTL OPEN command Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 17

156 Examining the Activity Log Browsing Through an Earlier Activity Log File in the Current Log Set Browsing Through an Earlier Activity Log File in the Current Log Set To browse through an earlier activity log file in the current log set, use the SWAP LOGFILEn command. For example, if the current activity log file is LOG2, you could enter the following command in the Activity Log Browse command line to browse through LOG1: SWAP LOGFILE1 A message similar to the following would appear in the line directly below the command line: NNM1517 LOG BROWSE OF FILE \SYS1.$DATA.ZNNMDATA.ZLGFILE1 You can issue NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands while you are browsing through an earlier log file, but the output from those commands is logged to the current log file. Browsing Through an Archived Activity Log File If you have old log files that are not part of the current log set, you can still use the Activity Log Browse facility to browse them. Issue the NonStop NET/MASTER MS UDBCTL OPEN command to open the file for access by NonStop NET/MASTER MS: UDBCTL OPEN=file-spec ID=udb-id INPUT The following is an example: UDBCTL OPEN=$DATA8.ZNNMDATA.PRODLOG2 ID=LOGPROD2 INPUT Then, use the following command to browse through the log: SWAP LOGPROD2 Your command authority must be high enough to issue a UDBCTL command (the default is 3). Note You can use the NonStop NET/MASTER MS SHOW UDB command to display information about the database files that NonStop NET/MASTER MS uses, including the log files. Browsing Through a Remote Activity Log File If another NonStop NET/MASTER MS system is in the same Tandem system, or is linked to your Tandem system through an Expand or FOX line, you can use the Activity Log Browse facility to browse the NonStop NET/MASTER MS activity log files used by the other NonStop NET/MASTER MS system. Issue the following NonStop NET/MASTER MS UDBCTL OPEN command to open the file for access by your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system: UDBCTL OPEN=file-spec ID=udb-id INPUT The following is an example: UDBCTL OPEN=\SYS1.$DATA8.ZNNMDATA.PRODLOG2 ID=LOGPROD2 INPUT Tandem Computers Incorporated

157 Examining the Activity Log Opening a New Activity Log File Then, use the following command to browse through the log: SWAP LOGPROD2 Your command authority must be high enough to issue a UDBCTL command (the default is 3). Note Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From the Activity Log Browse Facility Sending Messages to the Activity Log You can sign on to the remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system and use the ROUTE linkname SHOW UDB command to display information about the database files that the remote system uses, including the log files. For further information on the ROUTE command, refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual. To issue a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command from within the Activity Log Browse facility, type the command, preceded by a slash (/), in the command line and press the ENTER key. For example: /SHOW USERS The results of the command are appended to the bottom of the current day s log. You can log messages to the activity log from OCS, from the Command Entry facility, or from the Activity Log Browse facility, by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS LOG command. Messages written to the activity log in this manner are prefixed by ===> to assist in detection during log browsing and include the time, terminal name, and user ID of the person entering the command. In the following example, the command issued from OCS LOG TEST SEND A MESSAGE TO THE ACTIVITY LOG results in the following activity log entry (example is in full format): 10:53:27 # OPER3 NNM1500 ===> LOG ENTRY: TEST SEND A MESSAGE TO THE ACTIVITY LOG The maximum message length is determined by the length of the command line from which you enter the LOG command. In an NCL procedure, a total of 2031 characters may be written in one LOG message. Opening a New Activity Log File Depending on the PARAM and SYSPARMS values with which your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system has been configured, there may be up to nine physical activity log files available for recording network activity. The activity log files are identified as LOG1 through LOG9. The size of these log files is defined by your system manager. When the current activity log file is full, or if an I/O error on the log file occurs, the current log file is automatically closed and the next available log, in numerical order, is opened. When the last available log file becomes full or experiences an I/O error, either all logging ceases (if SYSPARMS LOGWRAP=NO) or logging commences with Tandem Computers Incorporated 6 19

158 Examining the Activity Log Displaying Information About Activity Log Files the first log on the log file list again (if SYSPARMS LOGWRAP=YES). Previously logged messages are purged from the log that is being reused. Note The PARAM and SYSPARMS commands for configuring the physical activity log files and controlling the wrapping of logs are discussed in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide. In the event that SYSPARMS LOGWRAP=NO, and there are no available log files, a warning message informs all monitor-class operators that logging has ceased and the system is continuing without logging. Output from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS STATUS command also includes a warning message if logging has been halted. All log messages continue to be passed to the LOGPROC procedure for analysis even if no log output is possible. You can explicitly stop logging to the current activity log file and open another available log file with the NonStop NET/MASTER MS LOGSWAP command. This releases the current log file if you want to make it available for printing, for example. The syntax for the LOGSWAP command is as follows: LOGSWAP [ n ] where n is the number of the log file to open as the next current activity log file. For example, to stop logging to the current activity log and open log file number 5, enter: LOGSWAP 5 If you are a monitor-class operator, you are advised when a swap takes place. Note Displaying Information About Activity Log Files Log files should be carefully monitored to ensure that historical data is not overwritten before the file has been archived. The log files may be required at a later stage for audit or other control purposes. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS SHOW LOGS command displays the start and stop time for each defined log file, the status of each log file, and either: The reason for swapping, if a log file has been swapped automatically, or The user ID of the operator entering the LOGSWAP command, if a log file has been swapped explicitly. For example, the following SHOW LOGS output indicates that LOG1 was swapped by SYSMAN, and events are currently being logged to LOG2: SHOW LOGS NNM1505 NAME STATUS START DATE TIME STOP DATE TIME SWPD BY NNM1506 LOG1 SWAPPED 1994/11/04 15:56: /11/05 09:33: SYSMAN NNM1506 LOG2 IN USE 1994/11/05 09:35: NNM1506 LOG3 AVAIL Tandem Computers Incorporated

159 What Is in This Section 7 Accessing External Utilities and Applications In addition to the commands that enable you to control and gather information about your NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) operations, NonStop NET/MASTER MS provides two important commands OPSYS and PROGRUN with which you can do the following: Issue Distributed Systems Network Management (DSNM) commands to monitor and control network objects in subsystems supported by DSNM Run Guardian utilities, TACL routines, and third-party utilities Run programs external to NonStop NET/MASTER MS that operate in block-mode and conversational-mode (line-at-a-time) Note You can issue the NonStop NET/MASTER MS OPSYS and PROGRUN commands by using any of the methods already discussed in earlier sections of this manual. However, if you issue the PROGRUN command from an NCL procedure, the NCL procedure continues to execute while the program started by the PROGRUN command takes over the terminal. The Console Extras facility provides a user interface that facilitates your use of the PROGRUN command. This section describes: Tandem DSNM services and the scope of the DSNM command set How to issue DSNM commands from within NonStop NET/MASTER MS, by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS OPSYS command How to run conversational Guardian utilities, TACL routines, and third-party utilities, by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS OPSYS command How to run block-mode and conversational programs external to NonStop NET/MASTER MS, by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS PROGRUN command How to access the NetStatus network monitoring product, by using the NETSTAT NCL procedure How to send an event message to DSM/Problem Manager (DSM/PM) using the DSM/PM interface key How to use the Console Extras facility Note The term external in this discussion refers to Guardian utilities, application programs, and TACL macros that exist independently of NonStop NET/MASTER MS Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 1

160 Accessing External Utilities and Applications What Is in This Section Figure 7-1 illustrates how the NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands OPSYS and PROGRUN, and the NCL procedure NETSTAT, provide an interface between NonStop NET/MASTER MS and other Tandem network management facilities. Figure 7-1. The Interface Between NonStop NET/MASTER MS and Other Tandem Network Management Facilities PROGRUN NonStop NET/MASTER MS NETSTAT Conversational Utilities Block-Mode Applications NetStatus DSNM OPSYS CIP Conversational Utilities Command Server DSNM-Supported Subsystems SNAX/CDF AM3270 SNAX/XF Expand Pathway TR3271 X25AM Tandem Computers Incorporated

161 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Overview of DSNM Overview of DSNM DSNM is a set of processes, databases, and log files that perform transport, subsystem interface, and status-monitoring services for network management applications. DSNM: Maintains a real-time database of information about subsystem objects that are defined to nodes in the network. Processes a set of commands, the DSNM subsystem command set, which enables you to: Control various subsystems in a network by removing resources from service and restoring them later (ABORT, STOP, and START). Display status information about network objects (AGGREGATE, INQUIRE, and STATUS). Gather information about how network objects are configured (INFO). Display operational statistics about network objects (STATISTICS). Define how DSNM monitors subsystem objects (UPDATE). Translates command responses from diverse subsystems into standard DSNM responses. Interprets subsystem events and forwards object state-change information to requesting applications. Note In the context of Tandem systems, a subsystem is a process or set of processes that manages a cohesive set of objects. Objects are items subject to independent reference and control by a subsystem, such as Pathway applications and terminals handled by Pathway, communication lines controlled by SNAX, or jobs managed by a spooler process. Objects relate conceptually to the subsystems that control them and are often referred to as subsystem objects. NonStop NET/MASTER MS is a network management application that utilizes DSNM. NetStatus, which is optionally accessible through NonStop NET/MASTER MS, is another Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 3

162 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Issuing DSNM Commands With OPSYS Issuing DSNM Commands With OPSYS The NonStop NET/MASTER MS OPSYS command is your interface to the DSNM command set. The DSNM subsystem commands you can issue with OPSYS are listed in Table 7-1. Table 7-1. The DSNM Subsystem Commands Available With OPSYS DSNM Subsystem Command ABORT AGGREGATE INFO INQUIRE ENQUIRE START STATISTICS STATUS STOP UPDATE Function Changes the state of the specified object(s) to DOWN without waiting for outstanding operations to complete. Displays the aggregate status of all the objects in the subsystem or under the specified manager process. Displays configuration information for each object. Displays the current state of specified objects. Changes the state of the specified object(s) to UP. Displays operational statistics for each object. Displays the most recent status information for the selected object(s) known to the subsystem manager process. Changes the status of the specified object(s) to DOWN, once outstanding operations have completed. Specifies how objects are to be monitored. DSNM Command Format The format of the OPSYS command, when used to issue DSNM subsystem commands, is as follows: OPSYS dsnm-subsystem-command objectspec [, modifier [, modifier ]...] dsnm-subsystem-command is one of: ABORT AGGREGATE INFO INQUIRE ENQUIRE START STATISTICS STATUS STOP UPDATE objectspec in the following form: [\node] [subsys] [type] name(s) [UNDER [\node.]manager][hierarchy-value] modifier as described in the User s Guide to DSNM Commands. Refer to the User s Guide to DSNM Commands for a complete description of DSNM subsystem command syntax and the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for a complete description of the OPSYS command Tandem Computers Incorporated

163 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Getting Help for DSNM Subsystem Commands You can issue a ROUTE link-name OPSYS command to a NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, directing a DSNM command to it, from a SOLVE management services or NetView system running on an IBM platform. You can issue a ROUTE link-name OPSYS command to send a DSNM command to a remote Tandem system running NonStop NET/MASTER MS or to send a console command to a remote IBM system running the SOLVE management services. See Section 8, Communicating With Remote Systems, for more information. Each DSNM subsystem command has a command authority level associated with it. You may not have access to all the DSNM subsystem commands. If your authority level is not high enough for you to do your job, see your system manager. Note DSNM must be operational in order for OPSYS commands to work. If you get an error message when you try to issue an OPSYS command, enter the NonStop NET/MASTER MS STATUS command to find out the status of DSNM. Examples The following example assumes that a group named ALL-SNAX has been set up with the Distributed Name Service (DNS). To request the aggregate status of all the SNAX objects in the ALL-SNAX group, enter the following command: OPSYS AGGREGATE ALL-SNAX To start all Pathway terminals under the manager process $PMOR, enter the following command: OPSYS START TERM * UNDER $PMOR The next example assumes that a group named ORL-SNAX has been set up with the Distributed Name Service (DNS). To stop the PUs and LUs that are subordinate to the lines in the group ORL-SNAX without stopping the lines themselves, enter: OPSYS STOP ORL-SNAX, SUBONLY Getting Help for DSNM Subsystem Commands To display help for any of the DSNM subsystem commands, enter OPSYS dsnm-subsystem-command in the command input line and press the F1 (PF01) function key. For example, type OPSYS statistics in the command input line and press F1 to display help for the DSNM subsystem command STATISTICS. To display help on how to specify objects in a DSNM command, enter the following command in the command input line and press the F1 (PF01) function key: DSNMOBJ To display help on DSNM command modifiers, enter the following command in the command input line and press the F1 (PF01) function key: DSNMMODS Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 5

164 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Running Conversational Guardian Utilities Note Do not prefix DSNMOBJ and DSNMMODS with the OPSYS command, because they are not DSNM commands; they are entries in the help text database. Running Conversational Guardian Utilities The NonStop NET/MASTER MS OPSYS command is your interface, through DSNM, to Guardian conversational utilities, and to TACL commands, macros, and routines (all of which are referred to as utilities in the following discussion). Note You cannot issue commands to block-mode applications by using the OPSYS command. You must run block-mode applications and access them directly. To run block-mode applications, use the NonStop NET/MASTER MS command PROGRUN. If you have access to the Console Extras facility and the application is listed on your Console Extras utility list, you can also run the application from there. To run NETSTATUS, use the NETSTAT command. The DSNM Utility Access Command Set The DSNM utility access commands you can issue through OPSYS are listed in Table 7-2. Table 7-2. The DSNM Utility Access Commands Available With OPSYS DSNM Utility Access Command SEND ANSWER EOF BREAK KILL CLEANUP Function Establishes a utility session (if currently nonexistent) and sends text to an established session. Responds to a confirmation prompt generated by a utility. Sends an end-of-file character to an existing session; it has the same effect as pressing the CTRL and Y keys (externally to NonStop NET/MASTER MS). Sends a break message to an existing session; it has the same effect as pressing the BREAK key (externally to NonStop NET/MASTER MS). Terminates a utility session immediately. Terminates all your utility sessions Tandem Computers Incorporated

165 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Utility Access Security The format of the OPSYS command, when used to run Guardian conversational utilities, is as follows: [ OPSYS ] dsnm-utility-command [ session[ =utility ] [ text ] ] dsnm-utility-command is one of: ANSWER BREAK CLEANUP [ STOP DOWN ] EOF KILL [ SEND ] session is the name by which the utility session is identified. utility text is the name of a Guardian utility or TACL macro defined through the NonStop NET/MASTER MS User ID Management Services (UMS) facility. Use only when a session is being created and if you want to assign a session name that is different from the utility name. is the command or parameters to be sent to the session. Refer to the User s Guide to DSNM Commands for a complete description of DSNM utility access command syntax and the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for a complete description of the OPSYS command. When you issue an OPSYS command (either explicitly or implicitly; OPSYS is sometimes optional as explained under Starting a Session With a Utility, later in this section) to communicate with a Guardian utility, NonStop NET/MASTER MS receives the results of interaction with the utility, and sends the results either to your terminal or to the NCL process from which the utility session was established. Getting Help for DSNM Utility Access Commands Utility Access Security To display help for any of the DSNM utility access commands, enter the following in the command input line and press the F1 (PF01) function key: OPSYS dsnm-utility-command For example, enter the following string and then press the F1 (PF01) function key: OPSYS SEND Each Guardian utility you can interact with through OPSYS must have been defined for your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system. This is considered a system management task and is discussed in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide. You may not have access to all of the Guardian utilities that you are able to use outside of NonStop NET/MASTER MS Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 7

166 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Starting a Session With a Utility If you try to establish a session with a utility that has not been defined for your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, the following error message is displayed: NNM2173 COMMAND AUTHORITY LEVEL NOT SPECIFIED FOR utility cmd In addition, each Guardian utility that has been defined for your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system has a command authority level associated with it. Within each utility definition, certain utility commands may have higher or lower authority levels. You may not have a high enough command authority level to access all of the Guardian utilities (or to access the entire command set associated with a particular utility) that you are able to use outside of NonStop NET/MASTER MS. If you try to establish a session with a utility or to issue a command for which you do not have a sufficient authority level, the following error message is displayed: NNM0228 INSUFFICIENT COMMAND AUTHORITY LEVEL Starting a Session With a Utility Start a session with a Guardian utility by using an OPSYS SEND command. You can give the session a unique name, as in the following example: or OPSYS SEND FUP1=FUP OPSYS FUP1=FUP (remember, the DSNM SEND command is optional) The File Utility Program banner is displayed in the message display area, as shown here: START OPSYS SEND FUP1=FUP NNM1468 File Utility Program - T6553D20 - (01JUN93) System \SYS1 NNM1468 Copyright Tandem Computers Incorporated 1981, 1983, NNM0999 *END* If the utility does not have the same name as any NonStop NET/MASTER MS or DSNM commands, you can refer to the utility by its own name, and both the OPSYS command and the SEND keyword become optional: for example, or or OPSYS SEND FUP OPSYS FUP FUP Tandem Computers Incorporated

167 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Starting a Session With a Utility If you refer to the utility by its own name, and if the utility is one that does not accept any commands (for example, DSAP), the utility is started immediately, and responses appear on your screen. If the utility does accept commands, and you have specified a utility command, the responses are displayed in the current window of the OCS screen. However, if the utility does accept commands (for example, FUP) and you have not specified a utility command, the Command Entry screen appears: COMMAND ENTRY COMMAND : : SYSTEM : SYS1 ASYNC ON WRAP OFF CAPTURE 0 LINE 1 UTILITY : FUP SCROLL OFF F4 PRINT MAX CAP 1000 COLUMN You can then enter your FUP commands through the screen for this session. You can also access the Command Entry screen through the System Support Services Primary Menu screen. In either case, you can modify the UTILITY field to identify the utility to which you want commands to be sent. If you want to route the utility command to a remote system, you can modify the SYSTEM field to identify the link that connects the system. If you want to give a session a name, you can start the session from the Command Entry screen by entering the OPSYS command, prefixed by a slash (/), in the COMMAND field, as follows: /OPSYS SEND FUP1=FUP (Using the slash means: do not send the command to the utility specified in the UTILITY field but send it as a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. You do not need to use the slash if the UTILITY field is blank.) Messages appear in the message display area of the Command Entry screen to advise you of the starting process. Once the session has started, you can use the session name in the UTILITY field to send commands to the utility. You can create multiple concurrent sessions. Any sessions you create are valid only in the environment from which they are created. For example, if you establish a FUP session named FUP1 in OCS and then switch into the Command Entry facility or even Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 9

168 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Sending Commands to a Utility into a different OCS window, you will not be able to send commands in the new environment to that FUP1 session for processing. If you want to send commands to a session called FUP1 in the new environment, you must establish a new FUP1 session with FUP. In addition, your current Guardian user ID (GUID) is attached to every utility session you establish. You can create multiple concurrent sessions using the same GUID or using different GUIDs. If you try to send a command to a session established under a different GUID or in a different environment, a new session is established for the utility. Note In the Command Entry facility, you cannot use the PROFILE GUID command to change your GUID. Even though the profile is changed, you are still identified by the GUID that was in effect before the change. Sending Commands to a Utility When you are in the Command Entry facility, you can use the following three fields to send utility commands to any system: The COMMAND field allows you to enter the name of the utility command. You can enter multiple commands if the utility allows it. However, if the command separator is a semicolon (;), you must use two semicolons (;;) instead. Note You can use the COMMAND field to enter commands or text that you want to send to NonStop NET/MASTER MS, instead of to the utility, by using the slash (/): for example, /PROFILE. The SYSTEM field allows you to enter the name of the link that connects the remote system to which you want to route the utility command. If you want to send the command to your own system, ensure that the field either is blank or contains the ID of your system. The UTILITY field allows you to enter the name of the utility or utility session to which you want to send the command Tandem Computers Incorporated

169 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Sending Commands to a Utility For example, if SYS1 is the name of a link, then when you press the ENTER key from the following screen, you send a SECURE command to the File Utility Program (FUP) on the system connected to SYS COMMAND ENTRY COMMAND : SECURE $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE, "CCCC" : SYSTEM : SYS1 ASYNC ON WRAP OFF CAPTURE 0 LINE 1 UTILITY : FUP SCROLL OFF F4 PRINT MAX CAP 1000 COLUMN Messages appear in the message display area to advise you of the result. You can examine previous messages that were received during the session by examining the capture buffer. If the value in the UTILITY field is FUP, the following three commands establish a session with the FUP utility, request that the security setting of a file be changed, and then display the new security setting: INFO $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE SECURE $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE, "NUNU" INFO $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 11

170 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Sending Commands to a Utility The capture buffer contains the results of the commands: COMMAND ENTRY COMMAND : : SYSTEM : SYS1 ASYNC ON WRAP OFF CAPTURE 14 LINE 1 UTILITY : FUP SCROLL OFF F4 PRINT MAX CAP 1000 COLUMN INFO $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE NNM1468 File Utility Program - T6553D20 - (01JUN93) System \SYS1 NNM1468 Copyright Tandem Computers Incorporated 1981, 1983, NNM1456 CODE EOF LAST MODIF OWNER RWEP TYPE NNM1456 $DATA.ZNCLPGN NNM1456 MYFILE :34 100,21 NCNC NNM0999 *END* SECURE $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE,"NUNU" NNM0995 REQUEST COMPLETE INFO $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE NNM1456 CODE EOF LAST MODIF OWNER RWEP TYPE NNM1456 $DATA.ZNCLPGN NNM1456 MYFILE :34 100,21 NUNU NNM0999 *END* ** END OF DELIVERED MESSAGES ** The following example establishes a session with the Disk Space Analysis Program (DSAP) and asks for a summary analysis for a single user from the Command Entry facility. In this case, you have entered DSAP in the UTILITY field and the parameters $DATA, USER 100,21 in the COMMAND field COMMAND ENTRY COMMAND : : SYSTEM : SYS1 ASYNC ON WRAP OFF CAPTURE 25 LINE 6 UTILITY : DSAP SCROLL OFF F4 PRINT MAX CAP 1000 COLUMN $DATA, USER 100,21 NNM1468 TACL (T9205D20-01JUN93), Operating System D20 NNM1468 COPYRIGHT TANDEM COMPUTERS INCORPORATED 1985, NNM1468 CPU 1, process has no backup NNM1468 November 10, :58:37 NNM1468 (Invoking $SYSTEM.SYSTEM.TACLLOCL) NNM1468 (Invoking $DATA2.JOHNN.TACLCSTM) NNM VLX -- Attaching segment $data2.sys1.publsegf NNM VLX -- Attaching segment $data2.user.publsegf NNM1468 Loading TACLCMD NNM1468 Hometerm is not pagemode 6530 NNM1468 Loaded from $DATA2.MAXFER.MAXFER: NNM1468 MTT TTM NNM1468 Current volume is $DATA2.JOHNN NNM1456 NNM1456 NNM1456 PAGE 1 DSAP -- SYS1.JOHNN -- NNM Tandem Computers Incorporated

171 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Responding to Prompts Generated by Utilities Note Because DSAP does not have associated commands, you cannot enter the Command Entry facility by issuing DSAP from the OCS command input line. You must be in the facility already: for example, through option 6 on the System Support Services Primary Menu screen. You can also send utility commands without using the Command Entry facility, by issuing OPSYS SEND commands. However, sending utility commands by this method requires you to include the utility name or the session name in the OPSYS command each time you send a command to the utility. In the Command Entry facility, you enter the utility name or the session name only once per session with the utility. The following example sends a SECURE command to the File Utility Program (FUP) through an established session named FUP1: OPSYS SEND FUP1 SECURE $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE, "CCCC" You can send a command to the utility in the same command string with which you establish the session. The following example establishes a session named FUP1 with the FUP utility and sends it a command: OPSYS SEND FUP1=FUP SECURE $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE, "CCCC" If you choose not to give the utility session a name that is different from the name of the utility, and if the name of the utility does not match the name of any of the other NonStop NET/MASTER MS or DSNM commands, then both the OPSYS command and the SEND keyword are optional when you send a command to the utility session: for example, FUP SECURE $DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE, "CCCC" Responding to Prompts Generated by Utilities Issue OPSYS ANSWER commands to respond to requests generated by a utility. These are generally in the form of confirmation prompts. If you are in the Command Entry facility, you can type your response in the COMMAND field and press the F14 (PF14) function key to issue the command. If you are working in OCS, confirmation prompts are full NRD messages, which remain in the NRD message area even after you respond to them with an OPSYS ANSWER command. (Full NRD messages are discussed more fully in Section 4, Operator Control Services (OCS). ) You can use the F14 (PF14) function key to answer and to remove the non-roll-delete attribute of a confirmation prompt at the same time as follows: 1. Type your answer at the OCS command input line. 2. Position the cursor to the left of the confirmation prompt. 3. Press F14 (PF14) to answer and to purge the confirmation prompt. The first character of the prompt is replaced by the pipe symbol ( ), and the prompt becomes a roll-delete message Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 13

172 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Responding to Prompts Generated by Utilities Example The following OCS example sends a request to FUP1 (a session that you have previously started with FUP) to purge all the files in $DATA.MYVOL: OPSYS SEND FUP1 PURGE $DATA.MYVOL.* FUP asks for confirmation, as shown in the following screen: (09:30) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES START OPSYS SEND FUP1 PURGE $DATA.MYVOL.* NNM1456 DO YOU WISH TO PURGE THE ENTIRE SUBVOLUME $DATA.MYVOL NNM1456 [100,021 FUP1] ( Y[ES], N[ONE], S[ELECT], F[ILES] )? NNM0999 *END* NonStop NET/MASTER D M=> You want to select a subset of the files in $DATA.MYVOL to be purged. You respond as follows: 1. Type S at the command input line. 2. Position the cursor to the left of the prompt: NNM1456 [100,021 FUP1] ( Y[ES], N[ONE], S[ELECT], F[ILES] )? Tandem Computers Incorporated

173 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Responding to Prompts Generated by Utilities 3. Press F14 (PF14). The following screen appears. (09:31) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES START OPSYS SEND FUP1 PURGE $DATA.MYVOL.* NNM1456 DO YOU WISH TO PURGE THE ENTIRE SUBVOLUME $DATA.MYVOL NM1456 [100,021 FUP1] ( Y[ES], N[ONE], S[ELECT], F[ILES] )? NNM0999 *END* NNM1456 CODE EOF LAST MODIF OWNER RWEP TYPE REC BLOCK NNM1456 $DATA.MYVOL NNM1456 AAAA :27 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 [100,021 FUP1] PURGE? NNM0999 *END* NonStop NET/MASTER D M=> S (If you are in the Command Entry facility, type S in the COMMAND field and press F14 (PF14) to issue the command.) You respond to each confirmation prompt as follows: 1. Type your response at the command input line. 2. Position the cursor to the left of the prompt: NNM1456 [100,021 FUP1] PURGE? Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 15

174 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Sending a BREAK Message to a Utility 3. Press F14 (PF14). The following screen appears. (09:35) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES START OPSYS SEND FUP1 PURGE $DATA.MYVOL.* NNM1456 DO YOU WISH TO PURGE THE ENTIRE SUBVOLUME $DATA.MYVOL NM1456 [100,021 FUP1] ( Y[ES], N[ONE], S[ELECT], F[ILES] )? NNM0999 *END* NNM1456 CODE EOF LAST MODIF OWNER RWEP TYPE REC BLOCK NNM1456 $DATA.MYVOL NNM1456 AAAA :27 100,21 NCNC NM1456 [100,021 FUP1] PURGE? NNM0999 *END* NNM1456 NNM1456 $DATA.MYVOL.AAAA PURGED. NNM1456 MYFILE :21 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 [100,021 FUP1] PURGE? NNM0999 *END* NonStop NET/MASTER D M=> Y Sending a BREAK Message to a Utility Issue an OPSYS BREAK command to send a BREAK message to a utility. This is the equivalent of pressing the BREAK key when you are interacting with a utility running in the foreground. If you are in the Command Entry facility, you can use the SF13 function key to issue the command. How the BREAK message affects the behavior of the utility depends on the particular utility. Example The following example sends a request to FUP1: OPSYS SEND FUP1 INFO $DATA.ZNCLPGN.* Tandem Computers Incorporated

175 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Ending a Session With a Utility You decide that the command is returning more information than you need and issue a BREAK command to stop the output (if you are in the Command Entry facility, press SF13 to issue the command): OPSYS BREAK FUP1 (10:10) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES NNM1456 ZEX0616N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0617N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0618N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0619N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0620N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0621N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0622N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0623N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0624N NOV94 14:25 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0625N NOV94 14:25 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0701N NOV94 14:25 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0702N NOV94 14:25 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0703N NOV94 14:25 100,21 NCNC NNM1469 (-404) Command Pre-empted NNM0999 *END* NNM0995 REQUEST COMPLETE NNM1456 ZEX0612N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0613N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0614N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NNM1456 ZEX0615N NOV94 14:24 100,21 NCNC NonStop NET/MASTER D M=> OPSYS BREAK FUP1 Ending a Session With a Utility When you exit the environment in which you are interacting with Guardian utilities, all utility sessions established within that environment are terminated. You can also explicitly terminate Guardian utility sessions by using the OPSYS CLEANUP and KILL commands. KILL CLEANUP The KILL command terminates an individual utility session immediately, without regard to any outstanding requests. You cannot KILL a session started under a different GUID. If you are in the Command Entry facility, you can use the SF14 function key to issue the command. The CLEANUP command terminates all utility sessions associated with your current NonStop NET/MASTER MS environment, regardless of the GUIDs associated with the sessions. If you are in the Command Entry facility, either prefix the OPSYS CLEANUP command with a slash (/) or enter spaces in the UTILITY field. Refer to the User s Guide to DSNM Commands for more information on the KILL and CLEANUP commands. The following example sends a LOAD request to FUP1: OPSYS SEND FUP1 LOAD LONG, $HUGE.BIG.DATABASE Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 17

176 Accessing External Utilities and Applications How the Guardian User ID of External Processes is Determined You realize that the wrong file is being loaded and issue a KILL command to terminate the FUP1 session immediately and stop the FUP process (if you are in the Command Entry facility, press SF14 to issue the command): OPSYS KILL FUP1 To force all utility processes associated with your current environment to be stopped, enter the following (if you are in the Command Entry facility, you must either prefix the command with a slash (/) or enter spaces in the UTILITY field): OPSYS CLEANUP STOP The STOP command stops the utility processes. If you only want to terminate your sessions with the utilities, but not to stop the utility processes, use the DOWN operand. How the Guardian User ID of External Processes Is Determined When you create a process using the OPSYS SEND or the PROGRUN command, the process is assigned a GUID. The PARAM SWGUID setting on your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system determines how the GUID of any process you create by using OPSYS or PROGRUN is determined (see Figure 7-2). If PARAM SWGUID=YES (the default), then the process is allocated the current GUID of the user creating the process. If PARAM SWGUID=NO, the process is allocated the GUID of NonStop NET/MASTER MS (this is the GUID of the person who started NonStop NET/MASTER MS). Figure 7-2. How the Guardian User ID of External Processes is Determined OPSYS / PROGRUN NO PARAM SWGUID YES NNM Guardian User ID Current Guardian User ID NNM (NonStop NET/MASTER MS) Tandem Computers Incorporated

177 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Running Guardian Utilities From Within NonStop NET/MASTER MS Running Guardian Utilities From Within NonStop NET/MASTER MS To start a Guardian utility from NonStop NET/MASTER MS by using the OPSYS command, your currently assigned GUID in OCS must match a GUID defined to the Guardian environment. If PARAM SWGUID is equal to YES, your GUID is assigned to the started utility. If PARAM SWGUID is equal to NO, the GUID of the person who started NonStop NET/MASTER MS is assigned to the started utility. When you start a Guardian utility from NonStop NET/MASTER MS, the utility uses the default subvolume and security associated with your GUID as defined to the Guardian environment. Note The user procedure library defined in the UMS NCL Library field is not associated with the default values used when you execute a Guardian utility. NonStop NET/MASTER MS starts all utility sessions independently; the utilities are not started from a TACL process, as they are when you use a terminal running only the TACL process. Thus, if you send a TACL VOLUME command from NonStop NET/MASTER MS, and then start a FUP session and send a FUP INFO * command to the session, FUP displays the files in the default subvolume associated with your current GUID. FUP does not display the files in the subvolume you selected under the TACL process because the TACL process is not involved in starting FUP. For example, assume your NonStop NET/MASTER MS GUID is 100,21 and that the default subvolume associated with this GUID as defined to the Guardian environment is $DATA2.JOHNN. If you execute the following commands from TACL VOLUME $DATA.ZNCLPGN FUP INFO * then FUP displays information about files in $DATA.ZNCLPGN. However, if you execute the same commands from the OCS command input line, FUP displays information about files in $DATA2.JOHNN Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 19

178 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Running Block-Mode Applications Running Block-Mode Applications Use the PROGRUN command to run local or remote block-mode applications such as DSM/PM, T/Mail, OMF, and ViewPoint. The PROGRUN command suspends your terminal output as long as the process is running. You can communicate interactively with the application and receive the result of commands, but NonStop NET/MASTER MS cannot intercept the exchanges with the process, and there is no record of the responses to commands issued when you return to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. The PROGRUN command can also be used to run conversational applications, but you should restrict its use to block-mode applications (see the caution, below). The Console Extras facility provides a user interface that facilitates your use of the PROGRUN command. See The Console Extras Facility, later in this section. When you start a program using PROGRUN, you must exit the program to return to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. When NonStop NET/MASTER MS regains control of the terminal, it returns you to the environment from which the PROGRUN command was entered. Caution You can run conversational utilities using the PROGRUN command. However, because applications and utilities started using PROGRUN take complete control of the terminal and consequently suspend use of the terminal by NonStop NET/MASTER MS, you are not aware of incoming messages destined for your OCS window when you are interacting with a PROGRUN-initiated application. This impairs the integral monitoring capability that NonStop NET/MASTER MS provides. OPSYS, therefore, is the preferred way of starting and terminating interactive sessions with conversational Guardian utilities. For block-mode applications, there is no choice but to use the PROGRUN command. If you start a TACL process by using the PROGRUN command and then log on to TACL, you must press CTRL-Y or use the EXIT command to return to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Be aware also that, if you start a TACL process by using PROGRUN and you do not have a valid Guardian user ID and password, you will be unable to log on to, and stop, the TACL process to return to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. In this case, you must ask your system manager to stop the TACL process for you. NonStop NET/MASTER MS queues messages arriving for display at a suspended terminal. If a process retains control of a terminal for a long time, messages may be lost. Such messages are still logged to the activity log. If a terminal timeout occurs while a process has control of a terminal, the timeout action is initiated when NonStop NET/MASTER MS regains control of the terminal Tandem Computers Incorporated

179 Accessing External Utilities and Applications The Two Forms of the PROGRUN Command The Two Forms of the PROGRUN Command There are two forms of the PROGRUN command format 1 (restricted) and format 2 (unrestricted): Format 1 gives you access to block-mode (or conversational) applications that have been predefined to your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system by your system manager (through the UMS facility). You can use your Console Extras utility list to access these predefined applications. Ask your system manager to customize your Console Extras utility list for you. PROGRUN utility Each application that you can interact with using this format of the PROGRUN command has a command authority level associated with it. You may not have access to all the applications that you are able to use outside of NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Format 2 allows you to access any Guardian object file, including conversational Guardian utilities: PROGRUN FILE=file-spec [ CPU=cpu-number ] [ DEFAULT=$volume.subvolume ] [ NAME=process-name ] [ PRI=process-priority ] [ PARAMS="startup-string" ] Depending on how your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system is configured and your command authority level, you may have access to format 1, format 2, or both formats of the PROGRUN command. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for a complete description of the PROGRUN command Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 21

180 Accessing External Utilities and Applications The Two Forms of the PROGRUN Command Example Enter the following PROGRUN command to start a session with the Remote Console Process (RCP): PROGRUN RCP The following RCP main screen takes over your terminal: S Y S T E M S T A T U S CPU Fz Status CPU Fz Status 00 E Executing GUARDIAN E Executing GUARDIAN E Executing GUARDIAN E Executing GUARDIAN No response 05 No response 06 No response 07 No response 08 No response 09 No response 10 No response 11 No response 12 No response 13 No response 14 No response 15 No response LOGGED ON R C P M A I N M E N U T9996C30-25AUG92 SF1: GUARDIAN 90 MODE SF9: LOBUG SF3: ALARM STATUS AND CONTROL SF10: SYSTEM LOAD CONFIGURATION SF4: PROCESSOR DUMP SF11: REMOTE STATUS AND CONTROL SF5: PROCESSOR LOAD SF12: RCP LOGON/LOGOFF SF6: SYSTEM LOAD SF13: IPC STATUS SF7: PROCESSOR BUSY SF14: I/O CONFIGURATION SF8: RMI STATUS SF15: POWER/ENVIRONMENT STATUS SF16: EXIT F1: Help F14: Display locators COPYRIGHT TANDEM COMPUTERS INC After you exit from RCP, the results from the PROGRUN command are displayed: (11:40) OPERATOR CONTROL SERVICES START PROGRUN RCP NNM1459 PROCESS $X095 CREATED FOR $SYSTEM.SYSTEM.RCP NNM1460 PROCESS $X095 FOR $SYSTEM.SYSTEM.RCP STOPPED NonStop NET/MASTER D M=> PROGRUN RCP Tandem Computers Incorporated

181 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Running NetStatus Running NetStatus NetStatus is an object-oriented, full-screen user interface that provides a central operations environment from which you can: Monitor the current state of objects in a network. Control and display information about subsystem objects either through function keys or by invoking DSNM subsystem commands. Note The NetStatus application is supported for Tandem 6530 or compatible terminals only. If the NetStatus product is available on your system and your system manager has started the NetStatus Pathway process, you can access it. If you have access to Console Extras, you can ask your system manager to add the NetStatus utility to your Console Extras utility list to enable you to access NetStatus through Console Extras. Otherwise, you have to access NetStatus from either the OCS command line, the Command Entry command line, or the Activity Log Browse facility command line, by starting the NETSTAT NCL procedure using the following syntax. NETSTAT [ NOCOLOR ] [ DISPLAY filename ] NOCOLOR specifies that your terminal does not support color. DISPLAY filename specifies the file to be used as the startup NetStatus display set. The display set identifies the objects in your network that you can monitor and control from the NetStatus Network Status screen. Display sets are described in detail in the NetStatus User s Guide. If your system manager has defined a file in your user ID definition record (Installation Attribute 1), you need not explicitly specify this file. NetStatus uses the file defined in your Installation Attribute 1 field as the display set. Note The NETSTAT NCL procedure suspends your terminal output (in the same way as the PROGRUN command) as long as you are in NetStatus. If you frequently enter and exit from the NetStatus application and usually use the same display set, you may find it convenient to set up an equate to access the NetStatus application. The next example shows how to use the EQUATE command to abbreviate a long NETSTAT command string to just three characters NET: EQUATE NET NETSTAT NOCOLOR DISPLAY $DATA.ZNNMNCS.DISPSET Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 23

182 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Running NetStatus If you have several display sets defined, you may want to define a PREF attribute function key that allows you to enter the name of a particular display set. For example: FK SF14 PREF,-NETSTAT NOCOLOR DISPLAY+ Now, to display the status of the objects defined in the display set named SNAXSET, located in your default library, you could simply enter the following string in the OCS command line and press the SF14 function keys: SNAXSET When you first enter NetStatus, it tries to retrieve one of the following display sets: The DISPLAY file name, if included when you invoke NetStatus The file name configured in the Installation Attribute 1 field of your user ID definition record A display set called ZDISPSET, if available (see your system manager for details about ZDISPSET on your system) A NetStatus Configuration screen is displayed if NetStatus cannot retrieve a display set: Page 1 Display Set File Name NetStatus Configuration SUBSYS OBJTYPE NAME MANAGER OPTION Valid hierarchy options are: A = All (default), S = Subonly, O = Only. F1--Execute Monitor F2--Retrieve Display Set F4--Return, No Change F12-Help SF2-First Page SF3-Last Page SF15-Clear Display Set SF16-Exit Tandem Computers Incorporated

183 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Running NetStatus A Network Status screen is displayed if NetStatus can retrieve a display set. The screen provides a status summary for each object in your display set file. Page 1 Network Status Level 1 Select state: Parent: \SYS1.0 \SYS1.1 \SYS1.$SYSTEM << LINK-SUMMARY >> ==> F1--Execute F2--Text F3--Down F4--Up F5--Status F6--Info F7--Inquire F8--Expand F9--Cancel F11-Conf F12-Help SF2-First SF3--Last SF4-TopLvl SF5-Detail SF6-Stats SF7-Start SF8-Rsvd SF9-Abort SF10-Update SF1-CLEAR SF16-EXIT Using the NetStatus application to perform network management tasks is described in the NetStatus User s Guide. Note When you are working in NetStatus, standard NetStatus function keys and commands apply. To return to NonStop NET/MASTER MS from NetStatus, press the SF16 function key from any NetStatus screen Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 25

184 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Entering Commands From Within NetStatus Entering Commands From Within NetStatus All NetStatus screens (except the NetStatus Configuration screen) have a command line on which you can enter commands. You can issue any DSNM command (using OPSYS) for which you have a high enough authority level from any NetStatus command line. For example, to display information about all servers under a PATHMON named $ADPN, enter the following command in the command input line and press the F1 function key to execute the command: OPSYS INFO SERVER * UNDER $ADPN The first three lines of the command response appear on the Network Status screen: Page 1 Network Status Level 1 Select state: Parent: \SYS1.0 \SYS1.1 \SYS1.$SYSTEM MORE TEXT << LINK-SUMMARY >> ==> OPSYS INFO SERVER * UNDER $ADPN PATHWAY SERVER NETSTATUS-SVR01 UNDER \SYS1.$ADPN Autorestart: 3 Processes: 1 Command completed. SF1-FKEYS Tandem Computers Incorporated

185 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Viewing Command Responses in NetStatus Press the F2 function key to view the complete response: Page 1 MORE TEXT NetStatus Text Display PATHWAY SERVER NETSTATUS-SVR01 UNDER \SYS1.$ADPN Autorestart: 3 Processes: 1 Primary Cpu: 0 Backup Cpu: 1 Createdelay: 1:00.0 Debug: off Deletedelay: 1.0 Guardianlib: Hometerm: In: Linkdepth: 1 Maxlinks: 1 Maxservers: 1 Numstatic: 1 Out: Priority: 155 Program: \SYS1.$DATA.ZDSMS.NSTAT Sendtimeout: 0.0 ==> OPSYS INFO SERVER * UNDER $ADPN F1--Execute F4--Return F9--Cancel F12-Help SF2-First SF3-Last SF16-Exit Viewing Command Responses in NetStatus You can use the function keys in Table 7-3 to view command responses on the NetStatus Text Display screen. Table 7-3. Viewing Command Responses in NetStatus 6530 Function Key Description PAGEDOWN/ NEXTPAGE PAGEUP/ PREVPAGE F4 F12 SF2 SF3 SF16 Displays next screenful of response messages. Displays previous screenful of response messages. Returns to the screen from which command was issued. Displays help. Displays first screenful of response messages. Displays last screenful of response messages. Exits from the NetStatus application and returns to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS window from which you invoked NetStatus. Issuing DSNM commands from within the NetStatus application is discussed in more detail in the NetStatus User s Guide Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 27

186 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Sending a Problem to DSM/PM Sending a Problem to DSM/PM DSM/Problem Manager (DSM/PM) is a menu-driven application designed to manage problems in your operations environment. DSM/PM helps you to: Track and manage problems Establish consistent procedures for handling problems Maintain an historic record of problems If the DSM/PM product is available, you can access it. If you have access to Console Extras, you can ask your system manager to add the DSM/PM utility to your Console Extras utility list to access it through Console Extras. Otherwise, you can use the DSM/PM interface key from either OCS or Log Browse to send an EMS event that reports a problem to DSM/PM. The EMS event must be currently displayed on your screen. To send an event to DSM/PM from either OCS or Log Browse, follow these steps: 1. Specify the location of the DSM/PM subsystem to which to send the event: a. To send the event to DSM/PM on your own system, leave the OCS or Log Browse command input line blank. b. To send the event to DSM/PM at a remote system, specify either of the following at the OCS or Log Browse command input line: The domain ID of the remote system at which DSM/PM is located. For example: DOMAIN=DID The name of the link to the remote system at which DSM/PM is located. For example: LINK=BOSTON 2. Position the cursor next to the EMS event message reporting the problem you want to send to DSM/PM. The selected event must be an EMS event; that is, it must contain Subsystem Programmatic Interface (SPI) tokens. If the event selected is not an EMS event, an error message is displayed when you press the DSM/PM interface key, and the event is not sent to DSM/PM. 3. Send the event by pressing the DSM/PM interface key. The key is available in OCS and Log Browse as: SF6 for Tandem 6530 and compatible terminals PF18 for IBM 3270 and compatible terminals A copy of the event is forwarded to DSM/PM at the destination you specified in Step 1. For more information on DSM/PM, refer to the DSM/Problem Manager User s Guide and the DSM/Problem Manager Installation and Customization Guide Tandem Computers Incorporated

187 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Entering the Console Extras Facility The Console Extras Facility Entering the Console Extras Facility The Console Extras facility provides a user interface that facilitates your use of the predefined PROGRUN utilities and the NetStatus startup NCL procedure NETSTAT. Using this facility, you do not need to enter the PROGRUN command or NETSTAT. You access the utility by selecting the utility through your Console Extras Utility List panel. This facility allows you to access external utilities that exist on your system. The interface is a panel that provides up to 16 external utilities that you can access. You can ask your system manager to customize your Console Extras utility list panel. Select option E from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen to display a Console Extras Utility List screen similar to the following: SYS Console Extras : Utility List ZCEXMNLP Command ===> Utility Description S/B=Browse R=Run DSMPM EMSA NETSTATUS OMF VIEWSYS **END** Distributed Systems Management/Problem Manager Event Management Service Analyzer Distributed Systems Management Solutions NetStatus Object Monitoring Facility System Resource Monitor Utility F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F4=Return F9=Swap Note Console Extras supports utilities for 6530 and compatible terminals, 3270 and compatible terminals, or both. The Console Extras Utility List screen does not display configured utilities that are not supported on the type of terminal that you are using. The displayed list of utilities is determined as follows: 1. If you have your own Console Extras utility list, then your own list is displayed. 2. If you do not have your own Console Extras utility list, then the customized Console Extras utility list is displayed Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 29

188 Accessing External Utilities and Applications The Console Extras Function Keys 3. If there is no customized Console Extras utility list, then the default Console Extras utility list is displayed. The default list consists of the following names: DSMPM provides access to the DSM/Problem Manager system (refer to the DSM/Problem Manager User s Guide). DSMPM supports both 6530 and 3270 type terminals. EMSA provides access to the Event Management Service Analyzer product (refer to the Event Management Service (EMS) Analyzer User s Guide and Reference Manual) (supported on 6530 and compatible terminals only). NETSTATUS provides access to the NetStatus product (refer to the NetStatus User s Guide) (supported on 6530 and compatible terminals only). OMF provides access to the Object Monitoring Facility application (refer to the Object Monitoring Facility (OMF) User s Guide and Reference Manual) (supported on 6530 and compatible terminals only). VIEWSYS provides access to the ViewSys system resource monitor (refer to the ViewSys User s Guide) (supported on 6530 and compatible terminals only). The Console Extras Function Keys Table 7-4 describes how function keys are defined in the Console Extras facility. Table 7-4. Console Extras Function Key Definitions 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Equivalent Command Description F1 PF01 HELP Displays help. F2 PF02 SPLIT Executes the SPLIT command to open a new window. F3 PF03 EXIT or X Returns to the previous screen. F4 PF04 RETURN Returns to the previous screen. F9 PF09 SWAP Executes the SWAP command to open a new window or, if two windows are already open, to reverse their dimensions and enter the other window. The Console Extras Utility List Screen The Console Extras Utility List screen includes: A command line through which you can issue a command listed in Table 7-4 or enter a path specification to skip panels A message line (directly below the command line) A line listing the functions (each with the corresponding action code) that you can perform on a utility Tandem Computers Incorporated

189 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Browsing the Details of a Utility A two-column display indicating: The names of the utilities The descriptions of the utilities A line listing the function keys that you can use from the screen Running a Utility You can run a utility from your Console Extras Utility List screen. To run a utility, position your cursor to the left of the appropriate utility name, type R, and press the ENTER key. The utility takes over the whole screen, and NonStop NET/MASTER MS is suspended (in both windows if two windows are open). If you select more than one utility, the selected utilities are run one at a time in the sequence of the list; when you exit from one utility, the next selected utility is run. Note If you have the NetStatus utility on your Console Extras Utility List screen and want to run it, the NetStatus Pathway process must have already been started on your system. Browsing the Details of a Utility Browsing a utility invokes the Console Extras Utility Details screen that shows the details in read-only mode. You can select a utility for browsing from your Console Extras Utility List screen. To browse the details of a utility, position your cursor to the left of the appropriate utility name, type S or B, and press the ENTER key. A Console Extras Utility Details screen similar to the following appears. SYS Console Extras : Utility Details ZCEXDTEP Command ===> Function=BROWSE Configuration... DEFAULT Utility Name... DSMPM Description... Distributed Systems Management/Problem Manager File Name... $SYSTEM.SYSTEM.PATHCOM Startup Text... $zpmp; run pmt; exit Support Terminals... BOTH (3270, 6530, or BOTH) CPU... Priority... Process name... F1=Help F2=Split F3=Exit F9=Swap You can browse the details of a number of utilities in sequence by marking the utilities you required Tandem Computers Incorporated 7 31

190 Accessing External Utilities and Applications Browsing the Details of a Utility The Console Extras Utility Details Screen The Console Extras Utility Details screen includes: A line that contains the following: A command line through which you can issue a command listed in Table 7-4 or enter a path specification to skip panels A function-type indicator A message line (directly below the command prompt) The details of the utility A line listing the function keys that you can use from the screen The Console Extras Utility Details screen fields are described in Table 7-5. Table 7-5. Console Extras Utility Details Screen Fields Field Configuration Utility Name Description File Name Startup Text Support Terminals CPU Priority Process name Description Console Extras configuration that defines the utility list is: user ID User utility list CUSTOMIZED Customized utility list DEFAULT Default utility list Name of the utility. Description of the utility. Name that locates the utility. Startup parameters sent to the utility. Types of terminal that the utility supports: and compatible terminals and compatible terminals BOTH 3270, 6530, and compatible terminals CPU in which the utility will be run. If blank, NonStop NET/MASTER MS chooses a CPU on its own. Execution priority of the utility. If blank, NonStop NET/MASTER MS chooses a priority on its own. Tandem process name given to the utility process when the utility is run. If blank, NonStop NET/MASTER MS chooses a name on its own Tandem Computers Incorporated

191 What Is in This Section 8 Communicating With Remote Systems NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) can operate within a single system, a network of NonStop NET/MASTER MS systems, or a network comprising NonStop NET/MASTER MS, the SOLVE management services, and NetView systems. Three functional components of NonStop NET/MASTER MS are primarily concerned with handling remote communication: The Inter-NET/MASTER Connection (INMC) component of NonStop NET/MASTER MS defines and controls links between systems. An INMC link is a logical connection to a remote peer system. You can establish sessions with remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS, the SOLVE management services, or NetView systems from your local system if INMC links have been established between your local system and the remote systems with which you want to communicate (the target systems). The Inter-System Routing (ISR) component of NonStop NET/MASTER MS routes classes of event (or alert) messages between NonStop NET/MASTER MS systems, between NonStop NET/MASTER MS and SOLVE management services systems, and between NonStop NET/MASTER MS and NetView systems. The Remote Operator Control (ROC) component of NonStop NET/MASTER MS handles remote access to NonStop NET/MASTER MS, the SOLVE management services, and NetView systems through INMC links. This section describes how to: Start and stop links with remote systems Display information about links with remote systems Log on to and off from remote systems Send commands to remote systems Resolve problems with remote links Establishing a Session With a Remote System Before you can receive messages from or send commands to a remote system: A link between your local system and the target remote system must have been defined. (This section assumes that INMC links to remote systems have already been defined by the system manager at your site, as described in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide. ) The link must be started and the status of the link must be ACTIVE. The SHOW LINKS command displays the link name, status, and message identifier associated with each link defined on the network Tandem Computers Incorporated 8 1

192 Communicating With Remote Systems Receiving Solicited and Unsolicited Messages Establishing a session with a remote system allows you to execute commands in that system and have the results returned and displayed on your local terminal. To enable this function, you must satisfy all of the following: Your local user ID definition record must give you access to remote systems. Your user ID must be defined on the target system, and should be the same as your user ID on the local system. You must log on to the remote system either explicitly, using the SIGNON command, or implicitly, using the ROUTE command. Even if you have no need to send commands to remote systems, establishing remote sessions enables you to receive unsolicited messages from, and thus monitor, remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS, SOLVE management services, and NetView systems from your local NonStop NET/MASTER MS terminal. Receiving Solicited and Unsolicited Messages Local User ID Requirements Remote User ID Requirements Solicited messages are messages generated in response to an explicit request, such as the output from a command. Unsolicited messages are messages that are not generated as the result of an explicit request: for example, a message reporting an unexpected event such as a terminal failure. To receive unsolicited messages, the following must be satisfied: Either ISR allows unsolicited message flow or you must log on to the remote system. Your operator profile (your local operator profile if you use ISR; your remote operator profile if you log on to the remote system) must include the values EMS=YES and UNSOL=YES. To access remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS, SOLVE management services, and NetView systems, your local NonStop NET/MASTER MS user ID definition record must have the following configuration: Authority Level Logon to remote system OCS Access Equal to or higher than the SIGNON and ROUTE command authority levels Y Y On the remote system, your NonStop NET/MASTER MS user ID definition record must have the following configuration: Logon from remote system OCS Access Y Y When you sign on to a remote system, the command authority and privileges assigned to you are taken from your user ID definition record at the remote system Tandem Computers Incorporated

193 Communicating With Remote Systems Logging On to a Remote System For example, even if you have an authority level of 3 defined for your local user ID, you may be restricted to level 1 commands at the remote system. Commands routed to the remote system that exceed the assigned authority level are rejected. Displaying Information About Links Starting a Link With a Remote System Logging On to a Remote System Use the SHOW LINKS command to display information about the NonStop NET/MASTER MS links, SOLVE management services links, and NetView links defined on your network. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for a complete description of this command and its output. To start an INMC link with a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, SOLVE management services system, or NetView system, issue a LINK START command. This command is described in detail in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual. When access is acknowledged, the status of the INMC link becomes ACTIVE. You can use the SHOW LINKS command to check the status of INMC links. To send commands to and receive the results from a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, SOLVE management services system, or NetView system, you must be logged on to that system. If ISR does not allow unsolicited event message flow but you want to receive unsolicited messages from a remote system, you must also log on to that system. Note If you are logged on to the remote system and can also receive unsolicited event messages from ISR, the messages may be displayed twice on your local OCS window (once from ROC and once from ISR). You can prevent the same message from being displayed twice by profiling your remote user ID to not receive EMS messages; then only ISR displays the message. If your password is the same on both systems, you can implicitly log on to the remote system by using the ROUTE command (see Automatically Logging On to a Remote System, later in this section). If you have a different password assigned to your user ID on the remote system, you must explicitly log on to the remote system before routing a command to it. Explicitly Logging On to a Remote System Use the SIGNON linkname command to explicitly log on to a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS, SOLVE management services, or NetView system. Explicitly logging on to a remote system, even if your password is the same as on your local system, allows you to: Specify whether you want the message identifier (optionally enclosed in parentheses) associated with the remote system to be prefixed to messages received at your local terminal. Override the default message identifier associated with the target system (part of the link definition) by using an identifier of your choice. Assign your own background color, text color, and highlighting attributes to messages received from the target system Tandem Computers Incorporated 8 3

194 Communicating With Remote Systems Logging On to a Remote System Note Do not confuse the SIGNON linkname command with the SIGNON command (issued with no operands). SIGNON (issued with no operands) is used to automatically refresh your user ID definition record (if your system manager makes any security-related changes while you are logged on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS, for example), and is discussed in Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS). Password Considerations If your user ID definition record on the remote system has a password that is different from your local password, you must include the PASSWORD operand with your SIGNON command. Your password is displayed on the command input line; however: The password is overwritten with blanks in the command echo (either in the OCS message display area or in the Command Entry facility message display area). The password is overwritten with blanks in the history buffer (if you retrieve a SIGNON command from the history buffer, you must reenter the password portion in order to reissue the command). The password is not displayed in the activity log. In a heterogeneous network comprising NonStop NET/MASTER MS systems, SOLVE management services systems, and NetView systems: SOLVE management services and NetView systems require uppercase passwords. NonStop NET/MASTER MS is case-sensitive in relation to passwords. Therefore: If you issue a SIGNON command to log on to a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, the password can contain both uppercase and lowercase letters. If you issue a SIGNON command to log on to a remote SOLVE management services or NetView system, the password must be entered in all uppercase letters. If you issue a SIGNON command to log on to a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system from a SOLVE management services or NetView system, the password defined to NonStop NET/MASTER MS must be uppercase. If the Remote System Is Inactive If the link to the remote system is not active, the SIGNON command is queued and completes automatically when the link becomes active. Note As soon as the link becomes active, any unsolicited messages are immediately received at your local terminal. To ensure that all outstanding non-roll-delete messages are redelivered, the initial OCS command (PROFILE INITCMD) processing at the remote system should include a NRDRET command Tandem Computers Incorporated

195 Communicating With Remote Systems Logging On to a Remote System Specifying a Message Prefix By default, the results of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS, SOLVE management services, or NetView command routed to a remote system are displayed on your local terminal, prefixed with the message identifier (enclosed in parentheses) associated with the particular link name. You may specify that the message identifier not be prefixed to messages from a remote system by including the PREFIX=NO operand with your SIGNON command. For example: SIGNON BOSTON PREFIX=NO You may specify a one to eight-character message identifier of your choice by including the ID=msg-id operand with your SIGNON command. For example: SIGNON BOSTON ID=BOS Finally, you may request that the message identifier not be enclosed in parentheses by including a PAREN=NO operand with your SIGNON command. For example: SIGNON BOSTON PAREN=NO Overriding the Configured Background Color, Text Color, and Highlighting of Messages By default, the results of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS, SOLVE management services, or NetView command routed to a remote system are displayed on your local terminal with the background color, text color, and highlighting attributes assigned to that particular link when the link was defined. In this way, you can easily determine from which remote system messages come. You can select a background color of your choice to override the default color attribute associated with a particular link by including a BKGCOLOR=color-option operand with your SIGNON command. For example: SIGNON BOSTON BKGCOLOR=WHITE You can select a text color of your choice to override the default text color attribute associated with a particular link by including a COLOR=color-option operand with your SIGNON command. For example: SIGNON BOSTON COLOR=RED You can select a highlighting option of your choice to override the default highlighting attribute associated with a particular link by including a HLITE=hlite-option operand with your SIGNON command. For example: SIGNON BOSTON HLITE=BLINK If the Link Fails If a link fails while you are logged on to a remote system, you are automatically logged on again when the link becomes active again, unless the link is reset. Automatic reconnection is canceled when you exit from OCS Tandem Computers Incorporated 8 5

196 Communicating With Remote Systems Logging On to Multiple Remote Systems If a link is reset (see the discussion on Resetting a Link, later in this section), you are notified that the connection will not be restarted. You must log on again if a new connection is required. Automatically Logging On to a Remote System If you send a ROUTE command to a remote system without explicitly logging on to it, the ROUTE command logs you on automatically with your local password, by issuing an implicit SIGNON command. This means that your password at both the local and remote system must be the same. Caution If you have a password with lowercase letters at your local NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, you cannot implicitly log on to a remote SOLVE management services or NetView system because the SOLVE management services and NetView systems require uppercase passwords. If the link is not active, the ROUTE command is rejected. Using the SIGNON command frees you from having to wait for the link to become active. Note Logging On to Multiple Remote Systems Sending Commands Directly to a Remote System If you implicitly log on to a remote system with the ROUTE command, you cannot override the default message identifier, color, or highlighting attributes associated with the link. You can log on to multiple remote systems from each OCS window you own. If you are always required to log on to a number of remote systems, you should consider including the necessary SIGNON commands in the NCL procedure that is automatically executed when you enter OCS (the value in the Initial OCS field in your user ID definition record). To route commands to a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, SOLVE management services system, or NetView system, issue a ROUTE linkname command, followed by the command text to be executed at the remote system. For example: ROUTE BOSTON SHOW USERS ROUTE NM11 OPSYS STOP ORL-SNAX, SUBONLY Note If you are entering commands from the Command Entry facility, enter the name of the link connecting the remote system in the SYSTEM field. It is not necessary to issue the ROUTE command from Command Entry unless you are routing a command through one or more intermediate links when you need to send a ROUTE command to an intermediate system. The contents of the command string are not validated before transmission; invalid commands are rejected by the remote system. You can concatenate multiple commands if command concatenation is enabled on the remote system Tandem Computers Incorporated

197 Communicating With Remote Systems Sending Commands Through Intermediate Systems The results of the command are returned to either: The window where the command was invoked (OCS, Command Entry, or Activity Log Browse) The NCL process that issued the command with an NCL INTCMD verb The owner of the NCL process that issued the command with an NCL CMD statement Note Messages have a data structure that NCL processes can analyze. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide for more information. By default, when the results of a command executed on a remote system are displayed, they are prefixed by a message identifier enclosed in parentheses. The message identifier is defined when the INMC link to the remote system is defined, but you can override it by using the SIGNON ID=msg-id operand if you explicitly log on to the remote system. You can also specify that the message identifier not be prefixed to messages from a remote system by including the PREFIX=NO operand with your SIGNON command. Finally, you may request that the message identifier not be enclosed in parentheses by including a PAREN=NO operand with your SIGNON command. The results of the command are displayed with any background color, text color, and highlighting attributes associated with the INMC link, but you can also override these attributes with the BKGCOLOR, COLOR, and HLITE operands of the SIGNON command. Sending Commands Through Intermediate Systems To issue a command to a NonStop NET/MASTER MS, SOLVE management services, or NetView system that is not directly connected to your local system but is connected by an intermediate system, specify a path using the links that connect the end points. The ROUTE command can route another ROUTE or SIGNON command. In this way, you can communicate with remote systems through intermediate NonStop NET/MASTER MS or SOLVE management services systems (an intermediate system cannot be a NetView system). For example: ROUTE LINK1 ROUTE LINK2 ROUTE LINK3 SHOW USERS The following list describes the sequence of steps in executing the above command string. 1. Your system executes the first ROUTE command and sends the command string ROUTE LINK2 ROUTE LINK3 SHOW USERS to the first intermediate system through LINK1. 2. The first intermediate system executes the second ROUTE command and sends the command string ROUTE LINK3 SHOW USERS to the second intermediate system through LINK Tandem Computers Incorporated 8 7

198 Communicating With Remote Systems Monitoring Events From Remote Systems 3. The second intermediate system executes the third ROUTE command and sends the command string SHOW USERS to the target system through LINK3. 4. The target system executes the SHOW USERS command. There is no limit to the number of systems that may be traversed in this way. However, to route commands through multiple intermediate systems, your user ID must be configured on every intermediate system for both logon TO and logon FROM remote system access. You may find it helpful to set up an EQUATE to assign a lengthy routing scheme to a simple character string. For example: EQUATE L3 ROUTE LINK1 ROUTE LINK2 ROUTE LINK3+ Because in a purely Tandem network all intermediate nodes are logically connected by using the DEFINE LINKS command, it is possible to shorten the original command string to: ROUTE LINK3 SHOW USERS NonStop NET/MASTER MS provides this automatic routing feature. Monitoring Events From Remote Systems Remote Message Display Non-Roll-Delete Messages From Remote Locations Messages flowing through INMC links (both inbound and outbound) can be enabled or disabled. The Inter-System Routing (ISR) component of NonStop NET/MASTER MS controls the routing of messages over NonStop NET/MASTER MS, SOLVE management services, and NetView INMC links in a network. Enabling and disabling the flow of EMS, solicited, and unsolicited messages between INMC links with the ISR command is discussed in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide. Whether messages actually flow between two systems depends upon the mutual ISR settings on both systems. For example, if your local system expects to receive inbound unsolicited messages from a remote system, the remote system must be allowed to send outbound unsolicited messages to your system. If your local system has been set to receive unsolicited messages from remote systems, these messages are delivered to all users configured to receive EMS messages. To display information about the ISR definitions for all active links, issue a SHOW ISR command. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for more information on this command. The way remote messages are displayed on your terminal is defined by your system manager as part of the link-definition procedure. Remote messages can be identified by background color, text color, highlighting, and message identifiers. Non-roll-delete messages originating from remote locations are displayed and handled the same as locally generated NRD messages. If a link fails, all NRD messages that originated from the remote system are automatically deleted Tandem Computers Incorporated

199 Communicating With Remote Systems Resetting a Link If you log off from a remote system, any NRD messages you have received from that remote system are deleted from your OCS window. Other users displaying the same NRD messages are not affected. Logging Off From a Remote System Stopping a Link Resetting a Link To log off from a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, SOLVE management services system, or NetView system, do one of the following: Issue the SIGNOFF=linkname command. The SIGNOFF command also terminates any queued logons or connections that are in recovery following a link failure. If you have multiple windows in operation, you may be logged on to a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS, SOLVE management services, or NetView system from each operational window. The SIGNOFF command only terminates logons from the window from which it is issued. Therefore, SIGNOFF commands must be entered from each operational window from which an explicit or implicit SIGNON command was executed. Exit from the OCS or Command Entry window from which you are operating. Any remaining logons (active and pending) to remote systems from that window are automatically terminated. Issue a LINK STOP=linkname command to stop the INMC link with a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, SOLVE management services system, or NetView system. This causes the link to immediately terminate all sessions regardless of any traffic in progress. The status of the INMC link is changed to STOPPED on the system that requests the disconnection and to PEND-ACT on the remote system. If you restart a link by using the LINK START=linkname command that has been stopped, NonStop NET/MASTER MS uses the complete link definition that was current when you stopped the link. Issue a LINK RESET=linkname command to stop and reset an INMC link with a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, SOLVE management services system, or NetView system. Once LINK RESET has been issued, the status of the INMC link is no longer apparent, as distinct from the LINK STOP command. The remote system still shows PEND- ACT, however. For further information on the differences between the LINK STOP and the LINK RESET commands, refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Reference Manual Tandem Computers Incorporated 8 9

200 Communicating With Remote Systems INMC Link Failures INMC Link Failures An INMC link is made up of objects called session types and units: Session types are the communication access methods used by the INMC link. Units are the logical paths between remote peer systems. Each unit is a subdivision of a session type and has a device associated with it. For an X.25, SNAX/XF, or SNAX/CDF session type, the unit is a line. For a PTP (process-toprocess) session, the unit is a file name. Each INMC link can have many different session types, each with many active units at one time. Message traffic is distributed evenly over the available communications paths so that no units are idle or overloaded in comparison to other units. Link failure occurs when all units (or logical paths) to a remote peer have failed. All data currently being sent is lost. If a link fails, all NRD messages that originated from the remote system are automatically deleted. Units will try to reestablish communication with their remote peers. If the value of the SESSMSG system parameter is YES, then every time an attempt to establish a connection fails, another message is issued to all monitor-class operators. When one unit receives an acknowledgment, the session is reestablished, and the status of the link changes to ACTIVE. If you were signed on to the remote system when the link failed, an automatic SIGNON is issued on your behalf when the link recovers Tandem Computers Incorporated

201 What Is in This Section 9 Using Edit Services The NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) Edit Services facility allows you to: Access the Tandem full-screen editor PS Text Edit (TEDIT) from within NonStop NET/MASTER MS. TEDIT has a comprehensive set of editing commands to work with text files. Check Network Control Language (NCL) source files for syntax errors prior to execution. This section describes how to use the Edit Services facility to: Create files Select existing files Select existing files for modification Delete files Display information about files Perform trial compilations on NCL source files Test an NCL panel source file See Section 1, Getting Started With NonStop NET/MASTER MS, for information on getting help from Edit Services. This section does not discuss how to use TEDIT. Refer to your PS TEXT EDIT Reference Manual for information on using TEDIT. Note Entering Edit Services When you are working in TEDIT, standard TEDIT function keys and commands apply. Your current Guardian user ID determines the TEDIT profile. To enter Edit Services, either: Select option 8 from the NonStop NET/MASTER Primary Menu screen. Type EDIT at the OCS command input line. The EDIT command is described in more detail in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual Tandem Computers Incorporated 9 1

202 Using Edit Services The Edit Services Selection List The Edit Services Selection List The Edit Services Selection List screen appears when you enter Edit Services. Figure 9-1 describes the components of this screen. Figure 9-1. Edit Services Selection List Screen Edit Services : Selection List ZEDSPN1P File Spec: 1 Subvolume: $DATA.ZNCLPGN 2 Page Down for more files 3 T=Test a panel S/B=Browse C=Compile D=Delete E=Edit 4 Filename Code 5 6 EOF Last Modification 7 Owner 8 RWEP 9 AAREADME MAY :17:26 100,21 NONO BUILTIN MAY :17:28 100,21 NONO BUILTIN MAY :17:29 100,21 NONO HELLO MAY :17:30 100,21 NONO HELLO MAY :17:32 100,21 NONO HELLO MAY :17:33 100,21 NONO INITCMD MAY :17:36 100,21 NONO LIST MAY :17:40 100,21 NONO MESSGEN MAY :17:43 100,21 NONO MSGPROC MAY :17:47 100,21 NONO USERW MAY :17:52 100,21 NONO USERW MAY :17:55 100,21 NONO ZEX0401N MAY :17:57 100,21 NONO ZEX0402N MAY :18:01 100,21 NONO ZEX0403N MAY :18:03 100,21 NONO ZEX0501N MAY :18:04 100,21 NONO ZEX0502N MAY :18:08 100,21 NONO F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Return F7=Prev F8=Next F11=Error List Legend Entry field for specifying the file to be created or modified $volume.subvolume in which displayed files are located Message line Name of the file File code File size (in bytes) Last modification date and time Guardian user ID of file's owner Read, Write, Execute, and Purge securities 011 Your Default Library When you enter Edit Services, the Subvolume field indicates the default library in which the files listed in the selection list are located. Your default library is one of the following: The user procedure library assigned to you in the NCL Library Subvol field in your user ID definition record. Your user procedure library is where source code for NCL procedures belonging to you are stored. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS system can have many user Tandem Computers Incorporated

203 Using Edit Services Switching to a Different Procedure Library procedure libraries. A user procedure library may belong to you alone or may be shared by a group of operators. If you do not have a user procedure library assigned to you, the Subvolume field displays the customized procedure library (defined in PARAM NCLCUSTSRC). The customized procedure library is where source code is stored for system-level, installation-specific NCL procedures, such as a customized EMSPROC or LOGPROC NCL procedure. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS system has only one customized procedure library. If your installation does not have a customized procedure library, the Subvolume field displays the distribution procedure library (defined in PARAM NCLDISTSRC). The distribution procedure library is where source code is stored for NCL procedures distributed as part of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS installation or upgrade. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS system has only one distribution procedure library. Note Switching to a Different Procedure Library Most NCL procedures distributed as part of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS installation or upgrade are precompiled, and distributed in the distributed NCL object file. You can switch to a different procedure library by entering a new $volume.subvolume value in the Subvolume field and pressing the ENTER key. For example, assume your current Edit Services library is $DATA.ZNCLPGN. If you enter $DATA.ZNCLPGP in the Subvolume field, the Edit Services Selection List displays files in $DATA.ZNCLPGP, as the following screen shows: Edit Services : Selection List ZEDSPN1P File Spec: Subvolume: $DATA.ZNCLPGP T=Test a panel S/B=Browse C=Compile D=Delete E=Edit Filename Code EOF Last Modification Owner RWEP ZEX1401P NOV :30:32 100,21 NCNC ZEX1402P NOV :30:34 100,21 NCNC ZEX1403P NOV :30:36 100,21 NCNC ZEX1404P NOV :30:37 100,21 NCNC ZEX1405P NOV :30:38 100,21 NCNC ZEX1406P NOV :30:40 100,21 NCNC ZEX1407P NOV :30:42 100,21 NCNC ZEX1408P NOV :30:43 100,21 NCNC ZEX1409P NOV :30:47 100,21 NCNC ZEX1410P NOV :30:48 100,21 NCNC ZEX1501P NOV :30:49 100,21 NCNC F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Return F7=Prev F8=Next F11=Error List Tandem Computers Incorporated 9 3

204 Using Edit Services The Edit Services Function Keys Note Only local files can be accessed through Edit Services. If you include a \system in your subvolume or file name specification (for instance, \SYS1.$DATA.ZNCLPGN.MYFILE), the system must be your local system. If you try to switch to a volume or subvolume located at a remote system, your request is rejected and the following error message is displayed in the message line: ONLY LOCAL FILES MAY BE EDITED The Edit Services Function Keys In the Edit Services facility, the function keys are defined in Table 9-1. Table 9-1. Edit Services Function Key Definitions 6530 Function Key 3270 Function Key Definition F1 PF01 Displays help text for the Edit Services facility. F2 PF02 Executes SPLIT command: opens a new window. F3 PF03 Exits from the Edit Services facility: returns to the screen from which Edit Services was invoked (OCS or NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu). F4 PF04 Same as F3 (PF03) function key. F7 PF07 Scrolls backward to the previous page of files. F8 PF08 Scrolls forward to the next page of files. F9 PF09 Executes the SWAP command: opens a new window or, if two windows are already open, reverses their dimensions and enters the other window. F11 PF11 Displays error list after a trial compilation has been performed on an NCL source file. SHIFT and Not applicable Scrolls to the first page of files. PAGEUP SHIFT and PAGEDOWN Not applicable Scrolls to the last page of files Tandem Computers Incorporated

205 Using Edit Services Ownership and Security Attributes of New Files Creating a New File To create a new file, do one of the following: Invoke Edit Services, enter the name of the file to be created in the File Spec field, and press the ENTER key. From the OCS or the Command Entry facility, include the name of the file to edit when you invoke Edit Services. For example: EDIT nclproc1 Note If you include a file name when you invoke Edit Services from the OCS or the Command Entry facility, you return directly to your OCS or Command Entry facility window when you exit from the edit file, and you do not see the Edit Services Selection List. In either case, if you just enter a file name, the file is located in your default volume and subvolume. If you wish the file to be located in a different volume or subvolume, specify a complete path, as shown here: [ [ $volume. ] subvolume. ]filename When you exit from your new edit file and return to the selection list, the selection list is refreshed and displays information about the new file. Ownership and Security Attributes of New Files Each edit file you create in Edit Services has an owner, as described next and illustrated in Figure 9-2. The edit file owner is one of the following: If the PARAM SWGUID setting for your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system is set to YES, the file is owned by the current Guardian user ID. If the PARAM SWGUID setting for your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system is set to NO, the file is owned by the person who started NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Each edit file you create in Edit Services has a read, write, execute, and purge (RWEP) security assigned to it. The RWEP security is the default security setting associated with the Guardian user ID of the user who started NonStop NET/MASTER MS. (This setting is used regardless of the RWEP security settings that may be associated in the TACL environment with the Guardian user ID who owns the file.) Note If the PARAM SWGUID setting for your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system is YES, then when you enter Edit Services by invoking EDIT from the OCS command input line, you are operating under whatever Guardian user ID you have currently assigned to yourself with PROFILE GUID. Any files you create are owned by your current Guardian user ID, and you can only access a file that is not owned by your current Guardian user ID according to the RWEP settings of the file Tandem Computers Incorporated 9 5

206 Using Edit Services Changing the Security on a File Remember, if you switch to another Guardian user ID with the PROFILE GUID command while in OCS, as soon as you leave the OCS environment, you revert back to your default Guardian user ID. Figure 9-2. How File Ownership Is Determined Edit Services PARAM SWGUID YES Switch to current GUID NO Files owned by NNM owner Files owned by current GUID NNM owner is the initiator of NonStop NET/MASTER MS 012 Changing the Security on a File Use the Tandem File Utility Program (FUP) to change the RWEP security on files you own. Enter OCS or the Command Entry facility and issue the FUP SECURE command: [ OPSYS SEND ] FUP SECURE filename, "xxxx" For example, the following command string changes the RWEP setting of $DATA.ZNNMOP1.MYNCL from NUNU to CUCU: FUP SECURE $DATA.ZNNMOP1.MYNCL, "CUCU" For more information about file security, refer to the Guardian User s Guide and the File Utility Program (FUP) Reference Manual Tandem Computers Incorporated

207 Using Edit Services Locating a File or Group of Files Locating a File or Group of Files From the Edit Services Selection List you can locate either a specific file or a group of files that match a partial file name. To locate a specific file, do one of the following: If all file names in the selection list are displayed on a single screen, use the TAB key or the cursor keys to position the cursor next to the name of the file you want. If the file names in the selection list exceeds the number that can be displayed on a single screen: 1. Use the F7 (PF07) and F8 (PF08) function keys to page backward and forward, respectively, between multiple screens until you find the screen that displays the name of the file you want. 2. Once on the desired screen, use the TAB key or the cursor keys to position the cursor next to the name of the file you want. After locating the file, you can type the letter (T, S, B, C, D, or E) that corresponds to the operation you want to perform on the file. The meaning of these letters is displayed on the Edit Services Selection List screen. To locate a group of files that match a partial file name: 1. Specify a generic name in the File Spec field: that is, the first few characters of a file name followed by an asterisk (*). For example: INIT* 2. Press the ENTER key. If there is a match, the selection list is redisplayed beginning with the first file name that matches the partial file name. For example: INITABC INITCMD INITCMD1 INITTEMP 3. Use the TAB key or the cursor keys to position the cursor next to the name of the file you want. After locating the file, you can type the letter (T, S, B, C, D, or E) that corresponds to the operation you want to perform on the file. The meaning of these letters is displayed on the Edit Services Selection List screen Tandem Computers Incorporated 9 7

208 Using Edit Services Editing a File Editing a File Browsing a File To edit an existing file, do one of the following: From the Edit Services Selection List, do one of the following: Enter the name of the file to be edited in the File Spec field and press the ENTER key. Position your cursor to the left of the name of the file you wish to edit, type E, and press the ENTER key. If you mark more than one file, the following error message is displayed in the message line: Multiple markers selected When you exit from editing and return to the selection list, the selection list is refreshed and displays information about the updated file. From the OCS or the Command Entry facility, include the name of the file to edit when you invoke Edit Services. For example: EDIT nclproc1 If you invoke Edit Services from the OCS or the Command Entry facility, you return directly to your OCS or Command Entry facility window when you exit from the edit file and you do not see the Edit Services Selection List. Browsing an existing file invokes the editor in read-only mode and protects you from making changes to a file accidentally. You can only select files for browsing from the Edit Services Selection List. To browse an existing file, position your cursor to the left of the name of the file you wish to browse, type S or B, and press the ENTER key. If you mark more than one file, the following error message is displayed in the message line: Multiple markers selected Any changes you make to a file while in Browse mode are not recorded Tandem Computers Incorporated

209 Using Edit Services Restrictions on Using TEDIT Deleting a File You can only delete files from the Edit Services Selection List. To delete a file, position your cursor to the left of the name of the file you wish to delete, type D, and press the ENTER key. You may mark more than one file for deletion. You will be asked to confirm the deletion by responding to a confirmation prompt. If you have marked more than one file for deletion, the confirmation applies to all the files selected Edit Services : Selection List ZEDSPN1P File Spec: Subvolume: $DATA.ZNCLPGN Press Enter to confirm delete T=Test a panel S/B=Browse C=Compile D=Delete E=Edit Filename Code EOF Last Modification Owner RWEP AAREADME NOV :23:47 100,21 NONO BUILTIN NOV :23:48 100,21 NONO BUILTIN NOV :23:49 100,21 NONO D FILELIST NOV :23:51 100,21 NONO HELLO NOV :23:52 100,21 NONO HELLO NOV :23:53 100,21 NONO HELLO NOV :23:54 100,21 NONO INITCMD NOV :23:56 100,21 NONO LIST NOV :23:57 100,21 NONO MESSGEN NOV :23:58 100,21 NONO MSGPROC NOV :23:59 100,21 NONO D NCHECK NOV :24:00 100,21 NONO USERW NOV :24:01 100,21 NONO USERW NOV :24:02 100,21 NONO ZEX0401N NOV :24:03 100,21 NONO ZEX0402N NOV :24:04 100,21 NONO ZEX0403N NOV :24:05 100,21 NONO F12=Cancel Press the ENTER key to continue or the F12 (PF12) function key to cancel the delete request. If an error is found while deleting the selected file(s), deletion is stopped immediately. If the delete operation is successful, the selection list is refreshed without the file names just deleted. Restrictions on Using TEDIT When you invoke TEDIT from NonStop NET/MASTER MS, several commands that allow you to go beyond the scope of the normal editing tasks are disabled and unavailable. The command functions include: Executing a program within the editing session by using the TEDIT RUN command. Purging or permanently modifying TEDIT profiles. Interfacing with the TACL process that started NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Apart from these restrictions, the use of TEDIT from within NonStop NET/MASTER MS is standard, as described in the PS TEXT EDIT Reference Manual Tandem Computers Incorporated 9 9

210 Using Edit Services Performing a Trial Compilation of an NCL Procedure Performing a Trial Compilation of an NCL Procedure Checking the Results if There Are Errors or Warnings Edit Services provides a facility for performing a trial compilation of an NCL source file. Although you can create a source file in any library, the file must be in one of the following libraries for the trial compilation: 1. User procedure library assigned to you in the NCL Library Subvol field in your user ID definition record 2. Customized procedure library defined in PARAM NCLCUSTSRC 3. Distribution procedure library defined in PARAM NCLDISTSRC Edit Services always searches for the source file in the above libraries in the order given above, regardless of which file you actually select for trial compilation (the specified subvolume is irrelevant). For example, if two files of the same name exist in both your user procedure library and the customized procedure library, and you select the file in the latter for a trial compilation, Edit Services compiles the file in your user procedure library instead. To perform a trial compilation on an NCL source file, position your cursor to the left of the name of the NCL procedure you want to check, type C, and press the ENTER key. If the compilation is successful, the following message appears in the message line: *END* 0 ERRORS 0 WARNINGS If the compilation is not successful, the number of errors or warnings appears in the message line. For example: *END* 9 ERRORS 0 WARNINGS To examine the error list created by an unsuccessful test compilation, press the F11 (PF11) function key. Only the first 60 lines of diagnostics are displayed Tandem Computers Incorporated

211 Using Edit Services Testing a Panel The example below shows the error list generated by the unsuccessful compilation of $DATA.ZNCLPGN.ZEX0403N: Edit Services : NCL Compile Report ZEDSPN2P ZEX0403N 4 GOSUB ZEX0403N 4! ERROR: LABEL EXPECTED ZEX0403N 5 CND -PROFILE EMS NO ZEX0403N 5! ERROR: UNKNOWN VERB CND ZEX0403N 5 CND -PROFILE EMS NO ZEX0403N 5! ERROR: NUMERIC VALUE REQUIRED ZEX0403N 6 CMD -PROFILE TRUNC/5 ZEX0403N 6! ERROR: NUMERIC VALUE REQUIRED ZEX0403N 6 CMD -PROFILE TRUNC/5 ZEX0403N 6! ERROR: NUMERIC VALUE REQUIRED ZEX0403N 8 END zex0403n ZEX0403N 8! FATAL ERROR: OPEN STRING AT EOF *END* 6 ERRORS 0 WARNINGS F1=Help F3=Exit F7=Prev F8=Next If the error list exceeds more than one screen, use the F7 (PF07) and F8 (PF08) function keys to page backward and forward, respectively, through the error list. Press the F3 (PF03) or F4 (PF04) function key to return to the Edit Services Selection List screen. The diagnostics are maintained in memory, and you can always return to inspect the diagnostics in the same Edit Services session. Testing a Panel Edit Services provides a facility for testing the appearance of a panel description file. The testing facility enables you to view the appearance of a panel without compiling the NCL procedure to which it belongs. Although you can create a panel description file in any library, the file must be in one of the following libraries for testing: 1. User panel library assigned to you in the Panel Library Subvol field in your user ID definition record 2. Customized panel library defined in PARAM PNLCUSTSRC 3. Distribution panel library defined in PARAM PNLDISTSRC Edit Services always searches for the panel description file in those libraries in the order given above, regardless of which file you actually select for testing (the specified subvolume is irrelevant). For example, if two files of the same name exist in both your user panel library and the customized panel library, and you select the file in the latter for testing, Edit Services tests the file in your user panel library instead Tandem Computers Incorporated 9 11

212 Using Edit Services Testing a Panel Note Most panel description files distributed as part of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS installation or upgrade are precompiled, and distributed in the distributed panel object file. To perform a test of a panel description file, position your cursor to the left of the name of the file you want to view, type T, and press the ENTER key Edit Services : Selection List ZEDSPN1P File Spec: Subvolume: $DATA.ZNCLPGP T=Test a panel S/B=Browse C=Compile D=Delete E=Edit Filename Code EOF Last Modification Owner RWEP ZEX1401P NOV :37:56 100,21 NONO T ZEX1402P NOV :37:57 100,21 NONO ZEX1403P NOV :37:58 100,21 NONO ZEX1404P NOV :37:59 100,21 NONO ZEX1405P NOV :38:00 100,21 NONO ZEX1406P NOV :38:01 100,21 NONO ZEX1407P NOV :38:02 100,21 NONO ZEX1408P NOV :38:03 100,21 NONO ZEX1409P NOV :38:04 100,21 NONO ZEX1410P NOV :38:05 100,21 NONO ZEX1501P NOV :38:06 100,21 NONO F1=Help F3=Exit F4=Return F7=Prev F8=Next F11=Error List The panel appears on your screen as it would during execution of the NCL procedure that displays the panel. You enter values to satisfy mandatory input fields but the values are not acted on. Press the F3 (PF03) function key to return to the Edit Services Selection List screen. The following events will cause messages to appear on your screen: Specified panel description file was not found in any of the three libraries in the search path File security error File system error Panel description file coding error Panel run-time events: Field input error Panel timeout Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide for more information on testing a panel Tandem Computers Incorporated

213 What Is in This Section 10 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures The NonStop NET/MASTER Network Control Language (NCL) is a structured, high-level language that is ideally suited to writing procedures that perform system and network operations tasks. The discussion in this section assumes that you have minimal programming experience. Its focus is on creating simple NCL procedures to execute a series of NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) commands. The discussion is limited to a small subset of NCL core statements, verbs, and system variables. For a complete description of NCL, refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide and the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Reference Manual. Creating NCL Procedures Executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From an NCL Procedure Executing a NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command With an NCL CMD Statement An NCL procedure is a sequence of NCL statements. Use the Edit Services facility to create, list, edit, perform test compilations on, and delete NCL procedure source files. The Edit Services facility is described in Section 9, Using Edit Services. You can execute most NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from an NCL procedure. This includes timer commands, informational commands, and commands routed to remote systems. Command authority level checking applies to all commands executed from NCL procedures invoked under your user ID. In other words, if your NonStop NET/MASTER MS user ID definition record allows you to perform a task, any NCL procedure that executes under your control can also perform the task. An NCL procedure that executes under your control cannot perform tasks that your user ID definition record does not allow you to perform. You can issue a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command from within an NCL procedure in two ways: With a CMD statement, so results of the command are sent to the environment from which the executing procedure is invoked With the INTCMD verb, so results of the command are sent to the executing procedure When you issue a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command from within an NCL procedure by using a CMD core statement, the results of the command are passed to the owner of the current processing environment from which the NCL procedure is invoked. Results of the command are not sent to the executing procedure. The current processing environment is the environment (either primary or background) from which a command or NCL procedure is initiated, such as an OCS window Tandem Computers Incorporated 10 1

214 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures Executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands From an NCL Procedure As an example, if you execute an NCL procedure from an OCS window, the OCS window is considered to be the owner of the current processing environment. Thus, responses from any NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands issued with a CMD statement: for example, CMD "SHOW USERS" are displayed in the OCS message display area. Executing a NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command With an NCL INTCMD Verb When you issue a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command from within an NCL procedure by using an INTCMD verb, the command is executed in the dependent processing environment of the NCL procedure, and the results of the command are passed to the dependent response queue. Every NCL process has a dependent processing environment associated with it. The dependent processing environment maintains two queues: A dependent response queue A dependent request queue The initiating process is the only one that can read either queue. The text of the commands executed with INTCMD are not displayed on your terminal, nor are the results of the commands. The NCL procedure itself reads and analyzes the results. For example, you may choose to use INTCMD to issue a series of PROFILE commands to customize your OCS profile by using an NCL procedure: INTCMD "PROFILE CMDKEEP=NO" INTCMD "PROFILE PREFSYS=YES" INTCMD "PROFILE EMS=WARN" INTCMD "PROFILE MONMSG=YES" INTCMD "PROFILE NRDELCH=$" INTCMD "PROFILE DELCHAR=^" Using INTCMD instead of CMD prevents all the NNM0357 messages (as displayed below) from cluttering up your screen. NNM0357 PROFILE HAS CHANGED Note See The Concept of Processing Environments at the end of this section for further information on current, primary, background, and dependent processing environments. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide for a more detailed discussion Tandem Computers Incorporated

215 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures Using System Variables Restrictions Using System Variables When including a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command in an NCL procedure, you must enclose the command in quotes if it contains characters that NCL regards as operator characters or special characters such as the equal sign (=) and parentheses. To save you from worrying about the distinction, it is best to always enclose NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands in quotes when issuing them from within an NCL procedure. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide for more information. NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands that cannot be entered from an NCL procedure using either the CMD statement or the INTCMD verb include the following:!? CS- CS+ FC HISTORY PARAM NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands that can be entered from an NCL procedure using the CMD statement, but not the INTCMD verb, include the following: AUTOHOLD CLEAR K NRDRET ORDER PAGE The description of each NonStop NET/MASTER MS command in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual addresses command entry restrictions and other NCL issues when issuing the command from within an NCL procedure. System variables hold system-maintained values such as the following: The current time (&SYS.TIME) and date (&SYS.DATE.nn) This example displays the current time and date: WRITE DATA="The date and time is "&SYS.DATE.2 &SYS.TIME The current day of the week (&SYS.DATE.DAY) You might use this system variable to perform a certain function within a procedure only on a particular day of the week. For instance: IF &SYS.DATE.DAY EQ SUN THEN EXEC SUNDAY ELSE EXEC WEEKDAY Tandem Computers Incorporated 10 3

216 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures Sample NCL Procedure The current OCS window identifier (&SYS.OCS.ID) and the background OCS window identifier (&SYS.OCS.IDO) The following example sets the OCS window identifier of the first OCS window you enter to ONE and the OCS window identifier of the second OCS window you enter to TWO. Including similar statements as part of the NCL procedure that is executed as soon as you enter OCS sets the window identifiers for you. IF &SYS.OCS.IDO \= "ONE" THEN CMD "-OCSID ONE" ELSE CMD "-OCSID TWO" System variables are all prefixed with &SYS. and are distributed with your NonStop NET/MASTER MS software. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Reference Manual for a complete description of all system variables. Sample NCL Procedure Of the many types of NCL procedures you can write, a particularly useful one would be an NCL procedure that is automatically executed when you enter OCS. Such a procedure could tailor your OCS profile, define function keys, establish local equate commands, log you on to remote systems, and so on. The following example sets up some local equates, defines three function keys, tests the setting of the current OCS identifiers, assigns an OCS identifier for each window based on the value of the variables, and sets up two different operations environments. If executed on entry to OCS, this procedure always identifies the first window as PROD and sets up a production environment, and the second window as TEST and sets up a test environment there. The procedure maintains this situation regardless of the order in which you enter and exit the windows Tandem Computers Incorporated

217 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures Sample NCL Procedure Suppose you create an NCL procedure with a file name of SETUP in Edit Services that contains the following: setup: PROCEDURE CMD "PROFILE CMDKEEP=NO" CMD "EQUATE MSGOFF PROFILE EMS=NO MONMSG=NO NCLTEST=YES" CMD "EQUATE MSGON PROFILE EMS=WARN MONMSG=YES" CMD "EQUATE NY ROUTE NM1EAS+" CMD "EQUATE LA ROUTE NM2WES+" CMD "EQUATE SM MSG ALL+" CMD "FK SF13 SUFF,+FROM JENN" CMD "FK SF14 IMM,K;;SHOW USERS" CMD "FK SF15 IMM,SHOW LINKS" IF &SYS.OCS.IDO \= "PROD" THEN DO CMD "-OCSID PROD" CMD MSGON CMD NRDRET CMD "PROFILE PREFSYS=YES" CMD "PROFILE NRDELCH=$" CMD "PROFILE DELCHAR=^" CMD "SHOW LINKS" END ELSE DO CMD "-OCSID TEST" CMD MSGOFF CMD "PROFILE NRDELCH=/" CMD "PROFILE DELCHAR=\" CMD "SHOW NCL" END END setup To cause this procedure to be executed automatically whenever you enter OCS, enter the following command in the OCS command input line and press the ENTER key: PROFILE INITCMD="START SETUP" The PROFILE INITCMD command causes the value in the Initial OCS Command field in your user ID definition record to be replaced by START SETUP. Note Contrast the PROFILE INITCMD and PROFILE MSGPROC commands. The PROFILE MSGPROC command does not change the value of the Message Procedure field in your user ID definition record Tandem Computers Incorporated 10 5

218 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures Performing a Test Compilation on an NCL Procedure The equates and function key definitions set by this procedure allow you to: Type SM followed by a message in the OCS command line. For example: SM SHUTDOWN in 10 minutes. Please log off. Then press the SF13 function key to append your name to the end of the message and send it to all operators with PROFILE MSG=YES and/or PROFILE UNSOL=YES. Press the SF14 function key to find out when everyone is logged off. Route commands to NM1EAS by entering NY followed by the command string, and to NM2WES by entering LA followed by the command string. Performing a Test Compilation on an NCL Procedure Perform a test compilation on an NCL procedure to check the syntax of the procedure without executing it. It is good practice to perform a test compilation of any NCL procedure you write before you attempt to execute it. To perform test compilations of NCL procedure source files, use either: The Compile option in Edit Services (see Section 9, Using Edit Services ). The NCLCHECK command in OCS or the Command Entry facility (refer to the description of NCLCHECK in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual). Note Using the NCLCHECK command in the Command Entry facility gives you the option of printing your compilation results if you have many errors. The advantage of performing a test compilation in Edit Services is that you can list the errors in the Edit Services Compile Report, correct them, and recompile the program without leaving Edit Services. A test compilation can detect three types of mistakes. From least to most severe, these are: A warning, which is a mistake that would not stop an NCL process from executing but may cause it to execute unpredictably. An error, which is a mistake that would cause an NCL process to stop executing. A fatal error, which is a mistake that causes compilation to stop. A test compilation does not check the logic of an NCL procedure. Thus, a successful compilation does not guarantee that the NCL procedure will execute as expected. Use the DEBUG command to detect errors in logic. The complete syntax of the DEBUG command is described in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual Tandem Computers Incorporated

219 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures Executing NCL Procedures Compiling an NCL Procedure Executing NCL Procedures When you execute an NCL procedure, NCL automatically compiles it if it has not been previously compiled. The compilation process creates object code from the source file. NCL stores the object code of every compiled source file belonging to you in the one object file. The object file for your object code is defined in the NCL Object File Name field in your user ID definition record (see Section 2, User ID Management Services (UMS), for more information). An NCL procedure that is executing is called an NCL process. You can invoke an NCL procedure for: Asynchronous execution by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS START command. The NCL procedure is executed immediately, independently of, and concurrently with, any other NCL procedure(s) executing within the same environment. When an NCL procedure is invoked by using the START command or the START verb (from an NCL process), it is immediately allocated a unique identifier. This is called an NCL process identifier (NCL ID). Serial execution by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS EXEC command. The NCL procedure is scheduled for execution pending completion of any queued, serially invoked NCL procedures. When an NCL procedure is invoked by using the EXEC command, it is allocated an NCL ID when it begins execution, not when it is placed on the queue. You can issue a START or EXEC command from any command input line, including the OCS, the Command Entry facility, and the Activity Log Browse facility command input lines. Note You cannot execute an NCL procedure from a TACL prompt. NCL procedures must be executed from within NonStop NET/MASTER MS. If your system parameter SYSPARMS AUTOEXEC is set to YES or START, you can also execute an NCL procedure by simply entering the name of the NCL procedure (without the START or EXEC command) on a command input line and pressing the ENTER key. NonStop NET/MASTER MS issues an implicit START command, and the NCL procedure is executed asynchronously. Note If you receive the following message when you try to execute an NCL procedure without using the START or EXEC command, it means that the SYSPARMS AUTOEXEC setting is NO or OPSYS: NNM0201 INVALID COMMAND "procedure" Tandem Computers Incorporated 10 7

220 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures Executing Persistent NCL Processes Executing Persistent NCL Processes NCL Procedure Libraries You can use the START verb to execute a persistent NCL process: an NCL process that is automatically restarted by NonStop NET/MASTER MS after failure. A persistent NCL process can only execute in the background processing environment associated with a virtual user (see Executing NCL Procedures in the Background, later in this section, for more information). See the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide and the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Reference Manual for more information on the START verb and persistent NCL processes. NCL procedure libraries are subvolumes that store NCL procedures. An NCL procedure library can store source files, object files, or both. There are three types of procedure libraries: User procedure library A user procedure library is where source code is stored for NCL procedures belonging to a particular user or group of users. All users may have access to the same library, or each user may have access to a private library. The maximum number of private libraries is determined by the number of NonStop NET/MASTER MS users. Your default user library is assigned in the NCL Library Subvolume field in your user ID definition record. Customized procedure library The customized procedure library is where source code is stored for customized system-level NCL procedures, such as a customized EMSPROC or LOGPROC procedure. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS system has only one customized procedure library. To find out the location of the customized procedure library for your system, issue a SHOW PARAM command and look at the PARAM NCLCUSTSRC value. Distribution procedure library The distribution procedure library is where source code is stored for some NCL procedures distributed as part of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS installation or upgrade. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS system has only one distribution procedure library. To find out the location of the distribution procedure library for your system, issue a SHOW PARAM command and look at the PARAM NCLDISTSRC value. Collectively, the customized and distribution procedure libraries are called the system procedure library Tandem Computers Incorporated

221 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures The Default NCL Procedure Search Path The Default NCL Procedure Search Path By default, when an NCL procedure is invoked, NonStop NET/MASTER MS searches for it using a path called the default NCL procedure search path. It is helpful to think of the default NCL procedure search path in two parts: the NCL procedure library search path, which consists of three NCL procedure libraries, and the NCL object file search path, which is the distributed NCL object file (see the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide for more information). The complete default NCL procedure search path is the following: 1. User procedure library 2. System procedure library, which includes the following: a. Customized procedure library b. Distribution procedure library 3. Distributed NCL object file Figure 10-1 illustrates the default NCL procedure search path. Figure Default NCL Procedure Search Path User Procedure Library Customized Procedure Library Distribution Procedure Library Distributed NCL Object File 013 Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS System Management Guide for information about the customized NCL procedure search path Tandem Computers Incorporated 10 9

222 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures The NCL Process Identifier The NCL Process Identifier Terminating Execution of an NCL Process NonStop NET/MASTER MS automatically assigns every NCL procedure a unique NCL process identifier (NCL ID) when the procedure begins execution. The NCL ID is used to uniquely identify an NCL process, usually when the NCL process is to be the target of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. NCL procedures executed using the START command are immediately allocated an NCL ID. NCL procedures executed with the EXEC command or submitted for execution at a particular time or frequency are allocated an NCL ID when they begin execution. Use the SHOW NCL command to display the NCL IDs of NCL processes. There are several ways to terminate the execution of an NCL process: Exit from an OCS window: all NCL processes executing in the OCS window are terminated. Log off from NonStop NET/MASTER MS: all NCL processes associated with your user ID are terminated. Note Jobs submitted to a background process have the user ID of NonStop NET/MASTER MS and survive after you log off. Issue the FLUSH command with the ID operand (use the SHOW NCL command to determine the NCL ID of the NCL process you want to terminate). Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for more information about the FLUSH command. Viewing the Contents of NCL Libraries and Files You can list and view the contents of an NCL library or a file in two ways: From Edit Services: When you enter Edit Services and when you return to the Edit Services Selection List screen after exiting from TEDIT, the names of files in your user procedure library are displayed in alphabetic order. You can display the contents of a particular file by using the S or B option (see Section 9, Using Edit Services ). From OCS, by using NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands: Use the SHOW FILEINFO command to display the names of files in your user procedure library (and the names of files in other locations). Use the LIST command to display the contents of a particular file. Refer to the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Command Reference Manual for more information on the SHOW FILEINFO and LIST commands Tandem Computers Incorporated

223 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures Executing NCL Procedures in the Background Using Timer Commands to Execute NCL Procedures Executing NCL Procedures in the Background Your NonStop NET/MASTER MS system has two timer commands: The AT command executes other NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands at a certain time. The EVERY command executes other NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands at a certain interval. You can use the AT and EVERY commands with the START and EXEC commands to control the time and frequency at which NCL procedures are executed. Issuing timer commands is discussed in detail in Section 3, Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands. Virtual users are processes that operate in the background and do not have terminals associated with them. They provide a processing environment where NCL procedures can be run and commands can be executed without having to interact with a terminal. NonStop NET/MASTER MS creates five virtual users when it starts. These virtual users process NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands on behalf of other users or NCL processes, exist as long as NonStop NET/MASTER MS is running (unless explicitly stopped), and have user IDs associated with them. They are: BMON, the Background Monitor BLOG, the Background Logger BSYS, the Background System process EMSP, which runs the EMSPROC procedure LOGP, which runs the LOGPROC procedure You can submit an NCL procedure for a virtual user to execute by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS SUBMIT command. The processing of the procedure is managed entirely by the virtual user and is not affected if you then log off from NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Background environments are therefore ideal for systemmonitoring functions such as executing a procedure that regularly checks the status of network components. What happens to the output depends on the virtual user processing the procedure. For example, the results of procedures sent to BLOG are sent only to the activity log. The results of procedures sent to BMON are sent to all monitor-class operator terminals as well as to the activity log. The following example tells the BMON to execute the NCL procedure MYPROC: SUBMIT BMON START MYPROC Virtual users and background processing of commands and procedures are described in more detail in Section 3, Issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS Commands, and in the NonStop NET/MASTER NCL Programmer s Guide Tandem Computers Incorporated 10 11

224 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures The Concept of Processing Environments The Concept of Processing Environments The Primary Processing Environment The Background Processing Environment The Dependent Processing Environment A processing environment is the environment in which NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands and NCL procedures execute. Commands and NCL procedures can execute in: A primary processing environment A background processing environment A dependent processing environment The current processing environment (primary, background, or dependent) The primary processing environment is associated with the window from which the command or NCL procedure is invoked. Each window has a primary processing environment that provides the internal NonStop NET/MASTER MS services and facilities required to execute NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands, including those that execute NCL procedures. When you run an NCL procedure from OCS, its primary processing environment is the primary processing environment associated with the OCS window from which it is run. A background processing environment is an environment in which a virtual user operates. Each of the five system-wide virtual users exists in its own background processing environment (see the preceding subsection, Executing NCL Procedures in the Background ). Every NCL process has a dependent processing environment associated with it, in which it can asynchronously execute commands and NCL procedures. The dependent processing environment allows the initiating procedure to perform several functions at once. Commands issued with the INTCMD verb are executed in the dependent environment. The dependent processing environment maintains two queues: A dependent response queue, to which the results from commands and procedures executed in the dependent environment are returned. A dependent request queue, in which messages sent to the initiating NCL process by another NCL process or by an OCS operator are placed. The initiating NCL process is the only one that can read either queue. An NCL procedure executing in a dependent processing environment may itself have a dependent processing environment. If an NCL process terminates, all NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands and NCL processes that are executing in the dependent processing environment, and all others below that, terminate as well Tandem Computers Incorporated

225 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures The Concept of Processing Environments The Current Processing Environment The current processing environment is the environment from which a command or NCL procedure is initiated. Commands issued with the CMD statement are executed in the current processing environment, and results are returned to the owner of the processing environment, not to the initiating NCL process. For example, if an NCL procedure running in an OCS window contains a CMD "SHOW USERS" statement, the results of the SHOW USERS command are returned to the OCS window. If an NCL procedure submitted to the Background Monitor contains the same statement, the results of the SHOW USERS command are sent to all users profiled to receive monitor-class messages Tandem Computers Incorporated 10 13

226 Automating Operations Tasks With NCL Procedures The Concept of Processing Environments (This page left intentionally blank) Tandem Computers Incorporated

227 What Is in This Section 11 User Services The User Services option on the NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS) Primary Menu screen provides an entry point into an installation-defined application or menu-selectable set of services. When you select User Services, the particular application or menu that appears on your screen is a function of the NCL procedure defined in the User Services Procedure field in your user ID definition record. Different operators may have access to different user services applications. If you do not have a user services NCL procedure associated with your user ID definition record, no User Services option is displayed in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu screen. This section serves as a place holder for any site-specific documentation describing the options available through your NonStop NET/MASTER MS User Services facility Tandem Computers Incorporated 11 1

228 User Services What Is in This Section (This page left intentionally blank) Tandem Computers Incorporated

229 Glossary This glossary defines NonStop NET/MASTER and Tandem system terms and abbreviations used in this manual. %INCLUDE rule. An RMS message action rule that allows a message handler to use rules from more than one ruleset. %START rule. An RMS message action rule that instructs a message handler to perform user-defined initialization actions on startup. => prompt. Any prompt that ends with =>: for example, Command ===>, M=>, and Select Option ===>. absolute time. A specific time of day expressed in hours, minutes, and seconds. abuttal operation. An operation that results in two adjacent terms in an expression being concatenated into a single string. action code. A code that you type against an entry on a selection list panel to select that entry for a specific operation. active list. A list in global memory that holds a copy of all preloaded NCL procedures and, if procedure sharing is allowed, copies of all NCL processes executing in the current Guardian process. active panel queue. A list in global memory that holds copies of panel description files. Activity Log Browse facility. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS facility that browses the activity log. Activity Log Process (LOGP). A virtual user that executes the LOGPROC NCL procedure. The results of commands sent to it for execution are sent to the activity log. activity log. A log maintained by NonStop NET/MASTER MS of important system activity. advanced mode. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS operating mode in which no NC processes are present and at least one static or dynamic occurrence of each other process class (BK, EM, IS, and MS) is present. See also basic mode and extended basic mode. advisory lock. A lock that controls access to resources, provided all applications agree to use the lock. alternate key. An alternate value (to the value of the primary key) used by NCL to locate a record in a user database. application process. A process that implements use of NonStop NET/MASTER MS functions. BK, EM, IS, MS, and NC processes are application processes. argument. A value passed to an NCL procedure or function when executed. asynchronous panel. A panel designed to allow the issuing NCL process to execute in parallel with the display of the panel Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 1

230 Glossary attribute byte. The data that defines the display attributes of a field on a screen. The attribute byte is displayed as a blank on the screen. It is represented by a field character in a panel description file. authority level. A number assigned to users, NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands, and NonStop NET/MASTER MS operands that signifies the authority to execute a command or operand. Authority levels range from 0 (lowest) through 255 (highest). autohold. A technique available in OCS for automatically controlling the flow of messages on an OCS window. automatic function selection. The automatic selection of a function from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS primary menu when a user logs on and is allowed to choose only one function. Background Logger (BLOG). A virtual user. The results of commands sent to BLOG for execution are sent to the activity log. Background Monitor (BMON). A virtual user. The results of commands sent to BMON for execution are sent to the activity log and to all users who can receive monitor-class messages. Background System Process (BSYS). A virtual user that executes the INIT and READY procedures. The results of commands sent to it for execution are sent to the activity log and to all users who can receive monitor-class messages. background processing environment. A processing environment in which a virtual user operates. The destination of the output from this environment depends on the type of virtual user. Virtual users include BLOG, BMON, and BSYS. background services (BK) process. The application process that supports the BSYS, BMON, BLOG, and LOGP virtual users and their background processing environments, handles commands submitted to these virtual users, and supports the system-level LOGPROC NCL procedure. base procedure. The top-level NCL procedure from which all other NCL procedures and functions are called. It is the first NCL procedure to be executed when an NCL process starts. base ruleset. A ruleset that comes with RMS. BASERULE. Name of a base ruleset in RMS. The BASERULE ruleset enables you to automate the recovery tasks for various standard system errors. basic information unit (BIU). In SNA, the unit of data and control information passed between half-sessions. It consists of a request/response header (RH) followed by a request/response unit. See also Systems Network Architecture. basic mode. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS operating mode in which one static or dynamic NC process is present but no BK, EM, IS, or MS processes are present. See also advanced mode and extended basic mode. binary string. In NCL, a quoted string containing the digits 0 or 1, or blanks, followed either by the letter B or b. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

231 Glossary BIU. See basic information unit. BK process. See background services process. blank concatenation operation. An operation that replaces multiple blanks between two terms in an expression by a single blank. block. A logical group of statements. Blocks are bounded by core statements such as PROCEDURE and END, FUNCTION and END, DO and END, and SELECT and END. BLOG. See Background Logger. BMON. See Background Monitor. Boolean. An adjective describing a logical entity, operator, or operation; named after the philosopher George Boole. Boolean operation. A logical operation on an expression that gives a value of 1 if the comparison is TRUE or 0 if the comparison is FALSE. Boolean operations use the AND, NOT, OR, and XOR operators. Boolean result. The result from evaluating an expression using a Boolean operator: the result is either 1 (TRUE) or 0 (FALSE). breakpoint. A position in an NCL process, established using the DEBUG BREAKPOINT command, at which NCL suspends execution. BSYS. See Background System Process. built-in function. A function supplied with NCL, providing access to information that could otherwise require extensive coding to acquire. byte boundary. The conceptual point between every eight bits in a block of data. The point separates one byte from another. callee. The NCL procedure or function called by another NCL procedure or function. callee list. The share list specified by a callee to accept from a caller. The callee specifies the list of variables it will accept from a caller in the PROCEDURE or FUNCTION statement that declares the procedure or function. caller. The NCL procedure or function that calls another NCL procedure or function. caller list. The share list specified by a caller to share to a callee. The caller specifies the list of variables to share to a callee on a CONTROL statement or a CALL statement. character mode. A technique used for defining an alphanumeric character as a field character in a panel description file. CIP. See Conversational Interface Process. CMDSVR. See Command Server Process. CMI. See Communications Management Interface. CNM. See communications network management Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 3

232 Glossary COBOL85. The Tandem compiler and run-time support for the American National Standard Programming Language COBOL, X The code for most Pathway server processes is written using COBOL85. Command Entry facility. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS facility used as an alternative to OCS for entering commands. See also Operator Control Services. Command prompt. Command ===>. You enter commands at a Command prompt. Command Server Process. The process with which NonStop NET/MASTER MS communicates to handle Distributed Systems Network Management (DSNM) subsystem commands (to SPI-based subsystems). Command Services. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that processes NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. command. A word or an abbreviation that describes an action and tells NonStop NET/MASTER MS to perform that action. command authority level. A number assigned to a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. Authority levels range from 0 (lowest) through 255 (highest). A user whose authority level is equal to or greater than the command authority level can execute the command. command group. A record of an RMS ruleset that contains a sequence of NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. command help database. The two UDBs that contain NonStop NET/MASTER MS command help information. See also customized command help database and distributed command help database. command help edit file. An edit file used in an export or import operation to or from the command help database, respectively. command help file. A file that contains NonStop NET/MASTER MS command help information. See also customized command help file and distributed command help file. command input line. A location in NonStop NET/MASTER MS where a real user can type a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. command replacement. The replacement of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command with an NCL procedure of the same name by using the SYSPARMS CMDREPL command. command stack. See history buffer. command string. A complete NonStop NET/MASTER MS command, including the command name and any operands. Communications Management Interface (CMI). A network management utility that allows operators to configure, control, and inquire about Tandem data communications subsystems. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

233 Glossary communications network management (CNM). An IBM architecture that describes the structure of messages traveling to and from SNA devices. compilation. The process of creating object code from a source file of NCL statements. compilation error. An error in an NCL procedure detected during compilation (before execution). There are three types of compilation errors: from least to most severe these are warnings, errors, and fatal errors. See also error, fatal error, run-time error, and warning. compiler. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS preprocessor that creates an object file from a source file when an NCL procedure is invoked. compiler directive. An NCL statement that begins with two percent signs (%%) and is used to control the compiler during the compilation of an NCL procedure. complex variable. A variable that contains more than one ampersand (&). compound variable. A variable that contains segments (substems) between periods (.). condition handler. A routine that traps a specified condition detected by an NCL process. condition name. The name of a specified condition that causes a block of NCL statements to be executed when the condition occurs. The condition can be an error condition. The block of NCL statements that is executed is referred to as an ON block or condition handler. CONFIG file. See configuration file. configuration file. Sometimes called a CONFIG file, an edit file containing PARAM commands that set the startup parameters. Console Extras. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that allows a user to access external Guardian utilities. context. The setting in which a lexical element becomes meaningful within an NCL statement. control character. A character whose occurrence in a particular context initiates, modifies, or stops an operation. In NCL, control characters are illegal. control environment. The current settings of the CONTROL verb during the execution of an NCL process. control options. The RMS options that set up the basic operational criteria for the rules in a ruleset. A ruleset always contains a control options record. control part. The part of a panel description file containing panel control statements. Conversational Interface Process (CIP). The process with which NonStop NET/MASTER MS communicates to handle Distributed Systems Network Management (DSNM) utility commands. core statement. An intrinsic part of NCL. Its availability does not depend on the enabling of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS feature Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 5

234 Glossary correlation key. An RMS key that restricts the use of a rule feature to messages with the same key. One example of a key is a text string containing variables. CPU weight. The relative availability of a CPU for the creation of dynamic processes. cultural indicator. An indicator that identifies the culture of command help information. culture. A set of features such as language; spelling; character set; conventions used for representing date, time, and currency formats; and so on that describe the characteristics of command help information. current context. The setting in which a particular lexical element becomes meaningful within an NCL statement. current execution environment. The environment in which a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command or NCL process is currently executing. The environment could be a top-level environment, a primary processing environment, a background processing environment, or a dependent processing environment. current file. The file targeted by the current FILE verb. cursor deletion. See NRD message cursor deletion. customized command help database. After being opened as a user database (UDB), the file that contains customized command help information. customized command help file. Before being opened as a user database (UDB), the file that contains customized command help information. customized NCL procedure search path. An NCL procedure search path that includes one or more NCL object files created by a user and defined as part of the search path. See also default NCL procedure search path. customized panel description file. A panel description file in the customized panel library. customized panel library. A library that contains customized panel description files. customized panel search path. An NCL procedure search path that includes one or more panel object files created by a user and defined as part of the search path. See also default panel search path. customized procedure. An NCL procedure in the customized procedure library. customized procedure library. A library that contains the source code of customized NCL procedures. cutting back. The premature dismantling of a nested environment, NCL procedure, or function to the current nesting level. Data Definition Language (DDL). A Tandem product for defining data objects and translating object definitions into source code for programming languages and other products on NonStop systems. data entry panel. A panel that allows you to enter data, for example, to define an RMS rule. DDL. See Data Definition Language. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

235 Glossary DDL data dictionary. A database consisting of prenamed and predefined files created by the DDL compiler or Pathmaker. deadly embrace. A situation in which a resource required by one NCL process is indefinitely locked by another NCL process. debug. To locate and correct errors in an NCL process. decompilation. The process of creating NCL statements from object code. Decompilation occurs during the debugging of an NCL process, when using the DEBUG commands. dedicated terminal. A terminal opened for use by NonStop NET/MASTER MS using the OPENTERM command. dedicated user. A real user logged on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS using a dedicated terminal. The user s session with NonStop NET/MASTER MS begins and ends with the display of the logon screen. default. The value used when you do not supply a value. default configuration. The configuration established by using both the default startup configuration and default system configuration. default delivery exit NCL procedure. An optional user exit NCL procedure that processes messages not accounted for by an RMS rule. default NCL procedure search path. The search path NonStop NET/MASTER MS uses by default to locate an NCL procedure. The path is: user procedure library, customized procedure library, distribution procedure library, distributed NCL procedure object file. See also customized NCL procedure search path. default panel search path. The search path NonStop NET/MASTER MS uses by default to locate a panel description file. The path is: user panel library, customized panel library, distribution panel library, distributed panel object file. See also customized panel search path. default ruleset. An RMS ruleset that a message handler uses when you start a handler without specifying a ruleset. A user has a default ruleset only if one is allocated. default search path. See default NCL procedure search path and default panel search path. default startup configuration. The configuration established by using the default settings of all startup parameters. default system configuration. The configuration established by using the default settings of all system parameters. delete operator message (DOM) ID. The attribute of a full non-roll-delete message that uniquely identifies the message and is used to delete it. It consists of the domain ID of the system from which the message originated, and a NRD ID (a unique number assigned by NonStop NET/MASTER MS to the NRD message). delete record. A record in one file that logically deletes a record in a related file Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 7

236 Glossary delimited UDB. A user database in which each field in a record is separated from the next field by hexadecimal FF (called a field separator). dependent processing environment. A processing environment controlled and owned by an NCL process. The output from this environment goes to the NCL process. dependent queue. A queue owned by the NCL process that is controlling the associated dependent processing environment: either a request queue or a response queue. dependent request queue. A dependent queue owned by an NCL process whose main purpose is to receive requests from the INTQ command. dependent response queue. A dependent queue owned by an NCL process whose main purpose is to receive the responses of NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. detailed help section. The detailed description of a command in a command help edit file. direct function selection. The selection of a function by specifying all the options that uniquely identify the function (used in panel skipping). display part. The part of a panel description file containing the input and output fields that are displayed on a screen. Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS facility used to display and update system parameters. Distributed Systems Management (DSM). A set of Tandem software applications, tools, and services that facilitates management of systems and networks. Distributed Systems Network Management (DSNM). A Tandem product for monitoring and controlling objects in a network. distributed command help database. After being opened as a user database (UDB), the file that contains distributed command help information. distributed command help file. Before being opened as a user database (UDB), the file that contains distributed command help information. distributed NCL object file. The file distributed with NonStop NET/MASTER MS that contains the object code for most NCL procedures required by NonStop NET/MASTER MS. distributed panel description file. A panel description file in the distribution panel library. distributed panel object file. The file distributed with NonStop NET/MASTER MS that contains the object code for most panel description files required by NonStop NET/MASTER MS. distributed procedure. An NCL procedure in the distribution procedure library. distribution panel library. A library that contains distributed panel description files. distribution procedure library. A library that contains the source code of NCL procedures distributed as part of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS installation or upgrade. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

237 Glossary DO group. A group of NCL statements enclosed by matching DO and END core statements that is executed only once. DO loop. A group of NCL statements enclosed by matching DO and END core statements that can be executed more than once. DOM ID. See delete operator message (DOM) ID. domain. A logical division within a network. domain ID. A character string of one through four characters used to identify a domain. A domain ID is the first part of a DOM ID. DSM. See Distributed Systems Management. DSNM. See Distributed Systems Network Management. dynamic preparsing. A type of preparsing (when displaying a panel) that shifts fields to the right of substituted data during the preparse phase to accommodate differing substituted data lengths. dynamic process. An application process with dynamic presence: that is, a process designed to be present as required in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS processing environment. See also static process. dynamic rule. An RMS message action rule where a variable determines the value of the primary trigger. dynamic terminal. A terminal opened for use by NonStop NET/MASTER MS by using the NNM program from TACL. dynamic user. A real user logged on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS using a dynamic terminal. The user s session with NonStop NET/MASTER MS begins and ends with a TACL prompt. Edit Services. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that provides access to the Tandem text editor, PS Text Edit (TEDIT), to create and maintain NCL procedures and panel description files. edit file. The Tandem unstructured file with a file code of 101 (also called an edit format file ). element. A data structure, understood by Mapping Services, consisting of a header immediately followed by data. element header. The beginning of an element. An element header consists of two parts: a length field and a key field. EM process. See event management services process. emergency shutdown. A shutdown operation started by the NonStop NET/MASTER MS control process (NCP). See also immediate shutdown and normal shutdown. EMS. See Event Management Service. EMS event collector. A Guardian process, part of the Tandem EMS subsystem, that collects and stores messages. The default EMS event collector is $ Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 9

238 Glossary EMS event distributor. An EMS process that distributes event messages from event logs to requesting management applications, to a collector on another node, or to printers, devices, or files. EMS message. A message generated internally by EMSPROC and identified by the letter E when displayed on an OCS window. EMS message prefix. The identifier that can precede a message from the EMS subsystem when it is displayed on an OCS window. The prefix identifies the Tandem system and/or the Guardian process that generated the message. EMSP. See Event Management Service Process. EMSPROC. A system-level NCL procedure that intercepts and processes messages from the EMS subsystem. enclosed element. An element inside another element. enclosed MDO variable. A mapped data object variable inside another mapped data object variable. enclosing element. An element that contains one or more elements. enclosing MDO variable. A mapped data object variable that contains one or more mapped data object variables. encoding rule. A rule used by Mapping Services to determine the order and composition of the length field and the key field of a map header or element header. Enscribe. A Tandem disk file access method that is supported by the Guardian file system. Two types of Enscribe files are accessible from NCL: structured and unstructured. entry-sequenced UDB. A structured Enscribe user database consisting of variable-length records that are always appended to the file in the order in which they are presented. The records in an entry-sequenced user database are arranged physically and logically in the order in which they are added to the file. enumerated MDO variable. A mapped data object variable that stores raw data representing a symbolic name. environment. An area in which NonStop NET/MASTER MS users, NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands, and NCL processes operate. An environment is designed to limit the default activities of these users, commands, and processes. environmental profile. A profile that determines what a user can do in an environment. The user can change certain aspects of this profile by using the NonStop NET/MASTER MS PROFILE command. An RMS ruleset can contain an environmental profile record that a message handler can use to set up its execution environment. equate. A symbol defined to correspond to some text by the EQUATE command. The text is normally one or more NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. There are two types of equates: local and global. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

239 Glossary error. A condition that causes the execution of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command, the compilation of an NCL procedure, or the execution of an NCL process to fail (a run-time error). In NCL, a condition caused during compilation that would cause run-time errors if the NCL procedure were executed. A message that begins with ERROR is displayed. Compilation continues but no object is produced. See also compilation error, fatal error, run-time error, and warning. error attribute. An attribute acquired by a variable used in a panel or referred to by the SETERR operand of the ASSIGN verb. error field. A field in a panel that displays an error message when an error is detected by Panel Services. error handler. A routine that traps a run-time error in an NCL process. Event Management Service (EMS). A software facility that provides event-message collection, logging, and distribution facilities for the operating system. Event Management Service Process (EMSP). A virtual user that executes the EMSPROC NCL procedure. The results of commands sent to EMSP for execution are sent to the activity log. event. A significant change in some condition in the system or network: for example, events can be operational errors, changes in summary states, notifications of limits exceeded, or requests for action. event management services (EM) process. The application process that supports the interface to Event Management Service (EMS), supports the EMSP virtual user and its background processing environment, handles commands submitted to this virtual user, and supports the system-level EMSPROC NCL procedure. event message. In programmatic interfaces based on Subsystem Programmatic Interface (SPI), a special kind of SPI message that describes an event occurring in the system or network. In NonStop NET/MASTER MS, the displayed form of such a message is shown as text. See also Subsystem Programmatic Interface. exclusive OR (XOR). The Boolean operator that results in a value of 1 (TRUE) if one but not both adjacent terms in an expression are true: otherwise the operator results in a value of 0 (FALSE). See also inclusive OR (OR). execution error. An error detected during the execution of an NCL process. exit NCL procedure. A user-written NCL procedure that can be invoked by and executes in line with an RMS message handler. That is, when the message handler invokes the exit NCL procedure, NCL suspends the message handler until the exit completes. The exit can provide data to the message handler and perform actions that RMS does not directly support but are required by the installation. Expand. The Tandem network software that links together geographically distributed Tandem NonStop systems to create a network having the same reliability, capacity to preserve data integrity, and potential for modular expansion as a single system. explicit declaration. The definition of a procedure or function beginning with the PROCEDURE or FUNCTION core statement, respectively Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 11

240 Glossary explicit execution. A method of executing an NCL procedure by using an explicit EXEC or START command, or the START verb. export. To transfer command help information from the command help database to a command help edit file. See also import. expression. In an NCL procedure, one or more terms connected by operators. extended basic mode. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS operating mode in which at least one static or dynamic NC process is present and a mix of other application processes is present. See also advanced mode and basic mode. external function. A function that is a separate, self-contained source file of NCL statements. external procedure. A procedure that is a separate, self-contained source file of NCL statements. fatal error. In NCL, a condition caused during compilation that causes compilation to stop. A message that begins with FATAL ERROR is displayed. No object is produced. See also compilation error, error, run-time error, and warning. field. In a user database, a group of data. In an element, a sequence of contiguous bytes within a group beginning at a fixed offset. It can be fixed or variable in length. In a panel, the smallest unit that can be displayed. field character. The character that specifies how a field in a panel description file is to be displayed on a screen. The character precedes the target field in the display part of the panel description file. field separator. The hexadecimal character FF, used to separate each field of a record in a delimited user database. field type. In a panel, either an output field or an input field. field-level justification. In a panel, the process of stripping trailing blanks, padding, and justifying the data in a field. fields list. In NCL, a list used by certain VARTABLE verbs introduced by the FIELDS operand. file pair. Two key-sequenced files that are treated as a single logical file in all file operations. See also UDB pair. fixed data. Data in an output field of a panel that cannot change when the panel is displayed. fixed length data section. The data component of an element that is always the same length. It can consist only of groups and fields. FK. See function key. fold. To convert a lowercase alphabetic character to its corresponding uppercase character. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

241 Glossary freeze. The act of inactivating RMS rules for a subject. When you freeze a subject, messages containing that subject cannot trigger any rules. full NRD message. A NRD message, held in the NRD message central queue, that must be deleted using its DOM ID. full-screen mode. A presentation mode in which a window consists entirely of a panel. function. A sequence of statements, called by name from an expression, that performs a task and returns a result to be used in further expression evaluation. function key. A key that can be assigned a value to perform a special function. function key settings. An RMS ruleset record that assigns values to function keys on Tandem 6530, IBM 3270, and compatible terminals, to perform special functions. A MSGPROC message handler uses the record to set up the function keys in an OCS window. function reference. When calling a function, the method of using an expression that evaluates to a function name. general menu. Any menu other than a primary menu. generic processing. An NCL operation that uses generic variables. generic variable. An NCL variable, usually in a VARS list, that refers to all variables that match the variable name. (The variable name ends with a wild card (*).) GLBL. The characters that begin a global variable name. global equate. A symbol, created by the EQUATE command during NonStop NET/MASTER MS startup, that becomes the default value for all NonStop NET/MASTER MS users. See also local equate. global function key. A function key, assigned a value during NonStop NET/MASTER MS startup, that becomes the default value for the function key and, therefore, the default for all NonStop NET/MASTER MS users. See also local function key. global memory (GM). Memory that holds information required by all NonStop NET/MASTER MS processes. Information is maintained by the global memory manager (GMM). global memory manager (GMM). The NonStop NET/MASTER MS component that manages information in global memory. global time-based rule. An RMS time-based rule that is independent of message flow. global variable. An NCL variable that is visible throughout NonStop NET/MASTER MS (the name begins with GLBL). global vartable. A vartable that is visible throughout NonStop NET/MASTER MS. GMM. See global memory manager. group. Any contiguous section of data within the fixed length data section of an element. group ID. The first part of a GUID consisting of a number from 1 through Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 13

242 Glossary group user ID. A user ID definition record, used as the default template for groups of individual users. Guardian user ID (GUID). The two-part Tandem ID, consisting of a group ID and a user ID, that defines a user to the Guardian environment. GUID. See Guardian user ID. header. The first part of a map or an element. It contains information about the whole map or element. Help Maintenance. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that allows a user to customize distributed command help information and add new command help information. help information. Information describing how to use a command or command/operand combination. hexadecimal mode. A technique used for defining a hexadecimal character as a field character in a panel description file. hexadecimal string. In NCL, a quoted string containing 0 through 9, A through F, a through f, or blanks, and followed by the letter X or x. hints. See process creation hints. history buffer. Sometimes called a command stack, a buffer, available to each OCS window, that contains the most recently executed unique commands entered from the OCS command input line. IDS. See intelligent device support. illegal character. A character that cannot be used in an NCL procedure (except in a quoted string). immediate shutdown. A shutdown operation started by the BSYS virtual user without waiting for users to log off. See also emergency shutdown and normal shutdown. implicit declaration. The definition of a procedure that does not begin with the PROCEDURE core statement. implicit execution. The execution of an NCL procedure without an explicit START or EXEC command. import. To transfer command help information from a command help edit file to the command help database. See also export. inbound message. An unsolicited message received by ISR on a local NonStop NET/MASTER MS system from a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS or SOLVE management services system. inclusive OR (OR). The Boolean operator that results in a value of 1 (TRUE) if one or both adjacent terms in an expression are true: otherwise the operator results in a value of 0 (FALSE). See also exclusive OR (XOR). Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

243 Glossary indentation value. The number of columns used to indent the overrun lines of messages that are longer than the current width of an OCS window. INIT. The NCL procedure that is executed by the NonStop NET/MASTER MS control process (NCP) during system initialization. initial value. The value in a field when the field is first displayed. INMC. See Inter-NET/MASTER Connection. inner block. A block of statements enclosed by a block of statements. input field. A field in a panel that can accept input. The variable for the input field must omit the ampersand (&). integer index. A number, or an expression that resolves to a number, enclosed in braces ({ }) and placed after the symbolic name of an element in an MDO variable. The number is used to uniquely identify the occurrence of a repeated element. intelligent device. A device (such as a personal computer, an automatic teller machine, or a point-of-sale machine) that can communicate with Pathway through the Pathway intelligent device support (IDS) interface. intelligent device support (IDS). The Pathway interface that provides support for intelligent devices. Inter-NET/MASTER Connection (INMC). The NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that allows multiple NonStop NET/MASTER MS and SOLVE management services systems, and multiple NonStop NET/MASTER MS and NetView systems, to be connected and controlled from the one location. Inter-System Routing (ISR). The NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that enables, disables, and controls message flow between multiple NonStop NET/MASTER MS and SOLVE management services systems, and between multiple NonStop NET/MASTER MS and NetView systems. inter-system services (IS) process. The application process that supports INMC, ISR, and ROC for the multiprotocol exchange of commands, command-response messages, and event messages with another network management application (NonStop NET/MASTER MS, the SOLVE management services, or NetView). internal function. A function inside a source file. internal procedure. A procedure inside a source file. internal trace. A trace of one or more internal NonStop NET/MASTER MS events or other significant trace data. NonStop NET/MASTER MS supports one internal trace at a time. internal trace point. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS code position that can be identified for an internal trace. internal trace point number. A number identifying a NonStop NET/MASTER MS internal event or other significant trace data Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 15

244 Glossary internal validation rules. Options specified in the #FLD panel control statement that determine how input is validated by Panel Services before it is passed to an NCL process. interpreter. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS entity that interprets an object and executes its opcodes. IS process. See inter-system services process. ISR. See Inter-System Routing. iterative. Repetitive. Normally refers to a DO loop. key. A value associated with a record (such as a record number) or contained within a record (such as a field) that can be used to locate one record or a subset of records in a user database. key field. Part of a map header or element header. The value contained in the key field of a data item is the name of the map used by Mapping Services to interpret the data item. key value. The (numeric) internal representation of the symbolic name of a map: for example, $MSG is represented internally by a key value of 2 in the header of a mapped data object variable. key-sequenced file. A Tandem structured Enscribe file, consisting of variable-length records that are accessed by the values contained within designated key fields. The records in a key-sequenced user database are stored logically in ascending order, according to the value contained in their primary key field. keyword. Following a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command, a keyword is the first part of a qualifier. It modifies the action of the command to the extent specified by the value that follows. Within an NCL statement, a keyword is a sequence of alphabetic characters that has a predefined meaning when used in a particular context. label. Within an NCL statement, a label is a symbol or quoted string (excluding hexadecimal and binary strings) that ends in a colon (:) and begins a statement. Labels are used to mark segments of code. length field. Part of a map header or element header. The value contained in the length field is the length of the data item. The length of the length field is normally included in the length of a data item. length variable specification. A variable specification on a VARS list that specifies the maximum amount of data (in bytes) that a variable can hold. lexical element. The smallest meaningful unit within an NCL procedure. There are five types of lexical elements: symbols, quoted strings, variables, operators, and special characters. library. A subvolume in which NCL source files, NCL object files, or panel description files are kept. line continuation character. The character used to continue an NCL statement over more than one line: in NCL, a comma (,). Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

245 Glossary link definition. An INMC record, retained in global memory, that defines the characteristics, and registers the hierarchical relationship of its three components: a link definition record, a session definition record, and a unit definition record. link definition record. A record, created by the LINK DEFINE command, that names and establishes the characteristics of an INMC link. LINKMON process. A Guardian process that supports access to Pathway server classes from requester programs written in languages such as TAL, C, COBOL85, Pascal, or NCL. list. In NCL, part of the qualifier in a verb, consisting of a sequence of single items. local equate. A symbol created by the EQUATE command after NonStop NET/MASTER MS startup, usually from the OCS command input line. See also global equate. local function key. A function key assigned a value after NonStop NET/MASTER MS startup, usually from the OCS command input line. See also global function key. lock. Exclusive access to a resource by an NCL process. Log Browse. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that allows a user, while online, to browse through the NonStop NET/MASTER MS activity log. log entry. An entry in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS activity log, consisting of the time, user ID, terminal ID, and other information that describes a certain event. log message. A message generated internally by the LOGPROC system-level procedure. Log messages are identified by the letter L when displayed on an OCS window. logical AND. The Boolean operator that results in a value of 1 (TRUE) if both adjacent terms in an expression are true: otherwise the operator results in a value of 0 (FALSE). logical name. A sequence of characters that can be used as an alias for a device name. logical NOT. The Boolean operator that negates 1 (TRUE) to 0 (FALSE) and FALSE to TRUE when evaluating two terms in an expression. logical unit (LU). An IBM term for a unit through which end user application programs and I/O devices access the SNA network to communicate with other end users. An LU2 is an IBM 3270 or compatible terminal using SNA protocols. logon screen. The screen where a real user enters a user ID and password to log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. LOGP. See Activity Log Process. LOGPROC. A system-level NCL procedure that intercepts and processes messages destined for the NonStop NET/MASTER MS activity log. LU. See logical unit Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 17

246 Glossary manager. A process to which command messages for associated subjects are routed. In event messages, the managers make subjects of the same name unique. The ZEMS-TKN-MANAGER token contains the manager. map. A set of definitions used by Mapping Services that together describe the entire structure of some item of data. map definition record. A record in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS map file that describes the structure of a map. map file. The disk file that holds all the definitions of all maps known to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. map header. The beginning of a map. A map header consists of two parts: a length field and a key field. mapped data. Data that are structured in a predefined way by using a map. mapped data object (MDO) variable. A variable containing a data structure that Mapping Services can understand using a map. mapped UDB. A user database where data is mapped. Components of the map describe the length of the data in a record and the fields. The default map used by NCL is called $NCL. Mapping Services. A proprietary architecture that allows data to be represented in a tokenized form suitable for passing between network management platforms. mask. A string of characters used as the basis of comparison with another string of characters. MDO variable. See mapped data object (MDO) variable. menu. A screen display that allows you to select an option to access a function. Message Services. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that controls message flow within NonStop NET/MASTER MS. message action rule. An RMS rule that governs how a message handler acts in response to a set of messages. message delivery philosophy. One of the control options of an RMS ruleset. The philosophy determines how a message handler handles the delivery of the messages that are not accounted for by a rule. The message handler can either deliver or suppress the messages. message display area. The area of an OCS window that displays NRD messages and roll-delete messages. message group rule. An RMS rule that contains a set of message action rules as its members and is triggered only when all the rule members are in a triggered state. message handler. An NCL procedure that processes messages and takes actions according to a set of RMS rules. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

247 Glossary message ID. An ID that uniquely identifies a message. It is typically the first word of a message. message number. A number that uniquely identifies a message. It has two parts: the characters NNM and a unique number that can be used to refer to the message. message profile variable. A mapped data object variable that Mapping Services can understand using the map $MSG. message queue. A queue that holds roll-delete messages destined for an OCS window. message recognition element. A criterion that determines if a message can trigger an RMS rule. There are three message recognition elements: message ID, subsystem ID, and message profile variable. message set. A set of real RMS messages that has been captured and saved. message text. The part of a message that contains the text of the message. (A message can contain additional information, such as display attributes, time and place of origin, and SPI tokens.) message threshold processing. A feature of the RMS message action rule that controls the number of messages (the threshold) a message handler delivers or suppresses within a time interval. message trace. A trace of one or more message types. (Types are CNM messages, EMS messages, messages in dependent processing environments, log messages, and OCS messages). NonStop NET/MASTER MS supports multiple simultaneous message traces. message trace point. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS code position that can be identified for a message trace. message validation exit NCL procedure. An optional user exit NCL procedure that provides a final check on whether a message triggers the RMS rule. minor name. The name that qualifies a primary name to identify a specific resource within a resource group, and is used to control access to the resource by cooperating NCL processes. mode indicator. A letter before the OCS command input line prompt that indicates: whether a user is entitled to receive monitor-class messages (M); the status of paused NCL processes (P); or the status of an NCL process that is executed by pressing an action function key (A). model user ID record. A user ID definition record used as a prototype for the automatic registration of NonStop NET/MASTER MS users. modfld attribute. An attribute acquired by a variable used in a panel or referred to by the SETMOD operand of the ASSIGN verb. monitor prefix. The letter that prefixes a monitor-class message when the message is displayed on an OCS window: letters are E (message is from the EMSP region), L (message is from LOGP region), and M (message is from neither region) Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 19

248 Glossary monitor-class message. A message that has the monitor-class attribute. Monitor-class messages are sent to monitor-class users. A monitor-class message is identified by the letter E, L, or M when it is displayed in an OCS window. monitor-class user. A user who is entitled to receive monitor-class messages. MS process. See multi-user services process. MSGPROC. A system-level NCL procedure that intercepts and processes messages destined for an OCS window. multi-user services (MS) process. The application process that provides the interactive user environment for NonStop NET/MASTER MS operations and NCL procedure and panel description file development. narration. A feature that causes an RMS message handler to send messages to tell you what actions the handler will take as messages arrive at the handler. Depending on whether the actions are enabled or disabled, the handler may or may not perform the actions. national characters. In English, the number sign (#), dollar sign ($), and at sign (@). national language character set. The letters, numbers, and special symbols that make up the language of a particular country or area. native character set. For Tandem computers, the ASCII character set; for IBM computers, the EBCDIC character set. NC process. See NonStop NET/MASTER MS consolidated services process. NCL. See Network Control Language. NCL base procedure. See base procedure. NCL ID. See NCL process identifier. NCL object file search path. The search order through the NCL object file(s) defined as part of the search path for NCL procedures. NCL PATHSEND requester. A PATHSEND requester written in NCL. NCL procedure. A source file consisting of a sequence of NCL statements. NCL procedure library search path. The search order through the user procedure library, customized procedure library, and distribution procedure library. NCL process. An NCL procedure that is executing. Each NCL process has a unique NCL ID. See also persistent NCL process. NCL process identifier (NCL ID). The unique number that NonStop NET/MASTER MS assigns to an NCL process upon execution. NCP. See NonStop NET/MASTER MS control process. nested block. A block of statements enclosed by another block of statements. nested function. A user-written function inside another NCL procedure or function. nested procedure. An NCL procedure inside another NCL procedure or function. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

249 Glossary nested variable. A variable that begins with an ampersand and an opening parenthesis, and terminates with a closing parenthesis (&, (, and ), respectively). NET/MASTER. See SOLVE management services. Network Control Language (NCL). A structured, high-level, compiled language supplied with NonStop NET/MASTER MS and integrated with other NonStop NET/MASTER MS services. It is used to develop NCL procedures. Network Management Vector Transport (NMVT). An IBM message structure that carries communications network management requests and replies. NMVT. See Network Management Vector Transport. NNM program. A program distributed with NonStop NET/MASTER MS that allows a user to log on to NonStop NET/MASTER MS from a dynamic terminal. non-roll-delete (NRD) message. A message that does not roll off the message display area of an OCS window. NRD messages report events of critical importance. There are two classes of NRD messages: full NRD messages and NRD messages with the OPER attribute. NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services (MS). An integrated software product specifically designed for network and system management on Tandem NonStop computer systems. NonStop NET/MASTER MS consolidated services (NC) process. The application process that combines the functionality of the BK, EM, IS, and MS process classes in a mode that requires less memory, fewer executing processes, and reduced disk space. NonStop NET/MASTER MS control process (NCP). The master process for NonStop NET/MASTER MS the first process executed when NonStop NET/MASTER MS is started. NCP starts all other processes and is responsible for detecting when other processes and processors fail, and for attempting to restart them. normal shutdown. A shutdown operation started by the BSYS virtual user after waiting for users to log off. See also emergency shutdown and immediate shutdown. noshare list. The list of elements after a NOSHARE or NOSHRVARS keyword. NRD ID. A unique number assigned by NonStop NET/MASTER MS to the NRD message. It is part of the DOM ID. NRD message. See non-roll-delete (NRD) message. NRD message area. The area in an OCS window that displays NRD messages. NRD message area delimiter line. The line in an OCS window that separates NRD messages from roll-delete messages. NRD message central queue. The central queue that holds full NRD messages. NRD message cursor deletion. The act of moving the cursor to a line containing a NRD message and pressing the ENTER key. A full NRD message is removed from display; a NRD message with the OPER attribute is deleted Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 21

250 Glossary NRD message with the OPER attribute. A NRD message that is not held in the NRD message central queue, and must be deleted using NRD cursor deletion. When deleted, the message immediately disappears from the NRD message display area. null. No value. In NCL, assigning a variable a null value does not delete the variable name from memory. number. In NCL, a number is a symbol that begins with a digit (0 through 9) or a period and is in a context that permits it to be a number (rather than a string). object. In NCL, the object code of a specific NCL procedure that is loaded into memory. In SPI, an entity subject to independent reference and control by a subsystem: for example, a disk file or a data communications line. An object typically has a name and a type known to the controlling subsystem. object code. NCL code in executable form. object file. A key-sequenced file containing the object code of all NCL procedures owned by a certain user. object procedure library. A subvolume in which NCL object files are kept. OCS. See Operator Control Services. OCS ID. See OCS window ID. OCS mode. The presentation mode in OCS where a window allows a real user to enter NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands at any time and allows NonStop NET/MASTER MS to display output at any time. In OCS mode, there is no correlation between input and output. OCS profile. A profile that determines what a real user can do in OCS; the user can change certain aspects of this profile by using the PROFILE command. OCS window. The screen display in OCS. OCS window ID. An identifier displayed in the bottom right corner of an OCS window that helps to identify the window when using more than one. offset. The position of a character in a group of characters relative to the beginning of the group. The first character in a group is deemed to start at either offset 0 or offset 1. ON block. The condition handler, established by the ON core statement, raised by a certain block of statements. opcodes. Statements representing the object code created by compiling NCL source code. open code level. The top level of code in an NCL procedure; the block of statements bounded by the core statements PROCEDURE and END or FUNCTION and END that encloses all other blocks in an NCL procedure. operand. Following a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command, a word that modifies the action taken by the command. There are three types of operands: text, qualifiers, and positional arguments. In NCL, a word that modifies the action taken by a verb. All operands are in the form: keyword[ [ = ]value ]. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

251 Glossary operand authority level. A number assigned to the operand of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. Authority levels range from 0 (lowest) through 255 (highest). A user whose authority level is equal to or greater than the operand authority level can execute the command using the operand. operating mode. The mode in which NonStop NET/MASTER MS is running, defined by the mix and presence or absence of application processes. See also advanced mode, basic mode, and extended basic mode. Operator Control Services (OCS). The NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that provides the central point of operational control of the local Tandem system, the local NonStop NET/MASTER MS system, and remote systems. operator. In NCL, a lexical element used for working on terms in expressions. There are five types of operators: parenthetical, arithmetic, Boolean, relational, and string. outbound message. An unsolicited message sent by ISR from a local NonStop NET/MASTER MS system to a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS or SOLVE management services system. outer block. A block of statements that encloses one or more blocks of statements. output field. A field in a panel that cannot accept input. A variable in an output field must include the ampersand (&). outvar field. A field defined in a panel description file to accept either input or output. The NCL procedure that displays the panel specifies whether the field accepts input or output. PA. See program attention (key). pad. To add characters (including blanks) to text. In a panel, usually to either left justify, right justify, or center the text on a screen. In an expression, usually to perform a test of equality on the text. pad character. A character, usually a blank, used to expand text. page. To move to the next, previous, first, or last screen display. Panel Services. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that enables the design and controls the logical handling of full-screen panel displays. panel. A formatted display that partially or completely overlays a window. panel bidding. The contention that exists when more than one NCL process attempts to claim temporary ownership of a window to display a panel. panel control statement. A statement used in a panel description file to control how a panel is displayed and processed. panel description file. An edit file used by an NCL process to display a panel. It contains the text to display on a screen and the panel control statements that determine how to display the text. panel library. A subvolume in which panel description files are kept Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 23

252 Glossary panel library search path. The search order through the user panel library, customized panel library, and distribution panel library. panel object file search path. The search order through the panel object file(s) defined as part of the search path for panel description files. panel queue. A central queue, maintained by NonStop NET/MASTER MS, that holds panels currently in use. The maximum size of the queue is set by the SYSPARMS MAXPANEL command. panel skipping. The ability to chain menu-selection requests together without having to display intermediate selection panels. Panel skipping is used in conjunction with direct function selection. parameter. A value passed from one procedure or function (the caller) to another procedure or function (the callee). parameter list. A list of values passed to an NCL procedure or function when the procedure or function is called. parameter variable. A variable created automatically to hold data passed to a procedure or function. parentheses. Lexical elements (( )) in an expression that are used to alter the evaluation order of terms, to delimit terms, and to delimit an expression that resolves to the name of a local or external function. Parentheses take precedence over the other four types of operators (arithmetic, Boolean, relational, and string). path information unit (PIU). In SNA, the basic message unit exchanged between peer SNA network resources, consisting of a transmission header (TH) alone or a TH followed by a basic information unit (BIU) or a BIU segment. PATHCOM. The operator interface used to communicate interactively with PATHMON to configure and control a Pathway system. PATHMON. The central control process for a Pathway system. PATHSEND identifier. See Pathway server class identifier. PATHSEND interface. The interface to a Pathway system supported by a LINKMON process and the SERVERCLASS_SEND_ and SERVERCLASS_SEND_INFO_ procedure calls. The interface enables a PATHSEND requester process to communicate with a server process. PATHSEND process. A requester process that makes use of the PATHSEND interface to communicate with a server process. PATHSEND requester process. See PATHSEND process. PATHSEND requester program. A requester program written using a language such as the TAL, C, COBOL85, Pascal, or NCL that makes use of the PATHSEND interface. Pathway. A group of related software tools and interfaces that enables a user to develop, install, and manage online transaction processing applications. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

253 Glossary Pathway command terminal. A terminal at which a Pathway system manager enters PATHCOM commands to configure and control a Pathway system. Pathway server class identifier. A unique identifier that NonStop NET/MASTER MS assigns to a Pathway server class so that an NCL PATHSEND requester can communicate with the server class. Pathway system. The TCPs, servers, terminals, programs, and any subsystems associated with Pathway that run together under the control of one PATHMON process. pend-unload list. A list, maintained by NonStop NET/MASTER MS, that holds in memory copies of NCL procedures that have been unloaded from the active list while still being executed. Peripheral Utility Program (PUP). A Tandem utility program that allows system managers and system operators to control and perform various maintenance operations on peripheral devices. permanent open access point. A pointer to a UDB that is permanently open. persistent NCL process. An NCL process that is automatically restarted by NonStop NET/MASTER MS after failure. persistent process. A process that cannot restart itself after failure; that is, it relies on another process to restart it. Application processes are persistent processes. PFK. Program function key. physical unit (PU). An IBM term for software resident within SNA nodes that manages and monitors node resources. PIU. See path information unit. platform indicator. An indicator that identifies the platform (either NonStop NET/MASTER MS or the SOLVE management services) on which a command can be used. positional argument. An operand that must follow a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command in a certain position. PPO. See primary program operator. preloading. The reading of an NCL procedure or panel description file into memory before it is required for execution, to improve system performance. preparsing. Dynamically altering the design of a panel after it is defined and before it is displayed. primary key. The main value used to locate a record in a user database. The primary key for records in entry-sequenced UDBs is a record address maintained by Enscribe. The primary key for records in key-sequenced UDBs is a particular data field within a record. primary menu. A menu denoted by the display of a user ID and time on the right side of the screen. NonStop NET/MASTER MS has more than one primary menu Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 25

254 Glossary primary name. The name given to an entire resource, used to control access to the resource by cooperating NCL processes. primary processing environment. A processing environment that is controlled and owned by an OCS window or a virtual user. The output from this environment goes to the OCS window or virtual user, respectively. primary program operator (PPO). In IBM terminology, an operator who is authorized to receive unsolicited messages. primary trigger. One of the RMS message recognition elements. You cannot change a primary trigger. private loading. Loading an NCL procedure or function for use by an NCL process. procedure. In NCL, a sequence of NCL statements that performs a task but does not have to return a result when it terminates. procedure library. A subvolume in which NCL source files or object files reside. process. In Guardian terminology, a program that is executing. process attributes. The characteristics of a process in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS processing environment, including process name, process priority, and process presence. process character. The first character of the name of the NonStop NET/MASTER MS control process (NCP). process class. A kind of application process (BK, EM, IS, MS, or NC). process creation hints. Alphanumeric characters in the application process program file name that determine the number and presence of NC processes. process definition. The group of PARAM commands in the configuration file that defines the attributes of a process in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS processing environment. process presence. The permanency of an application process in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS processing environment. See also dynamic process and static process. process type. A kind of NonStop NET/MASTER MS process: NonStop NET/MASTER MS control process (NCP), global memory manager (GMM) process, security exit process, or application process. process weight. The CPU resource consumption of a dynamic process when the dynamic process is created in the CPU. See also CPU consumption. process-wide scope. The scope of an NCL process: the action of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command or NCL verb affects only the NCL process from which the command or verb is executed. profile. A combination of details that determines what a user is allowed to do while using NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

255 Glossary program attention (PA) key. A key on an IBM 3270 keyboard used to interrupt the execution of a program. Depending on the keyboard, there may be several PA keys. protected field. A field in a panel that cannot be updated by a user. PU. See physical unit. PUP. See Peripheral Utility Program. purge ID. An ID used to purge a timer command or NRD message. purge message. A message sent when a timer command is purged from the timer queue. qualification name list. A mapped data object variable specification that uniquely identifies an enclosed element. qualifier. The part of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command that modifies the action taken by the command. Most qualifiers are in the form: keyword=value. quoted string. A lexical element beginning and terminating with a quote of the same type: either double quotes ( ) or single quotes ( ). range list. A list used by many NCL verbs. The list is introduced by the RANGE keyword, and contains two numeric values or two expressions that evaluate to two numeric values, separated by a comma (,). ranged variable specification. A variable specification on a VARS list that generates a set of variables with a range of numeric suffixes. ranking elements. Elements that an RMS message handler uses to determine which rule to use when a message triggers more than one rule. READY. The NCL procedure that is executed by NonStop NET/MASTER MS during system initialization after the INIT NCL procedure. real user. A person using NonStop NET/MASTER MS from a terminal. recall buffer. A buffer in OCS that holds the current messages in the OCS message display area and the past 100 messages that have been displayed. RECFMS. See Record Formatted Maintenance Statistics. Record Formatted Maintenance Statistics (RECFMS). An IBM SNA message structure that carries communications network management requests and replies. RECFMS is normally solicited by Request Maintenance Statistics (REQMS) requests, but can also be sent unsolicited. region. An environment in which a user operates. region-wide scope. The scope of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS user: the action of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command or NCL verb affects only NCL processes operating under the control of a user ID. relational operators. Operators that compare two terms in an expression and return either 1 if the comparison is TRUE, or 0 if the comparison is FALSE Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 27

256 Glossary relative time. A time value expressed in hours, minutes, and seconds representing an interval from the current time. Remote Operator Control (ROC). The NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that allows users to log on from a local NonStop NET/MASTER MS system to a remote system; to execute NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands at the remote system; and to receive the results at the local system. remote command. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS command sent to a remote system. remote system. Any NonStop NET/MASTER MS or SOLVE management services system other than the local system. remote user. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS user on a remote system. repeated element. An element that can occur more than once. An integer index identifies the specific instance of a repeated element. reply message. A message from a server process to a requester process. REQMS. See Request Maintenance Statistics. Request Maintenance Statistics (REQMS). An IBM SNA message structure that carries communications network management requests and replies. REQMS is used to solicit Record Formatted Maintenance Statistics (RECFMS) requests. request message. A message on the dependent request queue associated with an NCL process. In Pathway, a message from a requester process to a server process. request queue. A dependent queue owned by an NCL process whose main purpose is to receive requests from the INTQ command. request unit (RU). An IBM message structure that carries SNA control information. request/response header (RH). In SNA, control information preceding a request/response unit that specifies the type of request/response unit and contains control information associated with the request/response unit. request/response unit (RU). In SNA, a generic term for a request unit or a response unit. requester process. A process that makes requests of a server process. requester program. A program in a Pathway system usually written using SCREEN COBOL. resource. The combination of primary names and minor names that controls access to a specific resource. response message. A message on the dependent response queue associated with an NCL process. response queue. A dependent queue owned by an NCL process whose main purpose is to receive the responses of NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands. response time monitor (RTM). Software in an IBM 3270 control unit that is responsible for measuring end-to-end application to terminal response time. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

257 Glossary restricted function selection. Selection of an option from the NonStop NET/MASTER MS primary menu by a user allowed to choose from a restricted set of options. retain list. A list, maintained by NonStop NET/MASTER MS if procedure sharing is allowed, that holds in memory copies of NCL procedures that have been previously executed but are currently not being executed. RETURN key. A key that returns to a NonStop NET/MASTER MS primary menu from any menu level when pressed. By default, the RETURN key is the F4 function key. RH. See request/response header. RMS. See Rule Management Services. RMS message variable. An RMS variable that contains information on a message that arrives at a message handler. RMS timer. An RMS time-based rule that the RMS timer driver has loaded. An RMS timer performs tasks at specific times under the control of a user as specified by the rule. ROC. See Remote Operator Control. roll-delete message. A message that rolls off the message display area of an OCS window. Roll-delete messages report events that are not critical. roll-delete message area. The area on an OCS window that displays roll-delete messages. roll-delete message area delimiter line. The line on an OCS window that separates old roll-delete messages from new roll-delete messages. roll-delete message queue. A queue that holds roll-delete messages. Each OCS window has one such queue. roll-time delay. The pause that NonStop NET/MASTER MS gives when a roll-delete message fills the bottom line of the roll-delete message area. RTM. See response time monitor. RU. See request unit and request/response unit. Rule Management Services (RMS). A NonStop NET/MASTER application that provides a rule-based solution to facilitate the operation of your system and network. rule. A member of an RMS ruleset that contains information on what to do when an event occurs. rule action. A user-defined action in an RMS rule that executes when an event triggers the rule. rule action exit NCL procedure. An optional user exit NCL procedure that executes before the other RMS rule actions when the rule containing the exit is triggered. The procedure executes inline with the message handler for a message action rule but separately from the message handler for a message group rule. rule contents variable. An RMS variable that contains the value of certain rule definition elements. The variable name has the prefix $RMS Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 29

258 Glossary ruleset. A collection of RMS rules that defines responses to events such as message arrival and time conditions. The message handler uses the information in a ruleset to set up its execution environment and respond to incoming messages. The timer driver uses the information in a ruleset to set up the execution environments for the timers that respond to time events. run-time error. An error detected by NCL during the execution of an NCL process that can be trapped using an error handler. running trace. A trace that has started. Each running trace has a unique trace ID: for example, SCF. See Subsystem Control Facility. scope. In NCL, the concept that activity takes place within boundaries. Scope affects users, core statements, verbs, labels, and variables. SCREEN COBOL. A procedural language used to define and control terminal displays. screen. The physical surface of a terminal or workstation upon which information is displayed. Scroll prompt. Scroll ===>. You enter the amount of backward or forward scrolling at a Scroll prompt. scroll. To move up or down through a screen display by one or more lines. SDLC. See synchronous data link control. search path. The order in which NCL searches through procedure libraries for an NCL procedure to execute. security exit. A routine provided by an installation that replaces all NonStop NET/MASTER User ID Management Services (UMS) functions. security exit process. A process that determines whether a user has sufficient command authority to use a Guardian utility and members of the utility s command set. Select Option prompt. Select Option ===>. You enter a menu option at the Select Option prompt. selection list. In NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands and NCL verbs, a list with a finite number of entries from which one must be chosen to enter a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command or execute a verb. semaphore. The signal given to an inquiring NCL process that a resource is currently locked. It is used to synchronize access to resources between cooperating NCL processes. serial execution. The execution of an NCL procedure that depends on the termination of execution of another NCL process. server class. A grouping of duplicate copies of a single server program, all of which execute the same object program. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

259 Glossary server process. A process that implements requests for an application and returns replies to the requester process. server program. A program in a Pathway system written using a language such as COBOL85, TAL, MUMPS, FORTRAN, BASIC, C, or Pascal. session definition record. A record, created by the SESSION DEFINE command, that names and establishes the characteristics of an INMC session type. share list. The list of elements after a SHARE, NOSHARE, SHRVARS, or NOSHRVARS keyword. shared loading. Loading an NCL process so that it can be used by more than one NCL process in the current Guardian process. The NCL process is kept on either the active or retain list. sharing. In NCL, an NCL process that can be executed by more than one user at the same time. shutdown. The operation of stopping NonStop NET/MASTER MS, either by using a command from NonStop NET/MASTER MS or by running the NNM program from TACL. simple relational operator. A relational operator that strips all leading and trailing blanks from both terms in an expression before making a comparison. simple test of equality. A test of equality by a simple relational operator. simple variable. A variable that provides direct access to data. simulated event. An event that you generate to test RMS rules. single value. In NCL, a type of qualifier to the keyword of a verb. skip variable specification. A variable specification on a VARS list that specifies a number of words that are not to be assigned to variables. SNA. See Systems Network Architecture. SNAX. See Systems Network Architecture Extended. SNAX Extended Facility (SNAX/XF). The Tandem communication services software that enables Systems Network Architecture (SNA) hosts and devices to communicate with Tandem systems and share applications with Tandem systems. See Systems Network Architecture (SNA). SNAX/XF. See SNAX Extended Facility. solicited message. A message generated in response to an explicit request, such as the output from a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. SOLVE management services. An integrated software product designed for network and system management on IBM 370, Fujitsu, and Nixdorf computer systems. See also NonStop NET/MASTER Management Services. source file. A disk file. source schema file. A file containing DDL statements, which define DDL objects Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 31

260 Glossary special character. In NCL, a lexical element that is a single character and acts as a delimiter in a statement. Its meaning depends on the current context. SPI. See Subsystem Programmatic Interface. SPLIT grid. The grid composed of one vertical and one horizontal line that appears after the SPLIT key is pressed on a Tandem 6530 or compatible terminal. splitting. The opening of a new window or adjusting of the current window. In NCL, splitting refers to the separation of a message into separate words. spooler. An interface to print devices on your system. spooler location. The logical destination of a print file. SSCP. See System Services Control Point. standard map. A map supplied with NonStop NET/MASTER MS to access data structures that are an integral part of NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Standard maps include $MSG, $NCL, $SEC, and $SPI. startup. The operation of starting NonStop NET/MASTER MS by running the NCP program from TACL. startup parameter. A parameter set by the PARAM command; used to set the environment in which NonStop NET/MASTER MS runs. statement. An instruction to NCL that is interpreted according to its initial keyword. There are two types of statements: core statements and verb statements. statement termination character. The character used to explicitly terminate an NCL statement: in NCL, a semicolon (;). static preparsing. A type of preparsing (when displaying a panel) that preserves field positions during the preparse phase. Substituted data is truncated if it exceeds the space available to the left of the next preparse or field character. static process. An application process with static presence: that is, a process designed to be always present in the NonStop NET/MASTER MS processing environment. See also dynamic process. STATSCAP. Name of a base ruleset in RMS. The STATSCAP ruleset enables you to capture statistics on the message flow in an environment. stem variable. A simple or complex NCL variable that is terminated by a period (.). stem variable set. The group of simple or complex NCL variables beginning with the same stem. stopped. The condition of an INMC link between NonStop NET/MASTER MS, SOLVE management services, and NetView systems that has been explicitly broken with the LINK STOP command. strict relational operator. A relational operator that compares two terms in an expression without adding blanks to or stripping blanks from either term. Both terms are treated as strings. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

261 Glossary strict test of equality. A test of equality by a strict relational operator. stripping. The removing of characters (including blanks) from text. In a panel, usually to either left justify, right justify, or center the text on a screen. In an expression, usually to perform a test of equality on the text. structured file. An Enscribe file type consisting of records, each of which consists of defined fields and keys. Entry-sequenced UDBs and key-sequenced UDBs are structured files. subject. An RMS device, process, or other named entity with which a given message is concerned. Subsystem Control Facility (SCF). The Tandem interactive interface that allows operators and network managers to configure and control data communications subsystems. Subsystem Programmatic Interface (SPI). A common, message-based Tandem interface used to build and decode messages that are used for communication between requesters and servers. subsystem. A process or set of processes that manages a cohesive set of objects. subsystem ID. A data structure that uniquely identifies a subsystem (including whether it is a Tandem subsystem or a subsystem you write). It consists of the subsystem owner, the subsystem name, and the subsystem version number. subsystem objects. See objects. summary help line. The brief description of a command in a command help edit file. super group. In the Guardian environment, a group of users with a user ID of 255,n. suppression character (-). When prefixed to a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command, the character that prevents the command from being echoed to the screen or logged in the activity log. swap file. A disk file containing data taken from memory. swap volume. The disk volume that contains the swap file for a Guardian process. swapping. The reversal of the dimensions of the current logical windows. symbol. A lexical element that represents itself: for example, ABC, IF, and 999. There are three types of symbols: unquoted strings, keywords, and numbers. symbolic name. The external name of a map: for example, $MSG is the symbolic name of the map that describes the structure of messages. synchronous. Two or more events occurring dependently. NCL procedures executed using the EXEC command execute serially and, therefore, synchronously. synchronous data link control (SDLC). The link-level protocol used for the transmission of SNA path information units (PIUs). synchronous panel. A panel displayed immediately by an NCL process that suspends processing while the panel waits for input Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 33

262 Glossary System Services Control Point (SSCP). The subsystem responsible for managing and allocating all resources in a domain in an IBM Systems Network Architecture (SNA) network and for communicating with network operators. There is one SSCP for each domain in an SNA network. System Support Services. A group of NonStop NET/MASTER MS services that includes the Activity Log Browse facility, the Command Entry facility, and the Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility. system panel library. A generic term that refers to both the distribution and customized panel libraries. system parameter. A parameter set by the SYSPARMS command. system procedure library. A generic term that refers to both the distribution and customized procedure libraries. system variable. A variable that begins with the reserved stem SYS.. System variables provide access to system-related information. system-defined error handler. An error handler defined by NCL and used to trap a system-defined error condition. system-level NCL procedure. An NCL procedure that has access to distinct types of message flows within NonStop NET/MASTER MS, by using certain verbs. system-wide loading. Loading an NCL process so that the same object file of an external NCL procedure or function can be used by all NCL processes in all Guardian processes. Systems Network Architecture (SNA). An architecture developed by IBM that allows the integration of all IBM hardware and software into a universal network. Systems Network Architecture Extended (SNAX). The Tandem SNA access method. TACL. See Tandem Advanced Command Language. TAL. See Transaction Application Language. Tandem Advanced Command Language (TACL). The Tandem product that is both the standard command interpreter in the Guardian environment and a language consisting of functions, macros, and routines that allows a user to build commands. Tandem NonStop Kernel. The Tandem proprietary operating system that provides fault tolerance and is optimized for online transaction processing. NonStop NET/MASTER MS runs under the Guardian environment of the operating system. target label. In an NCL procedure, the label following a core statement for which the core statement searches. target NCL ID. The NCL identifier following a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command for which the command searches. target position. In an NCL procedure, a code position identified by a label. TCP. See terminal control process. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

263 Glossary term. The basic unit of an expression in NCL. There are five types of terms: symbols, quoted strings, variables, parenthesized expressions, and function references. terminal control process (TCP). The Guardian process that interprets SCREEN COBOL object code, handles input-output to operator terminals, and sends messages to server processes. terminal definition record. The record created when defining a terminal to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. test mode. A mode that forces NonStop NET/MASTER MS to load an NCL procedure from disk and compile it before executing it, rather than attempting to find a compiled version. text. A string of characters that does not modify the action taken by a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. text or a number. An NCL expression following a verb keyword that NCL regards as text or a number. The expression terminates at the next keyword or at the end of the statement. TH. See transmission header. thaw. The act of reactivating RMS rules for a subject. You thaw a frozen subject. time prefix. The identifier that can precede an unsolicited message displayed on an OCS window. It indicates the time the message was generated. time-based rule. An RMS rule that invokes a timer to perform tasks at specific times under the control of a specified user. timer command. The AT or EVERY command, used to execute a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command at a certain time or a certain frequency. timer driver. An NCL procedure that loads RMS time-based rules as timers. timer ID. An identifier assigned to a timer command by a user. timer queue. The queue holding AT and EVERY commands pending execution. tokenization. The process of splitting a message into parts. Also, in NCL, the process of converting lexical elements to machine language. top level. The highest level in a hierarchy of nested blocks: for example, the procedure that encloses all other procedures and functions. top-level environment. The environment in which the NCL processes that display NonStop NET/MASTER MS menus operate. TPL. See trace parameter list. trace collector process. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS process that controls a running trace and the writing of records to a trace file. trace file. A file that collects and stores trace records. trace ID. The unique number that NonStop NET/MASTER MS assigns to a trace when the trace is started Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 35

264 Glossary trace parameter. A value in the trace parameter list specifying the events to trace. trace parameter list (TPL). A list associated with an OCS window that holds the current trace parameter settings. trace point. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS code position that can be traced. trace record. An entry in a trace file: a message mapped by the map $MSG, text data, or binary data. Transaction Application Language (TAL). The Tandem language, which is used to write systems software and routines, that supports transaction-oriented applications. transmission header (TH). In SNA, routing and control information, optionally followed by a basic information unit (BIU) or a BIU segment. trigger life. A time interval within which an RMS message action rule is regarded by a message group rule as having been triggered. The trigger life starts counting down when a message triggers the message action rule. truncation character. The character used to indicate the position at which a message is truncated on an OCS window: a plus sign (+). type conversion. How NCL automatically converts values from one type to another, depending on context. There are two basic types: string and numeric. Numeric includes the subtypes floating point, integral, and Boolean. UANCL. See Utility Access NCL. UDB. See user database. UDB identifier. A unique identifier that NonStop NET/MASTER MS assigns to a user database so that an NCL process can access the user database. UDB pair. Two key-sequenced files that are treated as a single logical UDB in all UDB operations. See also file pair. UMS. See User ID Management Services. UMS database. The database, maintained by UMS, that stores user ID definition records. unary operators. Operators that change the sign of a number. There are two unary operators: plus (+) and minus (-). unenumerated mapped data object variable. A mapped data object variable that stores raw data only. unit definition record. An INMC record, created by the UNIT DEFINE command, that names and establishes the characteristics of an INMC unit type. unit type. A type of logical path or connection; its manifestation depends on the session type. For X.25 session types, a unit is a virtual circuit (either SVC or PVC); for SNA, it is an LU; and for PTP, it is a file system OPEN. unloading. Removing an NCL procedure or panel description file from memory after it has been preloaded. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

265 Glossary unmapped UDB. A user database in which NCL treats the data in each record as a sequence of contiguous bytes. NCL does not interpret the data in an unmapped user database: an unmapped user database can contain any binary data. unprotected field. A panel field that can accept input. unquoted string. Within an NCL statement, a sequence of characters that do not begin and end with quotes, do not result in a number, and do not have a predefined meaning when used in a particular context. unrecognized command. A string of characters that NonStop NET/MASTER MS assumes to be a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command but that it is unable to process and execute. unrecognized statement. A string of characters that, in the current context, NCL assumes to be the first keyword of a core statement or verb but that it is unable to process and execute. unsolicited message. A message that is not generated as the result of an explicit request. unstructured file. A Tandem Enscribe file type that is essentially a byte array on disk that starts at byte address 0 and continues sequentially upward through whatever byte address is identified by the end-of-file (EOF). unwinding. The orderly dismantling of a nested environment, NCL procedure, or function to the current nesting level. User ID Management Services (UMS). The NonStop NET/MASTER MS security service that enables the definition of authorized NonStop NET/MASTER MS users and their associated functions and privileges. User Services. The NonStop NET/MASTER MS service that provides an entry point into an NCL procedure defined and written by an installation, usually a primary menu. user. A general term describing any person or entity that can use NonStop NET/MASTER MS. There are three types of users: real, virtual, and remote. user authority level. A number assigned to a NonStop NET/MASTER MS user. Authority levels range from 0 (lowest) through 255 (highest) The user authority level is compared with the command authority level to determine if a user can execute a command. user database (UDB). A file that NCL can process, including entry-sequenced, key-sequenced, and edit files, and Guardian processes. user ID. The unique identifier for a NonStop NET/MASTER MS user. user ID definition record. The record, created by UMS, that contains information about a particular user ID. User ID definition records are stored in the UMS database. user installation attributes. A set of characters that describes characteristics of the user ID definition that are meaningful to NonStop NET/MASTER MS. Using the SECCALL verb, NCL procedures can read and use the installation attributes for any purpose Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 37

266 Glossary user NCL procedure. An NCL procedure created by a user. user panel library. A panel library containing the panel description files belonging to a particular user or group of users. user procedure library. A procedure library containing the NCL procedures belonging to a particular user or group of users. user variable. A variable created by an NCL procedure. Parameters are user variables. user-defined error handler. An error handler defined by a user. user-defined map. A map created by a user to access data structures defined by the user. user-defined token. A SPI token defined by a user. user-written function. A function written by a user. Utility Access NCL (UANCL). NCL procedures and panel description files used from UMS to maintain access to external utilities. validation. The process by which Panel Services determines acceptable input. validation rules. The rules used by Panel Services to determine acceptable input. Validation rules are defined using the panel control statement #FLD. value. The second part of a qualifier in a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command. It specifies the extent to which the preceding keyword is modified. variable. A lexical element that stores data that can change as a result of the execution of an NCL process. All variables begin with an ampersand (&), except input field variables in panels. variable data. Data in an output field of a panel that is determined by the value of the corresponding variable in the NCL process that displays the panel. variable length data section. The data component of an element that can vary in length. It can consist of one or more elements. variable prefix. Where a variable specification is terminated by an asterisk (*), the variable prefix is the part before the asterisk. In this context, the asterisk acts as a wild card. variable substitution. The process of determining the final form of a variable name. Variable substitution is required only when there is more than one ampersand (&) in a variable specification. variable suffix. Where a variable specification is terminated by an asterisk (*), the variable suffix is the part of any existing variable with a matching variable prefix. variable-level justification. In a panel, the process of stripping trailing blanks, padding, and justifying the data in a field after variable substitution. VARS list. A list of variable specifications beginning with the VARS keyword in a verb. vartable. A memory-resident table used for storing items of data that may change as the result of the execution of an NCL process. Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

267 Glossary verb. Sometimes called a verb statement, an NCL statement that is not an intrinsic part of NCL. Its availability depends on the enabling of a NonStop NET/MASTER MS feature. Verbs do not affect the structure and flow of NCL process execution. virtual user. A NonStop NET/MASTER MS user that does not have a terminal associated with it. A virtual user acts the same way as a real user and has the same attributes as a real user operating in OCS. wake-up timer. A NonStop NET/MASTER RMS timer under the control of BMON that triggers the next RMS timer to act. warning. A condition, encountered performing a NonStop NET/MASTER MS command or operation, that is significant but which does not cause the command or operation to fail. In NCL, a condition caused during compilation that would not cause run-time errors during execution of the NCL process. A message that begins with WARNING is displayed. Compilation continues and an object is produced. See also compilation error, fatal error, run-time error, and warning. window. The logical surface of a terminal or workstation upon which information is displayed Tandem Computers Incorporated Glossary 39

268 Glossary (This page left intentionally blank) Glossary Tandem Computers Incorporated

269 Index 100% LIMIT See Holding-mode messages 75% LIMIT See Holding-mode messages A ABORT command, DSNM 7-4 Activity log 6-1 examining, with Activity Log Browse facility 6-2 files browsing 6-17 browsing remote 6-18 displaying information about 6-20 opening 6-19 swapping 6-17, 6-20 FIND command 6-16 labels in 6-14 LOCATE command 6-15 locating a position in 6-15 LOGPROC procedure 6-1 marking position in 6-14 records examining 6-2, 6-5 formats 6-2 limiting a search in 6-16 refreshing 6-2, 6-5 searching by date 6-9 searching by string or field value 6-11 searching by time 6-10 sending messages to 6-19 Activity Log Browse facility 6-2 commands 6-5 entering 6-2 executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from 6-19 exiting 6-2 function key definitions 6-5 getting help for commands 1-15 for messages 1-13 ZLOGBRWN 6-2 AGGREGATE command, DSNM Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 1

270 Index ANSWER command, DSNM 7-6, 7-13 Asynchronous execution of NCL procedures 10-7 AT command 3-5, Authority level, command 3-1, 3-4 AUTO HOLD message See Holding-mode messages AUTOEXEC operand, of SYSPARMS command 10-7 AUTOHOLD command 4-4 B Background logger, BLOG 3-10 Background monitor, BMON 3-10 Background processing environment See Processing environments Background system process, BSYS 3-10 Block-mode applications, interface from NonStop NET/MASTER MS 7-20 See also Guardian utilities BLOG, background logger 3-10 BMON, background monitor 3-10 BREAK command, DSNM 7-6, 7-16 BSYS, background system process 3-10 C Capture buffer See Command Entry facility Central NRD message queue See NRD messages Changing your password 2-18 CLEANUP command, DSNM 7-6, 7-17 CLEAR command 4-6 CMD core statement, NCL 10-1, 10-3, CMDAUTH operand, of SYSPARMS command 5-17 CMDREPL operand, of SYSPARMS command 3-9, 5-17 Command Entry facility 5-2/15 capture buffer 5-2, 5-9 emptying 5-15 printing contents of 5-14 resetting parameters 5-15 scrolling through 5-11 command restrictions 5-7, 5-8 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

271 Index Command Entry facility (continued) command stack 5-2, 5-8 entering commands 5-7, 7-9 entering multiple commands 5-7 entering NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands with 5-7 ERASE command 5-15 establishing a session with external utilities 7-8 field definitions 5-5 function key definitions 5-4 getting help for commands 1-15 for messages 1-13 reexecuting commands 5-8 REINIT command 5-15 sending utility commands 7-10 unsolicited message display 5-7 when to use 5-2 ZCENFACN 5-3 Command input line, OCS 4-11, 4-22 Command replacements 3-9 Command stack, in Command Entry facility See also History buffer definition of 5-2 reexecuting commands with 5-8 Command Tutorial Selection List 1-15, 1-16 Commands DSNM See DSNM See DSNM commands getting help for 1-15 in activity log 6-15 in Activity Log Browse facility 6-5 NonStop NET/MASTER MS See NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands replacements of, with NCL procedures 3-9 Compiling NCL procedures 9-10, 10-6, Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 3

272 Index Console Extras facility 7-29 browsing a utility 7-31 configurations 2-24 customized utility list 2-24 default utility list 2-24, 7-30 entering 7-29 field definitions 7-32 function key definitions 7-30 running a utility 7-31 user utility list 2-24 Utility Details screen 7-31 Conversational utilities, interface from NonStop NET/MASTER MS 7-6 See also Guardian utilities Creating NCL procedures 10-1 Current processing environment See Processing environments Cursor deletion See NRD messages Customized procedure library See Procedure libraries Customizing function keys in OCS 4-18 D Defining function keys in OCS 4-18 DELCHAR operand, of PROFILE command 4-4 Dependent processing environment See Processing environments Dependent request queue Dependent response queue Display set, NetStatus 7-23, 7-24 See also NetStatus Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility 5-16/20 function key definitions 5-17 LOCATE command 5-18 Operands screen 5-18 resetting SYSPARMS value in 5-20 scroll commands 5-18 updating SYSPARMS value in 5-19 Displaying contents of files Distributed panel object file 9-12 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

273 Index Distributed Systems Network Management See DSNM Distribution procedure library See Procedure libraries DOM ID See Domain ID Domain ID 4-7 See also NRD messages DSNM 7-3, 7-5/20 DSNM commands authority levels 7-5 getting help for 7-5, 7-7 issuing from NetStatus 7-26 routing to remote systems 7-5 DSNM object 7-3 DSNM subsystem 7-3 DSNM subsystem commands 7-4 DSNM utility access commands ANSWER 7-6, 7-13 BREAK 7-6, 7-16 CLEANUP 7-6, 7-17 EOF 7-6 KILL 7-6, 7-17 OPSYS interface 7-6 SEND 7-6, 7-8, 7-13 DSNMMODS help request 7-5 DSNMOBJ help request 7-5 E EDIT command 9-5 Edit Services facility 9-1 compile option 10-6 creating files 9-5 deleting a file 9-9 editing a file 9-8 entering 9-1 file access in 9-4 function keys 9-4 locating files 9-7 selection list 9-2 show/browse option 9-8, Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 5

274 Index Edit Services Selection List screen 9-2 EMS messages 4-26 See also Messages EMSP virtual user 3-10 EMSPROC, NCL procedure 3-10, 4-26 ENQUIRE command, DSNM 7-4 EOF command, DSNM 7-6 EQUATE command 4-24 Equates 3-8, 4-24 ERASE command, Command Entry facility 5-15 Errors, during NCL procedure compilation 10-6 Event messages See Messages Event monitoring 4-25 EVERY command 3-5, EXEC command 10-7 Executing NCL procedures 10-7 EXIT function key 1-12 F Fatal errors, during NCL procedure compilation 10-6 Field definitions in Command Entry facility 5-5 in Console Extras facility 7-32 Files activity log See Activity log browsing existing 9-8 creating 9-5 deleting, from Edit Services Selection List 9-9 displaying contents of editing existing 9-8 locating generic 9-7 locating specific 9-7 ownership, how it is determined 9-5 security attributes of at file creation 9-5 changing 9-6 FIND command, use in activity log 6-16 FK command 4-17, 4-18 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

275 Index Full NRD messages See NRD messages Function keys conventions 1-2 customizing in OCS 4-18 definitions default 1-17 in Activity Log Browse facility 6-5 in Command Entry facility 5-4 in Console Extras facility 7-30 in Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility 5-17 in Edit Services facility 9-4 in NetStatus 7-27 in OCS 4-17 EXIT 1-12 for executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands 3-4 RETURN 1-12 G GLBL equate types 3-8, 4-24 Global configuration values 2-29 Global equates 3-8, 4-24 Guardian block-mode applications, PROGRUN interface to 7-20 See also PROGRUN command Guardian defaults 7-19 Guardian user ID for external processes 7-18 when working with utilities 7-19 Guardian utilities, TACL macros See also OPSYS command command set authority level 7-8 current Guardian user ID 7-10 DSNM utility access commands 7-6 ending a session with 7-17 establishing a session with 7-8 OPSYS interface to 7-6 responding to requests from 7-13 sending a break message to 7-16 sending commands to 7-10 GUID operand, of PROFILE command Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 7

276 Index H Help facility 1-13 Command Tutorial Selection List 1-15, 1-16 for DSNM commands 7-5, 7-7 for messages 1-13 for NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands 1-15 for services, facilities, and panels 1-13 History buffer 4-18 displaying the contents 4-23 managing 4-23 retrieving commands 4-22, 4-23 HOLD operand, of PROFILE command 4-6 HOLDING message See Holding-mode messages Holding-mode messages % LIMIT % LIMIT 4-6 AUTO HOLD 4-3 HOLDING 4-4 MSG QUEUED 4-4, 4-6 MSGS LOST 4-6 I INFO command, DSNM 7-4 Information line, OCS 4-11 INITCMD operand, of PROFILE command 4-22 Initial OCS procedure See OCS INMC links 8-1 See also Remote operations automatic reset 8-5 displaying status of 8-2, 8-3 failure 8-5, 8-10 NRD messages 8-8, 8-10 resetting 8-9 restarting 8-9 session types 8-10 starting 8-3 stopping 8-9 units 8-10 INQUIRE command, DSNM 7-4 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

277 Index Installation Attribute INTCMD verb, NCL 10-2, 10-3, Inter-NET/MASTER Connection (INMC) See INMC links Inter-System Routing (ISR) See ISR ISR (Inter-System Routing) 4-27, 8-1 See also Remote Operations ISR command 8-8 K K command 4-6 KILL command, DSNM 7-6, 7-17 L Labels, use in activity log 6-14 LINK RESET command 8-9 LINK START command 8-3 LINK STOP command 8-9 Links See INMC links LIST command Local equates 3-8, 4-24 LOCATE command in Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility 5-18 use in activity log 6-15 Location, changing in user ID definition record 2-23 LOCL equate types 4-24 LOG command 6-19 Logging off from local systems 1-8 from remote systems 8-9 Logging on first time password change 2-18 from logon screen 1-6 from TACL prompt 1-6 to a remote NonStop NET/MASTER MS system 8-3 automatically 8-6 explicitly 8-3 to multiple NonStop NET/MASTER MS systems Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 9

278 Index LOGP virtual user 3-10 LOGPROC, NCL procedure 3-10, 4-27, 6-1 M MAPDEL operand, of SYSPARMS command 5-17 MAPLOAD operand, of SYSPARMS command 5-17 Menu 1-5 hierarchy illustrated 1-11 navigating 1-12 panel skipping 1-12 selecting options from 1-12 Message code, in user ID definition record 2-10 Message hold queue 4-6 changing size of 4-6 Messages asynchronous display in OCS 4-2 controlling flow from remote sites 8-8 critical See NRD messages EMS 4-26 event flow of 4-26 from remote systems, color and highlighting of 8-5 getting help for 1-13 holding-mode See Holding-mode messages monitor-class 2-10 non-roll-delete See NRD messages NRD See NRD messages OCS message display area 4-2 OCS recall buffer 4-13 PPO 4-25, 4-26 reorganizing display 4-6 roll-delete See Roll-delete messages routing, with Inter-System Routing 4-27 sending to activity log 6-19 solicited 8-2 types of 4-25 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

279 Index Messages (continued) unsolicited 8-2 unsolicited, receiving in Command Entry facility 5-7 Mode indicator, OCS 4-12 Monitor-class messages 2-10 Monitoring events 4-25 MSG QUEUED See Holding-mode messages MSGPROC, NCL procedure 4-27 MSGS LOST See Holding-mode messages N NCL 1-2, 10-1 CMD core statement 10-1, restrictions on commands 10-3 INTCMD verb 10-2, restrictions on commands 10-3 object code, where stored 10-7 procedures See NCL procedures sample initial OCS procedure 10-5 source code See Procedure libraries system variables 10-3 NCL ID 10-7, NCL object file search path 10-9 NCL procedure library search path 10-9 NCL procedures as command replacements 3-9 asynchronous execution 10-7 checking command authority levels from 3-4 compiling 10-7 controlling time and frequency of execution creating 10-1 EMSPROC 3-10, 4-26 executing commands from within 3-4, 10-1 executing in the background executing NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from 4-24 executing with timer commands LOGPROC 3-10, 4-27, Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 11

280 Index NCL procedures (continued) MSGPROC 4-27 search path 10-9 serial execution 10-7 terminating test compilation 10-6 trial compilation of 9-10 user services 11-1 NCL process identifier (NCL ID) 10-7, NCL processes 10-7 NCLCHECK command 10-6 NCLCUSTSRC operand, of PARAM command 10-8 NCLDISTSRC operand, of PARAM command 10-8 NETSTAT, NCL procedure 7-23 See also NetStatus NetStatus 7-23 Configuration screen 7-24 display set 7-23, 7-24 default 2-9 function key definitions 7-27 issuing NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands from 7-26 NETSTAT NCL procedure 7-23 Network Status screen 7-25 viewing command responses in 7-27 Network Control Language See NCL NNM utility program, dynamic logon 1-6, 2-6 Non-roll-delete messages See NRD messages NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands See also individual commands See also Timer commands abbreviating 3-3 authority level 3-1 checking, from within NCL procedures 3-4, 10-1 concatenating 3-3 creating customized 4-24 customized 3-8 entering manually 3-3 entering, with Command Entry facility 5-2, 5-7 executing from Activity Log Browse facility 6-19 executing from within NCL procedures 3-4, 4-24, 10-1 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

281 Index NonStop NET/MASTER MS commands (continued) executing in the background 3-10, function key definitions 3-4 getting help for 1-15 issuing from NetStatus 7-26 reexecuting previous, in OCS 4-23 NonStop NET/MASTER MS Primary Menu 1-8 NonStop NET/MASTER MS, definition of 1-1 NRD messages 4-3, 4-7 central NRD message queue 4-8, 4-9 deleting messages from 4-9 cursor deletion 4-9 delimiter line 4-7 displaying on OCS window 4-8 displaying queued messages 4-8 domain ID 4-7 from remote systems 4-10, 8-8, 8-10 full 4-7 NRD PEND message 4-9 purged from queue 4-10 removing from OCS window 4-9 links, failure of 8-8, 8-10 OPER attribute 4-8 generated by utility sessions 7-13 removing from OCS window 4-9 redisplaying removed messages 4-9 removing from OCS window 4-9 NRD PEND See NRD messages NRDELCH operand, of PROFILE command 4-7 NRDRET command 4-8, 4-9 O Object defined, DSNM concept of 7-3 monitoring with NetStatus 7-23 Object code, NCL Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 13

282 Index OCS 4-1 asynchronous message display 4-2 command input line 4-11, 4-22 entering 4-1 exiting 4-1 function key definitions 4-17 customizing 4-18 types of assignments 4-19 getting help for commands 1-15 for messages 1-13 holding-mode messages See Holding-mode messages information line 4-11 initial OCS procedure 10-5 message display area 4-2 See also NRD messages See also Roll-delete messages mode indicator 4-12 operator profile, modifying 4-22 recall buffer 4-13 entering 4-13 exiting 4-13 function keys 4-15 screen 4-14 window history buffer maintained by 4-23 identifier 4-11 moving from one to another 4-30 naming 4-31 opening a second 4-30 removing NRD messages from 4-9 standard 4-2 OCSID command 4-11 OPER attribute, NRD messages See NRD messages Operands screen, in Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility 5-18 Operator Control Services See OCS Operator profile, OCS, modifying 4-22 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

283 Index OPSYS command interface to conversational utilities 7-6 interface to DSNM 7-4 interface to Guardian utilities 7-6 ORDER command 4-6 Ownership of files 9-5 P PAGE command 4-6 Panel libraries 9-11 Panel skipping 1-12 Panels 1-5 testing 9-11 PARAM command NCLCUSTSRC operand 10-8 NCLDISTSRC operand 10-8 PNLCUSTSRC operand 9-11 PNLDISTSRC operand 9-11 SWGUID operand 9-5 Password 1-7 changing 2-18 characters 2-21 first time logging on 1-7, 2-18 setting expiration value 1-7 temporary 2-24 valid 2-21 Persistent NCL processes 10-8 PNLCUSTSRC operand, of PARAM command 9-11 PNLDISTSRC operand, of PARAM command 9-11 PPO messages 4-25 PPRELOAD operand, of SYSPARMS command 5-17 PRELOAD operand, of SYSPARMS command 5-17 Primary processing environment See Processing environments Procedure libraries customized 9-3, 10-8 displaying files in distribution 9-3, 10-8 file access in 9-3 switching 9-3 system Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 15

284 Index Procedure libraries (continued) user 9-2, 10-8 default in user ID definition record 2-6 Processing environments background 3-11, 10-1, 10-8, 10-11, current 10-1, dependent 10-2, dependent queues primary 10-1, PROFILE command DELCHAR operand 4-4 GUID operand 9-6 HOLD operand 4-6 INITCMD operand 4-22 NRDELCH operand 4-7 RDMIN operand 4-3 ROLL operand 4-4 PROGRUN command 7-20 PUNLOAD operand, of SYSPARMS command 5-17 PURGE NRD command 4-9 PURGE TIMER command 3-7 PWMIN operand, of SYSPARMS command 2-21 R RDMIN operand, of PROFILE command 4-3 Real user, definition of 3-10 Recall buffer entering 4-13 exiting 4-13 function keys 4-15 screen 4-14 Records, in activity log examining 6-2, 6-5 formats of 6-2 refreshing 6-2, 6-5 searching by date 6-9 searching by string or field value 6-11 searching by time 6-10 REINIT command, Command Entry facility 5-15 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

285 Index Remote operations controlling message flow 8-8 establishing remote sessions 8-1 indirect paths 8-7 ISR 8-8 links 8-1 failure 8-5, 8-10 resetting 8-9 restarting 8-9 starting 8-3 stopping 8-9 local user ID requirements 8-2 logging on to a remote system 8-3 message color, highlighting 8-5 message prefix 8-5 NRD messages 8-8, 8-10 remote user ID requirements 8-2 sending commands 8-6 Remote Operator Control (ROC) 8-1 See also Remote operations Remote sessions, establishing 8-1 REPL equate types 3-8, 4-24 RETURN function key, defined 1-12 ROC See Remote Operator Control ROLL operand, of PROFILE command 4-4 Roll-delete messages 4-3 changing size of message display area 4-3 clearing message area 4-6 controlling message display 4-4 message hold queue 4-6 roll-delete delimiter 4-3 roll-time delay interval 4-3 suspending flow of 4-4 ROUTE command 8-6 S Screen functions, getting help for 1-13 Search path, NCL procedures Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 17

286 Index Security attributes of files at file creation 9-5 changing 9-6 SEND command, DSNM 7-6, 7-8, 7-13 Session types, INMC links 8-10 Sessions, remote, establishing 8-1 SHOW COMMANDS command 3-2, 5-17 SHOW EQUATES command 3-8 SHOW FILEINFO command SHOW ISR command 8-8 SHOW LINKS command 8-2, 8-3 SHOW MAPS command 5-17 SHOW NCL command SHOW NRD command 4-8 SHOW PANELS command 5-17 SHOW PRELOAD command 3-9, 5-17 SHOW TIMER command 3-5 SHOW USERS command 3-11 SIGNOFF command 8-9 SIGNON command 8-3 Solicited messages 8-2 Source code, NCL See Procedure libraries SPLIT command 1-18 Splitting windows 1-18 START command 10-7 START command, DSNM 7-4 STOP command, DSNM 7-4 SUBMIT command 3-11, Subsystem, DSNM concept of 7-3 SWAP command 1-20 Swapping windows 1-20 SWGUID operand, of PARAM command 9-5 SYSPARMS command See also Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility AUTOEXEC operand 10-7 CMDAUTH operand 5-17 CMDREPL operand 3-9, 5-17 displaying 5-16 MAPDEL operand 5-17 MAPLOAD operand 5-17 PPRELOAD operand 5-17 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

287 Index SYSPARMS command (continued) PRELOAD operand 5-17 PUNLOAD operand 5-17 PWMIN operand 2-21 resetting 5-20 UNLOAD operand 5-17 updating 5-16, 5-19 System parameter settings See SYSPARMS command System Support Services Command Entry facility 5-2/15 Display/Update SYSPARMS Settings facility 5-16/20 System variables, NCL 10-3 T TEDIT, restrictions on use in NonStop NET/MASTER MS 9-9 Telephone number, changing in user ID definition record 2-23 Terminals timeouts 2-29 types supported 1-2 Terminating NCL procedures Test compilation, NCL procedures 10-6 Testing panels 9-11 Timeouts, on terminals 2-29 Timer commands attributes of 3-5 automatic deletion of 3-6 executing in background 3-6 executing NCL procedures with limiting times executed 3-7 overriding automatic deletion of 3-6 purge ID number 3-5 purging 3-7 routing to target user ID 3-6 timer ID 3-6 timer queue 3-6 Timer queue See Timer commands Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 19

288 Index U UMS See User ID Management Services Units, INMC links 8-10 UNLOAD operand, of SYSPARMS command 5-17 Unsolicited messages 5-7, 8-2 UPDATE command, DSNM 7-4 User definition list description of fields 2-13 locating records in 2-16 scrolling through 2-15 User ID See Guardian user ID characters 1-7 User ID definition record 1-5, 2-3 Access Authorities screen 2-7 Installation Attribute 1 field 7-24 listing other users 2-12 location of user, changing 2-23 message code in 2-10 OCS Details screen 2-10 refreshing 2-24 telephone number of user, changing 2-23 User Attributes screen 2-5 User Details screen 2-3 User Installation Attributes screen 2-9 user name, changing 2-23 user procedure libraries, default 2-6 user services procedure field 11-1 viewing other users 2-18 User ID Management Services See also User ID definition record extended UMS authority 2-2 User name, changing in user ID definition record 2-23 User procedure library See Procedure libraries User Services 11-1 Index Tandem Computers Incorporated

289 Index V Variables, system 10-3 Virtual users 3-10, submitting commands to 3-11, W Warnings, during NCL procedure compilation 10-6 Windows 1-5 OCS history buffer maintained by 4-23 identifier 4-11 moving between 4-30 naming 4-31 opening more than one 4-30 removing NRD messages from 4-9 standard 4-2 splitting 1-18 swapping 1-20 working with two 1-18 Z ZCENFACN Command Entry NCL procedure 5-3 ZLOGBRWN Activity Log Browse NCL procedure Tandem Computers Incorporated Index 21